Professional Documents
Culture Documents
PDS2000
Version 4.2.20
December 2014
Date
4.2.20
19/12/2014
4.2.19
15/12/2014
4.2.18
07/10/2014
4.2.17
30/09/2014
4.2.16
02/09/2014
4.2.15
21/08/2014
4.2.14
30/07/2014
4.2.13
16/07/2014
4.2.12
03/07/2014
4.2.11
12/05/2014
14/04/2014
4.2.9
31/03/2014
Views: Section added with description Plan View Survey coverage and
Edit.
4.2.8
06/03/2014
4.2.7
21/02/2014
4.2.6
23/01/2014
4.2.5
03/01/2014
4.2.4
14/03/2013
4.2.3
21/12/2012
4.2.2
03/12/2012
4.2.1
30/10/2012
4.2.0
30/08/2012
4.1.2
19/06/2012
4.1.1
19/03/2012
4.1.0
24/01/2012
4.0.2
28/10/2011
4.0.1
04/10/2011
4.0.0
24/06/2011
3.8.1
24/01/2011
3.8.0
27/10/2010
3.7.6
18/09/2010
3.7.5
06/08/2010
3.7.4
15/06/2010
3.7.3
22/04/2010
3.7.2
04/02/2010
3.7.1
12/01/2010
Small updates
3.7.0
17/12/2009
3.6.1
03/06/2009
3.6.0
03/02/2009
3.5.2
03/06/2008
3.5.1
06/03/2008
3.5.0
18/01/2008
3.4.1
21/12/2007
The manual is updated for PDS2000 version 3.2.0.4. Parts of the manual
are already updated for the new version 3.3.0.0.
3.4.0
01/11/2007
Contents
1 Introduction
2 PDS2000 Documentation
3 Installation
11
Contents i
4 Using PDS2000
61
5 Starting PDS2000
67
ii Contents
6 Coordinate System
85
7 Vessel Configuration
105
Contents iii
iv Contents
8 Guidance
155
9 Events
171
10 Control Center
179
Contents v
11 Explorer
227
vi Contents
12 Acquisition
275
Contents vii
13 Views
295
viii Contents
Contents ix
x Contents
14 Replay
439
15 Processing
443
16 Editing
445
Contents xi
xii Contents
17 Create Model
551
18 Grid Model
559
Contents xiii
599
20 Plot
607
xiv Contents
Contents xv
663
22 Export
673
xvi Contents
Contents xvii
Figures
Figure 3-1
Figure 3-2
Figure 3-3
Figure 3-4
Figure 3-5
Figure 3-6
Figure 3-7
Figure 3-8
Figure 3-9
Figure 3-10
Figure 3-11
Figure 3-12
Figure 3-13
Figure 3-14
Figure 3-15
Figure 3-16
Figure 3-17
Figure 3-18
Figure 3-19
Figure 3-20
Figure 3-21
Figure 3-22
Figure 3-23
Figure 3-24
Figure 3-25
Figure 3-26
Figure 3-27
Figure 3-28
Figure 3-29
Figure 3-30
Figure 3-31
Figure 3-32
Figure 3-33
Figure 3-34
Figure 3-35
Figure 3-36
Figure 3-37
Figure 3-38
Figure 3-39
Figure 3-40
Figure 3-41
Figure 3-42
xviii Figures
Figure 3-43
Figure 3-44
Figure 3-45
Figure 3-46
Figure 3-47
Figure 3-48
Figure 3-49
Figure 3-50
Figure 3-51
Figure 3-52
Figure 3-53
Figure 3-54
Figure 3-55
Figure 3-56
Figure 3-57
Figure 3-58
Figure 3-59
Figure 3-60
Figure 3-61
Figure 3-62
Figure 3-63
Figure 4-1
Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-4
Figure 4-5
Figure 5-1
Figure 5-2
Figure 5-3
Figure 5-4
Figure 5-5
Figure 5-6
Figure 5-7
Figure 5-8
Figure 5-9
Figure 5-10
Figure 5-11
Figure 5-12
Figure 5-13
Figure 5-14
Figure 5-15
Figure 5-16
Figure 5-17
Figure 5-18
Figure 5-19
Figure 5-20
Figure 5-21
Figure 5-22
Figure 5-23
Figure 5-24
Figures xix
Figure 5-25
Figure 5-26
Figure 6-1
Figure 6-2
Figure 6-3
Figure 6-4
Figure 6-5
Figure 6-6
Figure 6-7
Figure 6-8
Figure 6-9
Figure 6-10
Figure 6-11
Figure 6-12
Figure 6-13
Figure 6-14
Figure 6-15
Figure 6-16
Figure 6-17
Figure 6-18
Figure 6-19
Figure 6-20
Figure 6-21
Figure 7-1
Figure 7-2
Figure 7-3
Figure 7-4
Figure 7-5
Figure 7-6
Figure 7-7
Figure 7-8
Figure 7-9
Figure 7-10
Figure 7-11
Figure 7-12
Figure 7-13
Figure 7-14
Figure 7-15
Figure 7-16
Figure 7-17
Figure 7-18
Figure 7-19
Figure 7-20
Figure 7-21
Figure 7-22
Figure 7-23
Figure 7-24
Figure 7-25
xx Figures
Figure 7-26
Figure 7-27
Figure 7-28
Figure 7-29
Figure 7-30
Figure 7-31
Figure 7-32
Figure 7-33
Figure 7-34
Figure 7-35
Figure 7-36
Figure 7-37
Figure 7-38
Figure 7-39
Figure 7-40
Figure 7-41
Figure 7-42
Figure 7-43
Figure 7-44
Figure 7-45
Figure 7-46
Figure 7-47
Figure 7-48
Figure 7-49
Figure 7-50
Figure 7-51
Figure 7-52
Figure 7-53
Figure 8-1
Figure 8-2
Figure 8-3
Figure 8-4
Figure 8-5
Figure 8-6
Figure 8-7
Figure 8-8
Figure 8-9
Figure 8-10
Figure 8-11
Figure 8-12
Figure 8-13
Figure 8-14
Figure 8-15
Figure 8-16
Figure 8-17
Figure 9-1
Figure 9-2
Figure 9-3
Tools page with the Pipe Configuration page of the trailing suction hopper
application ....................................................................................................................... 131
Tools page with the Pipe Detection page ........................................................................ 132
Tools page with the Production Parameters page of the trailing suction hopper
application for two bunkers .............................................................................................. 133
Tools page with the Trip Registration page of the trailing suction hopper application .... 134
Statistics Report .............................................................................................................. 135
PDF report file ................................................................................................................. 137
Logging page in the vessel configuration ........................................................................ 137
Log File Index in the logging page for PDS2000 format ................................................. 138
Backup log in the logging page for PDS2000 format ...................................................... 138
PDS2000 Grid Model setup in the logging page ............................................................. 139
Cleaned XYZ logging reduction in the Logging page ...................................................... 139
Grid model input for the production ................................................................................. 140
Dredge track sampling rate ............................................................................................. 140
File name for the DXF file ................................................................................................ 140
Grid model input for backscatter grid model logging ....................................................... 141
7K logging reduction ........................................................................................................ 142
Backup log in the logging page for S7K format ............................................................... 142
FAU 1 or FAU 2 format for the FAU logging ................................................................... 144
Uncorrected or fully corrected multibeam data selection for the GSF logging ................ 144
Log space management .................................................................................................. 145
Logging conditions........................................................................................................... 146
Create new log file ........................................................................................................... 146
Simulation page in the vessel configuration .................................................................... 147
Alias page in the vessel configuration with an alias for NMEA GGA .............................. 148
Alarms page in the vessel configuration ......................................................................... 149
Alarms window with an alarm .......................................................................................... 149
Conditions window with an alarm .................................................................................... 150
Condition dialog where the condition can be modified or an attribute can be
selected ........................................................................................................................... 150
Route page in the guidance ............................................................................................ 156
Runlines page in the guidance ........................................................................................ 156
Waypoints page in the guidance ..................................................................................... 157
Design Model page in the guidance ................................................................................ 158
3D Design Model editor ................................................................................................... 159
A checked 3D model with errors ..................................................................................... 160
Cutter Dredge page in the guidance ............................................................................... 161
Work Areas page in the guidance ................................................................................... 162
Restricted Areas page in the guidance ........................................................................... 163
Restricted Areas editor .................................................................................................... 163
Vessel Placement page in the guidance ......................................................................... 164
Placement Points editor .................................................................................................. 165
Dredge Instruction page in the guidance ........................................................................ 166
Dredge Instruction Editor ................................................................................................. 166
Object Distance page in the guidance............................................................................. 167
Views in the Acquisition that have an alarm frame with text ........................................... 168
Guidance editor with runlines .......................................................................................... 169
Mode page of the Events page ....................................................................................... 171
Conditions menu.............................................................................................................. 172
Event Definition editor ..................................................................................................... 173
Figures xxi
Figure 9-4
Figure 9-5
Figure 9-6
Figure 9-7
Figure 9-8
Figure 9-9
Figure 10-1
Figure 10-2
Figure 10-3
Figure 10-4
Figure 10-5
Figure 10-6
Figure 10-7
Figure 10-8
Figure 10-9
Figure 10-10
Figure 10-11
Figure 10-12
Figure 10-13
Figure 10-14
Figure 10-15
Figure 10-16
Figure 10-17
Figure 10-18
Figure 10-19
Figure 10-20
Figure 10-21
Figure 10-22
Figure 10-23
Figure 10-24
Figure 10-25
Figure 10-26
Figure 10-27
Figure 10-28
Figure 10-29
Figure 10-30
Figure 10-31
Figure 10-32
Figure 10-33
Figure 10-34
Figure 10-35
Figure 10-36
Figure 10-37
Figure 10-38
Figure 10-39
Figure 10-40
Figure 10-41
Figure 10-42
Figure 10-43
Figure 10-44
xxii Figures
Figure 10-45
Figure 10-46
Figure 10-47
Figure 10-48
Figure 10-49
Figure 10-50
Figure 10-51
Figure 10-52
Figure 10-53
Figure 10-54
Figure 10-55
Figure 10-56
Figure 10-57
Figure 10-58
Figure 10-59
Figure 10-60
Figure 10-61
Figure 11-1
Figure 11-2
Figure 11-3
Figure 11-4
Figure 11-5
Figure 11-6
Figure 11-7
Figure 11-8
Figure 11-9
Figure 11-10
Figure 11-11
Figure 11-12
Figure 11-13
Figure 11-14
Figure 11-15
Figure 11-16
Figure 11-17
Figure 11-18
Figure 11-19
Figure 11-20
Figure 11-21
Figure 11-22
Figure 11-23
Figure 11-24
Figure 11-25
Figure 11-26
Figure 11-27
Figure 11-28
Figure 11-29
Figure 11-30
Figure 11-31
Figure 11-32
Figures xxiii
Figure 11-33
Figure 11-34
Figure 11-35
Figure 11-36
Figure 11-37
Figure 11-38
Figure 11-39
Figure 11-40
Figure 11-41
Figure 11-42
Figure 11-43
Figure 11-44
Figure 11-45
Figure 11-46
Figure 11-47
Figure 11-48
Figure 12-1
Figure 12-2
Figure 12-3
Figure 12-4
Figure 12-5
Figure 12-6
Figure 12-7
Figure 12-8
Figure 12-9
Figure 12-10
Figure 12-11
Figure 12-12
Figure 12-13
Figure 12-14
Figure 12-15
Figure 12-16
Figure 12-17
Figure 12-18
Figure 12-19
Figure 12-20
Figure 12-21
Figure 12-22
Figure 12-23
Figure 12-24
Figure 12-25
Figure 13-1
Figure 13-2
Figure 13-3
Figure 13-4
Figure 13-5
Figure 13-6
Figure 13-7
Figure 13-8
xxiv Figures
Figure 13-9
Figure 13-10
Figure 13-11
Figure 13-12
Figure 13-13
Figure 13-14
Figure 13-15
Figure 13-16
Figure 13-17
Figure 13-18
Figure 13-19
Figure 13-20
Figure 13-21
Figure 13-22
Figure 13-23
Figure 13-24
Figure 13-25
Figure 13-26
Figure 13-27
Figure 13-28
Figure 13-29
Figure 13-30
Figure 13-31
Figure 13-32
Figure 13-33
Figure 13-34
Figure 13-35
Figure 13-36
Figure 13-37
Figure 13-38
Figure 13-39
Figure 13-40
Figure 13-41
Figure 13-42
Figure 13-43
Figure 13-44
Figure 13-45
Figure 13-46
Figure 13-47
Figure 13-48
Figure 13-49
Figure 13-50
Figure 13-51
Figure 13-52
Figure 13-53
Figure 13-54
Figure 13-55
Figure 13-56
Figure 13-57
Figure 13-58
Figures xxv
Multibeam QC Backscatter Signal Strength Profile view with the multibeam xyz
computation and all four the multipings .......................................................................... 352
Figure 13-60 Multibeam QC Raw Profile view with the raw data in the color mode Quality ............. 353
Figure 13-61 Multibeam QC Raw Profile view with the multibeam xyz computation in the color
mode Quality ................................................................................................................... 353
Figure 13-62 Multibeam QC Raw Profile view with one ping in the color mode Detection
Process ........................................................................................................................... 354
Figure 13-63 Multibeam QC Raw Profile view with multipings in the color mode Sequence
number ............................................................................................................................ 354
Figure 13-64 Multibeam QC Raw Profile + Total Propagation Errors view with the color mode
Quality and the vertical and horizontal TPEs ................................................................. 355
Figure 13-65 Multibeam QC Total Propagation Errors view with the vertical and horizontal
TPEs and IHO errors ...................................................................................................... 356
Figure 13-66 Vertical error diagram ..................................................................................................... 357
Figure 13-67 Horizontal error diagram ................................................................................................. 358
Figure 13-68 Multibeam QC Vertical Waterfall view with the multibeam data item Quality .............. 360
Figure 13-69 Multibeam Filters view .................................................................................................... 364
Figure 13-70 Multibeam filters and Sound Velocity icon ...................................................................... 364
Figure 13-71 Select Multibeam device ................................................................................................. 364
Figure 13-72 Select multibeam device ................................................................................................. 365
Figure 13-73 Use surface speed of sound as first entry in table option ............................................. 367
Figure 13-74 Two profiles with a different surface speed of sound but remainder of the profile
remains the same. .......................................................................................................... 368
Figure 13-75 Depth and Range filters .................................................................................................. 368
Figure 13-76 Intersection and Slope filters ........................................................................................... 369
Figure 13-77 Flying Object Filter .......................................................................................................... 369
Figure 13-78 Port and Starboard Angle Nadir filter .............................................................................. 370
Figure 13-79 Incidence angle ............................................................................................................... 370
Figure 13-80 Angle to the detection point ............................................................................................ 370
Figure 13-81 Port and Starboard Distance Nadir filter ......................................................................... 371
Figure 13-82 Statistic filter with 3x3 beams .......................................................................................... 371
Figure 13-83 Parameters for the smart filter ........................................................................................ 373
Figure 13-84 Multibeam QC Raw Profile view with interferometry data ........................................... 373
Figure 13-85 Interferometry data with the four areas ........................................................................... 374
Figure 13-86 Interferometry data with the averaging clips and the average depths ............................ 375
Figure 13-87 Interferometry data with the tolerance areas .................................................................. 375
Figure 13-88 Amplitude detection filter ................................................................................................. 375
Figure 13-89 Amplitude and Phase detections .................................................................................... 376
Figure 13-90 Example of a Numerics Standard view ........................................................................ 376
Figure 13-91 Configuration window for the Numerics Standard view shown above ......................... 377
Figure 13-92 Alarm Definition dialog for an item in the Numerics view................................................ 380
Figure 13-93 Numerics Sonar Targets view ...................................................................................... 380
Figure 13-94 Output Control view for the RESON SeaBat 8125 ......................................................... 381
Figure 13-95 Pipe Lay Pipe Angle view with the J-Lay tower, the criteria and the pipe. .................. 382
Figure 13-96 Pipe Lay Pipe Position view with both multibeam systems and the detected pipe
for the Pipe Position Monitor application ........................................................................ 383
Figure 13-97 Pipe Lay Pipe Position view with both multibeam systems and the detected pipe
for the Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay application ............................................................... 383
Figure 13-98 Pipe Lay Sonar Video view with the pipe position for the Pipe Position Monitor
application ....................................................................................................................... 384
Figure 13-99 Plan View Construction with 3 Bars ............................................................................. 385
Figure 13-100 Plan View Dredge Instruction with a dredge instruction .............................................. 386
Figure 13-59
xxvi Figures
Figure 13-101
Figure 13-102
Figure 13-103
Figure 13-104
Figure 13-105
Figure 13-106
Figure 13-107
Figure 13-108
Figure 13-109
Figure 13-110
Figure 13-111
Figure 13-112
Figure 13-113
Figure 13-114
Figure 13-115
Figure 13-116
Figure 13-117
Figure 13-118
Figure 13-119
Figure 13-120
Figure 13-121
Figure 13-122
Figure 13-123
Figure 13-124
Figure 13-125
Figure 13-126
Figure 13-127
Figure 13-128
Figure 13-129
Figure 13-130
Figure 13-131
Figure 13-132
Figure 13-133
Figure 13-134
Figure 13-135
Figure 13-136
Figure 13-137
Figure 13-138
Figure 13-139
Figure 13-140
Figure 13-141
Figure 13-142
Figure 13-143
Figure 13-144
Figure 13-145
Plan View Dynamic Positioning with a bulls eye and a waypoint ................................ 387
Plan View General Dredge Operation with an updated grid model ............................. 388
Plan View Navigation with a C-Map layer .................................................................... 389
Plan View Production with a production grid model ..................................................... 390
Plan View Survey Coverage with an active grid model ................................................ 391
Plan View Survey coverage and Edit .............................................................................. 392
Top of left pane with grid model name and tabs ............................................................. 392
Measure window in the plan views .................................................................................. 393
Measure Relative Vessel window.................................................................................... 393
Measure Relative window ............................................................................................... 394
Find C-Map object in the plan view ................................................................................. 395
C-MAP Object Information window with a radio calling point .......................................... 396
Context menu in the Edit Mode and without user maps.................................................. 398
Context menu in the Edit Mode with the user maps options ........................................... 398
Select a symbol from the list in the Select User Symbol window .................................... 399
Context menu after editing or selecting an object ........................................................... 399
Layers window for one of the plan views ........................................................................ 400
Properties window for most of the plan views ................................................................. 401
Plan View with an off-center of -100% (left) and +100% (right) with a vessel radius
of 10 ................................................................................................................................. 402
Coverage Settings window for the plan views ................................................................. 403
Positioning System XY Manual Input view ................................................................... 406
Profile Grid Model view derived from the Draw Profile option in the plan view .......... 407
Profile Multibeam view with an active grid model profile .............................................. 408
Profile Projected Runline view with a profile ................................................................ 408
Single beam echo sounder filters .................................................................................... 409
Profile Realtime Design view with a right view of a suction hopper and the design
difference as up/down indicator ....................................................................................... 409
Profile Realtime Design view with a left and a back view for an excavator ................. 410
Profile Realtime Design 3 Bars view with a design model ........................................... 410
Profile Realtime Design Antwerpen with an active grid model, an active design
model, dredge limits and level contacts .......................................................................... 411
Profile Realtime Design Cutter view with a grid model and a design model ................ 412
Profile Realtime Design Pipe view with a top and side view of the trailing suction
hopper with a drag head .................................................................................................. 413
Profile Realtime Design Pipe Vertical view with a top and side view of the trailing
suction hopper with a drag head ..................................................................................... 413
Profile Sound Velocity view of the active sound velocity profile ................................... 414
Properties for the Profile Realtime Design view ........................................................... 416
Raw Data view of the Multibeam xyz computation .......................................................... 417
Context menu .................................................................................................................. 418
Statistics .......................................................................................................................... 418
PDF report file ................................................................................................................. 418
Data item GPS mode can be moved with the Drag & Drop method ............................ 418
Scatterplot view ............................................................................................................... 419
Reference Point window to enter or select the reference position .................................. 419
Three Sonar Targets views with sonar targets created in three different views ............. 421
Measure window in the Sonar Targets view ................................................................... 422
Sonar wedge view with bathy data .............................................................................. 423
Sonar Wedge view with depth gate and beam selected .............................................. 424
Figures xxvii
Figure 13-146 Zoomed in the first Sonar - Wedge view indicated by a outline in the other Sonar
Wedge view..................................................................................................................... 425
Figure 13-147 In the top left the info layer is showed containing the sonar settings. ............................ 426
Figure 13-148 Sonar - Wedge view with Obstacle Avoidance Forward Looking data ........................ 428
Figure 13-149 Zoomed in Sonar Wedge view indicated by outline in second Sonar Wedge view ........ 429
Figure 13-150 Sonar Sidescan view with for color palette rust and gray ............................................ 430
Figure 13-151 Sonar Snippets view with for color palette rust and gray ............................................. 431
Figure 13-152 Status Alarms view ...................................................................................................... 434
Figure 13-153 Status Computations view with not working computations .......................................... 434
Figure 13-154 Status Equipment view with no data for some equipment ........................................... 435
Figure 13-155 Status Logging view with the logging on ...................................................................... 435
Figure 13-156 Status Remote Connections view ................................................................................ 436
Figure 13-157 Tide Manual Input view ................................................................................................... 436
Figure 13-158 Time Series view with two graphs stacked ..................................................................... 437
Figure 141
Replayer toolbar with a file set bar.................................................................................. 439
Figure 142
Replayer toolbar with a vessel bar .................................................................................. 440
Figure 143
Select the external files for the replay ............................................................................. 440
Figure 16-1
Editing with two editors ................................................................................................... 446
Figure 16-2
File Set Editor to select or create a file set. .................................................................... 447
Figure 16-3
Selected files for a file set ............................................................................................... 447
Figure 16-4
Context menu in the Editing ............................................................................................ 448
Figure 16-5
Displays window to add, to switch on/off or to remove views in the Editing ................... 448
Figure 16-6
Add Display window to add an editor .............................................................................. 448
Figure 16-7
Add Display in the context menu of the Editing .............................................................. 449
Figure 16-8
Find window .................................................................................................................... 451
Figure 16-9
Apply the modified vessel configuration ......................................................................... 452
Figure 16-10 Vessel Selection Dialog to select a different vessel configuration .................................. 452
Figure 16-11 Vessel Selection Dialog with an invalid active vessel configuration ............................... 453
Figure 16-12 Dialog when active vessel configuration is different from the other vessel
configurations .................................................................................................................. 453
Figure 16-13 Dialog when there is no difference in the vessel configurations ..................................... 454
Figure 16-14 Transponder position update for the slave vessel .......................................................... 454
Figure 16-15 Apply tide ........................................................................................................................ 455
Figure 16-16 Data source selection page of the Data Source Switch Wizard ..................................... 456
Figure 16-17 Data groups page of the Data Source Switch Wizard .................................................... 456
Figure 16-18 Data elements page of the Data Source Switch Wizard ................................................. 457
Figure 16-19 Cable Route Dialog to generate a cable route ................................................................ 458
Figure 16-20 Dialog for the multibeam statistics report ........................................................................ 459
Figure 16-21 POSPac selection dialog ................................................................................................ 460
Figure 16-22 Quick Calibration ............................................................................................................. 462
Figure 16-23 Generate TPE Results File ............................................................................................. 463
Figure 16-24 Part of the depth errors table .......................................................................................... 463
Figure 16-25 Example of a depth error graph ...................................................................................... 464
Figure 16-26 Dialog for Validate ALL Caches ...................................................................................... 464
Figure 16-27 Dialog for recaching ........................................................................................................ 465
Figure 16-28 Dialog for revert to original data ...................................................................................... 465
Figure 16-29 Repair the logdata file(s) ................................................................................................. 466
Figure 16-30 Dialog to fix the time stamp Time in Message .............................................................. 466
Figure 16-31 Dialog to do a force recache of the GPS positions ......................................................... 466
Figure 16-32 3D Box view with a grid model and multibeam data ....................................................... 469
Figure 16-33 3D View Standard with the cross and high-resolution data ......................................... 473
xxviii Figures
Figure 16-34
Figure 16-35
Figure 16-36
Figure 16-37
Figure 16-38
Figure 16-39
Figure 16-40
Figure 16-41
Figure 16-42
Figure 16-43
Figure 16-44
Figure 16-45
Figure 16-46
Figure 16-47
Figure 16-48
Figure 16-49
Figure 16-50
Figure 16-51
Figure 16-52
Figure 16-53
Figure 16-54
Figure 16-55
Figure 16-56
Figure 16-57
Figure 16-58
Figure 16-59
Figure 16-60
Figure 16-61
Figure 16-62
Figure 16-63
Figure 16-64
Figure 16-65
Figure 16-66
Figure 16-67
Figure 16-68
Figure 16-69
Figure 16-70
Figure 16-71
Figure 16-72
Figure 16-73
Figure 16-74
Figure 16-75
Figure 16-76
Figure 16-77
Figures xxix
Figure 16-78
Figure 16-79
xxx Figures
Figure 18-18
Figure 18-19
Figure 18-20
Figure 18-21
Figure 18-22
Figure 18-23
Figure 18-24
Figure 18-25
Figure 18-26
Figure 18-27
Figure 18-28
Figure 18-29
Figure 18-30
Figure 18-31
Figure 18-32
Figure 18-33
Figure 18-34
Figure 18-35
Figure 18-36
Figure 18-37
Figure 18-38
Figure 18-39
Figure 18-40
Figure 18-41
Figure 18-42
Figure 18-43
Figure 191
Figure 192
Figure 193
Figure 194
Figure 195
Figure 196
Figure 197
Figure 198
Figure 199
Figure 20-1
Figure 20-2
Figure 20-3
Figure 20-4
Figure 20-5
Figure 20-6
Figure 20-7
Figure 20-8
Figure 20-9
Figure 20-10
Figure 20-11
Figure 20-12
Figure 20-13
Figure 20-14
Figure 20-15
Figures xxxi
Figure 20-16
Figure 20-17
Figure 20-18
Figure 20-19
Figure 20-20
Figure 20-21
Figure 20-22
Figure 20-23
Figure 20-24
Figure 20-25
Figure 20-26
Figure 20-27
Figure 20-28
Figure 20-29
Figure 20-30
Figure 20-31
Figure 20-32
Figure 20-33
Figure 20-34
Figure 20-35
Figure 20-36
Figure 20-37
Figure 20-38
Figure 20-39
Figure 20-40
Figure 20-41
Figure 20-42
Figure 20-43
Figure 20-44
Figure 20-45
Figure 20-46
Figure 20-47
Figure 20-48
Figure 20-49
Figure 20-50
Figure 20-51
Figure 20-52
Figure 20-53
Figure 20-54
Figure 20-55
Figure 20-56
Figure 20-57
Figure 20-58
Figure 20-59
Figure 20-60
Figure 20-61
Figure 20-62
Figure 20-63
Figure 20-64
Figure 20-65
xxxii Figures
Figure 20-66
Figure 20-67
Figure 20-68
Figure 20-69
Figure 20-70
Figure 20-71
Figure 20-72
Figure 20-73
Figure 20-74
Figure 20-75
Figure 20-76
Figure 20-77
Figure 20-78
Figure 20-79
Figure 20-80
Figure 20-81
Figure 20-82
Figure 20-83
Figure 20-84
Figure 20-85
Figure 20-86
Figure 21-1
Figure 21-2
Figure 21-3
Figure 21-4
Figure 21-5
Figure 21-6
Figure 21-7
Figure 21-8
Figure 21-9
Figure 22-1
Figure 22-2
Figure 22-3
Figure 22-4
Figure 22-5
Figure 22-6
Figure 22-7
Figure 22-8
Figure 22-9
Figure 22-10
Figure 22-11
Figure 22-12
Figure 22-13
Figure 22-14
Figure 22-15
Figure 22-16
Figure 22-17
Figure 22-18
Figure 22-19
Figure 22-20
Figures xxxiii
xxxiv Figures
1 Introduction
1.1 PDS2000
PDS2000 is a software package for hydrographic survey and dredging
operations. It offers modules that cover the entire operation from
acquisition to an end product. The software runs on standard PCs with
the Windows operating system. PDS2000 is available in different versions
tailored to specific operations.
The purpose of all the measurements is real time reading of data from
one or more sensors, make computations with the data, show the results
of the computations and simultaneously log the data. To be able to control
those processes a number of Views has been developed that will show
the reading, computations, results and logging processes. A view can
show the data either graphically or alpha-numerically.
Data needs to be checked after the measurements. PDS2000 gives
several options to remove anomalies and outliers, either manually or
automatically.
The final presentation of the cleaned data can be in the form of models,
tables, files, volumes, nautical charts and reports.
This manual is also available as a HTML Help file. Press F1 or select
Help > Help Topics to open the PDS2000 help files.
PDS2000 instruction movies are available at the PDS2000 YouTube
channel. Watch PDS2000 instruction movies.
Introduction 1
2 PDS2000 Documentation
2.1 Introduction
This chapter will give an overview of all the manuals that will be delivered
with a PDS2000 version.
All these documents are accessible as PDF via the Start menu of
Windows at the location Start > Reson > PDS2000 Vx.x.x.x > PDS2000
Documentation. The documents can also be found in the folder
C:\Program Files\RESON\PDS2000 Vx.x.x.x\manuals.
2.2 Overview
The manuals are listed not in order of importance but in alphabetic order.
For each manual a brief explanation will be given.
2.2.2 BlueView
This document is an additional manual to explain the setup of PDS2000
for the BlueView Sonars.
It is a quick guide describing briefly the PDS2000 New Project Wizard
when a BlueView sonar is used and the setup of a display layout with
functions of the used Views.
For more information see the file Blueview.pdf.
PDS2000 Documentation 3
2.2.4 Boeilog
With Boeilog PDS2000 will assist in laying buoys or other markers.
PDS2000 will assist in the navigation to and at the work location. Once on
location tools are available for the exact position of the buoy, if needed
working with the DP of the vessel.
The documentation is in Dutch.
For more information see the file Boeilog.pdf.
2.2.5 Boraciet
The Boraciet application is meant to monitor on the shore the work and
movements of the (dredging) vessel. To monitor this a GPRS link is made
between the vessel and on shore (called wal server). With this link it is
also possible to send data to the vessels. The wal server is the central
place where the information of the different vessels comes together.
On shore the wal server is connected by Ethernet with several PCs
(called wal clients). On these wal clients the activities of the vessels can
be monitored online. It is also possible to replay the activities of the
vessels on the wal clients.
The documentation is in Dutch.
For more information see the file Boraciet.pdf.
4 PDS2000 Documentation
2.2.10 Excavator
The application type Excavator is for a project where an excavator is
used for dredging.
A project with the application type Excavator can contain one or two
vessels. For a one vessel project the vessel is the excavator and for a two
vessels project the vessels are the excavator and a pontoon on which the
excavator is located.
In this application manual the setup of an excavator project for a standalone excavator and for an excavator on a pontoon will be discussed.
After the project is setup the separate tools of the excavator configuration
have to be calibrated. The calibrations of the boom, stick and the tools
(bucket, grab or pump) will be explained.
PDS2000 Documentation 5
At the end the views in the Acquisition will be discussed and an answer to
some frequent ask questions about PDS2000 in relation with an
excavator application will be given.
For more information see the file Excavator.pdf.
2.2.13 HydroBat
The HydroBat is a multibeam system where the data collection and the
control of the HydroBat will take place in PDS2000.
An explanation of the setup of the HydroBat in the equipment list will be
discussed and the special views for the HydroBat in the Acquisition will be
explained.
For more information see the file HydroBat.pdf.
6 PDS2000 Documentation
2.2.16 Multibeam
The Multibeam Survey application in the PDS2000 software is an
application type for a survey with one or more multibeam systems.
In this manual the equipment, which is necessary for a multibeam survey,
will be discussed and also how to setup PDS2000 for this type of survey.
For more information see the file Multibeam.pdf.
PDS2000 Documentation 7
vessel management in their ports. With latest collected survey data, safe
navigation could be determined for different routes, vessel margins and
tide. PES offers the tools for this.
The manual will explain how to setup and use the PES application.
For more information see the file Port Entrance Simulation.pdf
8 PDS2000 Documentation
discussed. After the project is setup the separate tools of the rope
excavator configuration have to be calibrated. The calibrations of the
boom and the rope will be explained.
At the end the views in the Acquisition will be discussed and an answer to
the frequent ask questions about PDS2000 in a rope excavator
application will be given.
For more information see the file Rope Excavator.pdf.
PDS2000 Documentation 9
2.2.30 Trencher
In PDS2000 the application Trencher is made for the support of a cable
trencher. The cable will be trenched with a cable trencher and in this
application the knife depth will be calculated to determine the burial depth
of the cable.
In PDS2000 two vessels have to be setup, one is the survey vessel and
one is the trencher. The trencher will be positioned by a USBL positioning
system.
In this document will be explained which equipment on the trencher and
on the survey vessel, next to the standard equipment, have to be
selected. After the setup the calibration will be explained and some views
in the Acquisition will be discussed.
For more information see the file Trencher.pdf.
2.2.31 USBL
In this manual the USBL (Ultra Short BaseLine) as used in PDS2000 will
be explained.
The USBL equipment has to be setup in the Equipment list of PDS2000.
A USBL transceiver device and a USBL transponder device has to be
selected and setup.
Before a USBL survey can be started, a USBL calibration has to be done
to find the misalignment of the USBL transceiver. In this manual the
procedure for the USBL calibration will be explained.
For more information see the file USBL.pdf.
10 PDS2000 Documentation
3 Installation
3.1 Introduction
This part of the manual describes the minimum requirements, how to
install PDS2000, C-Map charts and Tresco charts on a computer and how
to configure the computer for optimum use with PDS2000.
3.1.1 Requirements
The supported operating systems are for 32 bit and 64 bit:
MS Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3 or higher
MS Windows Vista
MS Windows 7
MS Windows 8
The system requirements for a desktop and laptop system are:
Minimal requirements:
CPU: modern Quad Core Processor
Monitor: single monitor system
Graphic card with OPENGL support and 1 Gb of memory; i.e.
NVidia Geforce GTX 4xx
4 Gb internal memory
1 x 500 Gb Hard disk
DVD Writer
Multi serial I/O card
Preferred requirements:
CPU: 8 Core Processor
Monitor: dual monitor system
Installation 11
The requirements for the PC are depending on the application. A singlebeam application requires less computer power then a multibeam
application. Between these two applications a lot of other applications or
combinations are possible.
Do this only once! It will be remembered by Windows the next time the
system is started.
When these steps are not performed the application can only use the
default maximum memory. So it is not necessary to apply these changes
but when done you get more memory for the applications.
12 Installation
Figure 3-1
b. Before the actual installation will start the user has to select the type of
setup.
Figure 3-2
Installation 13
to continue.
c. The next page asks for a destination to install the program. The default
directory is C:\Program Files\RESON\PDS2000 Vx.x.x.x, where
x.x.x.x is the version number. With the option
any directory
name can be selected. Click on
to continue.
d. A window will pop up in which the ACL installer will make the
PDS2000 Project folder accessible for each user.
ACL also makes for MS Windows 7 the folder C:\Program
Data\RESON\PDS2000 and for MS Windows XP the folder
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\RESON\PDS2000 accessible.
e. If already an older PDS2000 version is/was installed with not the latest
C-Map software, then an Update C-Map SDK dialog will appear.
Figure 3-3
From this new PDS2000 version onwards PDS2000 will only run with
the new version of the C-Map software. Click on
to start with
the installation of the new C-Map software. If the user clicks on
no C-Map software will be installed and PDS2000 will not run
with C-Map anymore. Only when the user install later on the new CMap software PDS2000 will run again with C-Map.
See the chapter Installing and Using C-Map on page 26 for a detailed
explanation of the C-Map installation.
f. Click on
in the next page of the install wizard to start the
PDS2000 installation. Click on
to finish the installation.
Installing PDS2000 will place the PDS2000 and the Dongle software
on the hard disk of the computer.
g. Click on
14 Installation
Figure 3-4
Autostart
Installation 15
Figure 3-7
PDS2000 V.x.x.x.x
Where x.x.x.x is the installed version number. This folder contains the
programs and supporting files to run PDS2000.
General
Contains device drivers and more supporting files.
GeoidModels
Contains the files with the geoid models (see page 93) and X, Y
and Z post corrections (see page 93) which are used in some
coordinate systems of the predefined database.
Northarrows
Contains DXF files which are used for the North Arrow in Plot (see
page 619).
Obsolete
Contains device drivers which are replaced by more general or
improved drivers in the equipment list. If these obsolete drivers are
already selected in a project then they can still be used in that
project. The obsolete drivers cannot be selected anymore in the
equipment list and the replaced drivers have to be used (see the
release notes for an updated list of the obsolete drivers).
ReportDefinitions
Contains the definitions for all the different types of reports
PDS2000 can generate.
Symbols
Contains the symbols which are used in the User Maps (see page
398).
HTML Help
Contains the online HTML Help files which can be activated with the
F1 key or with Help > Help Topics in the menu bar.
localizations
Contains the translations of PDS2000. At the moment next to the
English version a Dutch, an Italian, a German, a French, a Russian
16 Installation
Installation 17
Figure 3-8
18 Installation
d. Set the Rx FIFO Trigger to 1. Check the option Set the change to all
the ports and click on
.
This sets the timing for all ports to optimal, giving the shortest possible
delays.
3.3.3 Monitors
It is recommended to
install the drivers which are
supplied with the graphic
card
Installation 19
Figure 3-10
Select in window Found New Hardware Wizard dialog the option Yes, this
time only and click on
to continue with the wizard.
Figure 3-11
20 Installation
Figure 3-12
The About Control Center window where the PDS2000 dongle
can be updated
Installation 21
Figure 3-13
Click on
Figure 3-14
When the dongle update is available with the latest PDS2000 installation
select the All Dongles.dk4 file. This file contains the dates for all
PDS2000 released dongles as maintained by RESON.
22 Installation
Figure 3-15
When the user has received a separate patch for his dongle then browse
to the correct folder and select the dk4 file as received from RESON.
Click on
to start the update of the dongle. When the update is
not successful contact your local agent or RESON B.V. and inform them
on the internal ID and the dongle s/n.
The Remote Presentation should have the same version number as the
PDS2000 version on the main computer!!
If a new driver is added to PDS2000 then when as remote presentation
via WiFi is used this new driver has to be added to the PDS2000 and to
the remote presentation.
If PDS2000 is already installed on the remote computer then starts up the
file RemotePresentation.exe from the PDS2000 folder.
Installation 23
Figure 3-16
2. If both computers are in a network and are only accessible with a user
name and a password, then the authorization to read data on the
PDS2000 computer has to be set. Use Windows Explorer on the
remote computer to logon to the data on the PDS2000 computer.
If this is not done an error message (error 0) will appear when the
remote presentation is started.
3. On the main PDS2000 computer the Control Center should be running
before the remote presentation can be started. Select from the list the
main PDS2000 computer when the remote presentation is started for
the first time. The remote presentation program tries to find the Control
Center and when successful, minimizes itself into the right side of the
taskbar with a green connect icon . Double click on the icon will
open the Remote Presentation window.
24 Installation
Figure 3-17
computer
Figure 3-18
(RESON)
Installation 25
The driver for the eToken dongle has to be installed before the C-Map
software installation is started. When the eToken dongle is installed after
the C-Map installation C-Map does not work!!
If the user has an existing C-Map license which is not expired yet, it is not
necessary to install the driver for the eToken.
a. Select the folder CMap on the CD-Rom of PDS2000, and start the file
Setup.exe.
Figure 3-19
Setup dialog
26 Installation
It is very important not to install the driver when Windows detects the
eToken driver and wants to install it.
b. If on
is clicked in 0 then the next dialog will be the C-Map
Professional SDK Setup.
Figure 3-20
C-Map Professional SDK Setup with installation of the eToken
dongle and the C-Map software
Click on
to start the installation of the eToken dongle and the
C-Map software. Click on
to stop the installation.
c. A dialog will be opened where the user has to select which dongle is
used. With a new dongle, eToken PRO 72k (JAVA), it is possible that
this dialog does not appear, the installation detect then automatically
the right dongle. The type of the dongle can be checked on the dongle
itself.
Figure 3-21
The eToken PRO (32k)
does not work on MS
Windows 7 64bits!!!!!
Select
Figure 3-22
software
Click on
on
Installation 27
Figure 3-23
wizard
Click on
SDK software.
Figure 3-24
Click on
28 Installation
h. In the next page of the wizard the user has to confirm the start of the
installation.
Figure 3-25
Click on
Figure 3-26
The diagonal of the main computer screen used for PDS2000 has to
be set. This will be used to find the best display resolution. Click on
when the diagonal is not known.
Click on
Installation 29
Figure 3-27
Click on
to keep the active license and no new license has to
be activated. Go to m for the next dialog.
Click on
will be remove.
When the license is for an old eToken dongle and now a new eToken
dongle is used then click always on
. The new eToken dongle
does not work with the license for the old eToken dongle.
k. This dialog will be opened when in j on
Figure 3-28
is clicked.
Click on
Figure 3-29
Click on
30 Installation
Figure 3-30
In the Explorer of
PDS2000 the C-Map Chart
Manager can be opened in
the PDS2000 Database
(see page 268).
Figure 3-31
Installation 31
The users who are only using the S-57 converted charts in C-Map can
skip the items b h and continue with item i on page 34.
b. If the database Professional+ is not present in the list of registered
databases click on
and browse to the (DVD) location
and click on
to copy the database to the PC. When this is
finished a message appears that the database registration was
successful.
Figure 3-32
Figure 3-33
32 Installation
Figure 3-34
default
to set
Figure 3-35
g. RESON B.V. will process the information and get the license
information from C-Map or C-Map will send the information directly.
Installation 33
Figure 3-36
To use C-Map with the
same eToken dongle on a
different computer the
same license information
has to be activated again.
Select the right database at the top and choose one of the license
actions.
Click on
when the user wants to read the usr file with
the license information. Select the file and click on
in the
Select a license file dialog to read the license code(s) from the file.
For clients who are only using the converted S-57 files select as
database Software Modules and use always
because
this database does not have a Zone defined in the usr file.
Click on
when the user wants to enter the license
code(s) manually. An Add License Manually window will be opened.
34 Installation
Figure 3-37
Select the right zone with the right area and enter the license code as
given in the email or from the usr file. Click on
to activate
the license for the selected zone. Repeat this for each zone and/or
area that needs a license.
j. After the licenses are activated, in the Licenses page of the C-Map
Chart Manager the selected zone(s) and area(s) are displayed with an
expiry date.
Figure 3-38
a zone.
k. C-Map with the right database is now installed and can be used in the
views of PDS2000.
Installation 35
For updating the C-Map database the C-Map Chart Manager has to be
opened again.
Figure 3-39
a. Place the new DVD with the database in the DVD drive and click on
.
b. When the copying is finished a message appears that the database is
updated.
Figure 3-40
36 Installation
Database is updated
Figure 3-41
Figure 3-42
Installation 37
The new C-Map software will also work with PDS2000 versions before
3.3.0.0. But before it will work in one of these old versions, the file
CMGBase.dll located in the PDS2000 Vx.x.x.x folder of the old version
has to be deleted.
In some dedicated plan views in PDS2000, C-Map can be viewed as a
layer. Click on
in the toolbar or select Layer Control in the context
menu to get the Layers window.
Figure 3-43
Figure 3-44
38 Installation
Symbolization
There are three options:
S52 is the international standard for drawing a chart, and describes the
way chart items are drawn. The difference between the traditional and
the simplified mode is the way chart colors are used.
C-Map has its own standard for charting and does not show some
navigational areas (such as danger area or anchor area).
Scale Level
Controls the detail of the C-Map chart in the view. When scale level is
set to Automatic, the scaling is controlled by the current zoom factor of
the view. Other options are fixed modes, from coarse to fine, which are
mentioned in the table below:
Chart Scale
Chart
Accuracy
(m)
Scale Level
From
To
1:50,000,000
1:5,000,001
15,000.00
A Background (medium)
1:5,000,000
1:500,001
1,500.00
B Overview
Z Background (small)
1:1,500,000
1:500,001
450.00
C General
1:500,000
1:150,001
150.00
D Coastal
1:150,000
1:50,001
45.00
E Approach
1:50,000
1:15,001
15.00
F Harbor
1:15,000
1:5,001
4.50
1:5,000
1:1,501
1.50
G Berthing
C-Map charts are digitized with a precision of 0.3 mm. This results in
chart accuracy on the display, which is given in the table above for the
largest scale of each scale level.
Display Detail
For the details of the C-Map chart the options are:
Full shows all the soundings, texts etc.
Standard takes most soundings away.
Base shows only the minimum amount of information on the C-Map
chart.
Show Light Info
The light information can be switched on or off.
Show Generic Text
The names of ports and areas can be switched on or off.
Show Other Text
Additional text such as names of features can be switched on or off.
Anti Cluttering
Switch override suppression (C-Map's anti-cluttering engine) on or off.
Show Chart Boundaries
The red chart boundaries in the display can be switched on or off.
Use C-Map Filters
C-Map filters are not user definable. Contact RESON B.V. in case
special requirements for C-Map filters are needed. This function
enables or disables the filters.
C-Map Filter Name
At the moment three filters are available:
- No Buoys
- No Buoys and Beacons
- No Buoys, Beacons and Piles
These filters remove the filtered items from the chart.
Installation 39
Figure 3-45
Figure 3-46
40 Installation
Click on
Figure 3-47
Click on
d. On the next page some additional tasks can be selected which will be
performed during the installation.
Figure 3-48
Additional tasks
The option Install Sentinel driver should be selected when the Tresco
charts are installed for the first time and no Sentinel driver is installed
yet.
The other three options are not needed for a proper installation of the
Navigis software.
Click on
to continue.
Installation 41
Figure 3-49
Click on
to start the installation of the Tresco Navigis software
and the additional tasks, click on
to go back to check the
settings.
f. This will be next page of the installation wizard.
Figure 3-50
42 Installation
Figure 3-51
Click on
Figure 3-52
Click on
Installation 43
b. The next page is the Select Destination Location page for the kernel.
Figure 3-53
The selected folder should be identical with the folder that is selected
for the Navigis software in Figure 3-47 on page 41.
Click on
Figure 3-54
Folder exist
44 Installation
Figure 3-55
Additional task
Dont select the option Install Sentinel driver because the driver is
already installed during the installation of the Tresco Navigis software.
Click on
Figure 3-56
Click on
to start the installation of the kernel, click on
to go back to check the settings.
Installation 45
Figure 3-57
Screen width
The Tresco kernel needs to know the width of the screen to calculate
the scale to display the charts in the correct scale on the screen.
Click on
after the right screen width is entered and the
installation will be finished. Click on
to finish the installation of
the kernel.
Figure 3-58
46 Installation
Figure 3-59
Display Detail
For the details of the Tresco chart the options are:
Full shows all the soundings, texts etc.
Standard takes most soundings away.
Base shows only the minimum amount of information on the Tresco
chart.
Show Geographic Names
The geographic names can be switched on or off.
Show Names For Position Reporting
The labels for the position reporting can be switched on or off.
Show Buoys and Beacons
The buoys and beacons can be switched on or off. The light for the
buoys and beacons can be switched on or off with the option Show
Lights.
Show Lights
The light and the labels can be switched on or off.
Show Light Descriptions
The labels for the lights can be switched on or off.
This option will only work when the option Show Lights is on.
Show Full Length Sector Lights
The full length for some of the sector lights can be switched on or
off. Most of the lights dont have a full length option.
This option will only work when the option Show Lights is on.
Text Resolution
The size of the text on the charts can be defined in dpi.
Symbol Resolution
The size of the symbols on the charts can be defined in dpi.
Installation 47
48 Installation
Two or four depth depth coloring. With two colors and using a
large scale chart as for example an overview chart the coloring
in areas less than a defined shallow depth is blue and the rest
white. With 4 colors, a shallow depth, a safety depth and a deep
depth must be defined. There are different colors for areas less
than "Shallow Depth", areas between a "Shallow Depth" and
"Safety Depth", areas between "Safety Depth" and "Deep
Depth" and finally for areas deeper than "Deep Depth".
Installation 49
Step
Action
50 Installation
Step
Action
Click in the Layers dialog box Add and select the S-57 Chart
Layer followed by pressing OK.
Installation 51
Step
3
Action
Select the folder with the S-57 charts.in the properties dialog
box.
Figure 3-60
52 Installation
Or in a 3D View.
Figure 3-61
Installation 53
Figure 3-62
54 Installation
The table below describes the properties of the S-57 Chart Layer.
Function
Description
S-57 ENC
Folder Name
Chart Range
(Km)
With the Chart Range property the range from of the Views center
to display charts is defined. When a chart falls (for a part) within this
range it will be displayed. With this setting it is possible to display
more or less charts.
See the example below for the functionality.
Installation 55
Function
Description
IMO display
category
56 Installation
Standard:
Other:
Function
Description
Scale level
Installation 57
Function
Object Scale
Filter
Description
When the object scale filter is enabled it will filter objects (like text)
at a certain zoom factor to avoid cluttering of objects.
Disabled.
Show Chart
Extents
Show Buoys
and Beacons
Show Lights
Disabled:
Disabled:
Disabled:
Show Text
Enabled:
Enabled
Enabled:
When disabled, information is not displayed. This does not apply for
Depth sounding information and object information.
Disabled:
58 Installation
Enabled:
Enabled.
Function
Description
Show Depth
Soundings
Show Depth
Coloring
Enabled:
When depth coloring is used the Shallow water depth, the Safety
Depth and the Deep water depth should be set.
For large scale charts as for example an overview chart the coloring
in areas less than a defined shallow depth is blue and the rest white
For fine scaled charts as for example berthing charts four color
coloring is used:
Areas with water depth shallower as the defined shallow water
depth will color dark blue.
Areas with water deeper as the defined Shallow Depth but
shallower as the defined safety depth will color paler blue.
Areas with water deeper than the specifies Safety Depth but less
than the defined Deep water Depth will color light gray.
Areas with water deeper than the specified Deep Water Depth is
displayed in white.
Symbol
resolution
(120dpi)
The resolution of the symbol could be set in dots per inch (dpi).
When changed the resolution of the object is changed which result
in a more or less clearer and detailed symbol.
60dpi:
Diagonal
Screen Size
(in)
120dpi
Installation 59
Function
Font Name
Description
Font, Font Size, Font Italic Style and Font Bold of all the displayed
text (including the depth soundings) can be set here.
Building the Chart Layer in the View will costs CPU time.
Performance can be approved by disabling for example features
as depth soundings displayed or text displayed and to reduce the
Chart Range.
S-57 symbols not defined in the PDS2000 S-57 Chart Layer are
indicated with a question mark.
Figure 3-63
60 Installation
Question mark
4 Using PDS2000
4.1 Introduction
PDS2000 is designed with a Windows Look and Feel. On top of that
PDS2000 has some additional features.
Double click on
PDS2000 Control Center on the desktop to open the
Control Center of PDS2000. From the Control Center every module of
PDS2000 can be started. See for a detailed explanation of the Control
Center the chapter Control Center on page 179.
Using PDS2000 61
4.2 Docking
Figure 4-1
Docking
Figure 4-2
Docked
The view is fixed in one of the dock areas (see below).
Floating
The view is docked but movable. Floating views can be located
outside the window.
MDI Child
Multiple Document Interface child. The view behaves like any other
view in a Windows application.
62 Using PDS2000
Docked to
When pressed, the choice is given to dock a view to any of the four
dock areas (see below).
MDI Child as
Minimized, Maximized or Restored.
Dragging with the Ctrl-key
makes a docked view
floating.
All the type of views can be moved and resized by dragging the borders.
One click on the title bar brings a floating view back to the previous dock
location.
Figure 4-3
Dock areas
As shown above, the client area has four dock areas: top, bottom, left and
right. Each dock area can have multiple views.
Using PDS2000 63
Figure 4-4
With the option Displays the Displays window can be opened in which
views can be added, modified or removed from the module. The option
Add Display is a quick method to add a new view to the module. Check
one of the existing views and this view will appear in the module. When a
view is unchecked this view is still available for the module but will not be
displayed in the module.
The context for the views contains commands for the view. Most of these
commands are also available through the toolbar of the view.
Figure 4-5
64 Using PDS2000
Using PDS2000 65
5 Starting PDS2000
5.1 Introduction
The Control Center should
always be running while
PDS2000 is used.
From the Control Center every module of PDS2000 can be started. But
before one of the modules is started a project, an application type and a
configuration have to be created or selected. The Control Center does not
start when no project is available.
5.1.1 Project
A project can be an area to be surveyed, a harbor to be made, a river that
has to be dredged to a navigable depth, etc. It may require the
employment of one or more vessels (survey vessels, dredgers, work
ships, excavators) and each vessel can have a special task in the project.
A project has the information on the method of measuring and all the
information necessary to do the measurements.
PDS2000 stores all the details of a project in one folder.
5.1.3 Configuration
A configuration describes the way an application type is carried out. It
contains the used vessel(s), the layout used for the Acquisition and (if
present) Presentation(s), how events are used and alarms are managed.
Multiple configurations are possible for all application types.
Any object that carries sensors is defined as a vessel in PDS2000. Some
application types can handle multiple vessels, and each vessel can have
multiple sensors. This makes it necessary to have a set-up for each
vessel in an application type. The vessel set-up is called the Vessel
Configuration (see page 105).
Starting PDS2000 67
Project 2
Application
Type 1
Application
Type x
Application
Type 1
Application
Type x
Configuration
1.1
Configuration
x.1
Configuration
1.1
Configuration
x.1
Configuration
x.2
Configuration
1.2
Configuration
x.2
Configuration
1.n
Configuration
x.n
Figure 5-1
Project structures
68 Starting PDS2000
See also the Project
Common tab in the
Explorer (see page 232).
When for the same vessel a new project is created, the common
information from the vessel will be copied from the Projects Common
Files map. The changes made in the vessel configuration will be copied
back the common information in the Projects Common Files map.
The common information contains the following items:
Geometry information.
Vessel contours, vessel wireframes and 3D studio models.
Equipment setup.
Crane configurations with the calibration results for (rope) excavators.
Pipe configurations with the calibration results for trailing suction
hoppers; the pipe configurations are stored in the crane configuration
file.
Draught tables and hopper tables for the trailing suction hoppers.
Setup of the pages for the Numerics Standard view in the
Acquisition.
Import and export configurations.
Events.
These common information files are not stored in the project folder
anymore. For existing projects the files are not updated in the project
folder, but are stored in the Projects Common Files map. For projects
created with the PDS2000 3.2.0.0 version or later the files are only
available in the Projects Common Files map.
Figure 5-2
checked
Select Project window with the option Run the New Project wizard
Starting PDS2000 69
Project window will be opened. Check in this window the option Run the
New Project wizard and click on
to start the project wizard.
If PDS2000 is already started with an existing project, the New Project
wizard can be started from the menu of the Control Center with File >
New Project. That action starts the wizards first dialog window.
Figure 5-3
On the first page a choice has to be made, start from scratch with an
empty project or use an existing project as template. When an existing
project is selected, all relevant files from the existing project are copied
into the new project. The logdata subfolders, grid models, CUBE models,
dtm XML files, logdata file sets and sound velocity profiles files are not
copied to the new project. The new project can then be checked and
changed with the wizard.
As this is a wizard, each dialog window has
that will close the
current page and will open the next one. The last page will have
.
It is recommended to step through all pages of the wizard. Click on
to stop the wizard at that page without writing the required files
into the project folder. So it is advisable not to click on
but to
finish the wizard even without entering data in the pages. That way a
project is made and data can be entered at a later stage.
70 Starting PDS2000
Figure 5-4
The Project Configuration
can be modified with Edit >
Project Configuration from
the menu bar or with
from the toolbar in the
Control Center.
With both choices in the previous page, the next page gives the Project
Configuration window. When a project was copied the inputs fields
contain data from the old project, when an empty project was started
these fields contain default values.
In both cases it is advised to check each possible input and the
corresponding input fields. All possible inputs with their input fields are
detailed below.
5.4.1.1 Description
Figure 5-5
Project description
Starting PDS2000 71
5.4.1.2 Units
Figure 5-6
Units dialog
The project and all computations in the project use the selected units.
These units are only for display purposes; PDS2000 has its own internal
units for logging the data.
Figure 5-7
Click on
to select one of the existing coordinate systems that are
available in the database (see page 86) or click on
to open the
coordinate system wizard to create a new coordinate system (see page
87). The button
is only available when the coordinate system is
72 Starting PDS2000
created by the user. The coordinate systems which are already created
by PDS2000 cannot be modified.
5.4.1.4 Formats
Figure 5-8
Formats dialog
Figure 5-9
Starting PDS2000 73
Enter for Log directory the required name of the folder that has to be used
as logging directory. The default name is LogData and will be a subfolder of the project folder. In case a different name and/or path are
wanted, enter the name (with the complete path) of the desired folder.
The folder will be created by PDS2000 on the given location.
Check the option Use backup log directory when the user wants a copy
of the PDS2000 Format log data files and / or the S7K Format log data
files. The backup log file is made simultaneous with the standard logging,
so the file size increases during logging. Click on
to select
or change the log directory for the backup. The directory will be displayed
in the box. Additional in the Vessel Setup Logging page the option
Enable Backup log must be enabled in the PDS2000 Format and / or the
S7K Format log data files in order to log this file(s) See page 138 and
142.
For the log file names the user can choose how the log files are called.
The first option, Automatic log file names, is the default option with the
standard PDS2000 log file names (see example in the dialog).
The second option, User defined log file names, is the option where the
user can create a log file name with some standard items and/or with a
user text. The different items that can be selected for the log file name are
Vessel name
The name of the vessel configuration in the Vessels page of the
Configuration (see page 80). The vessel name cannot be unchecked
and will be always in the log file name.
Survey type
This is the name of the application type that is selected for the project
(see page 78).
Run line name
The name of the active runline file as selected in the Runline tab of the
Guidance page (see page 156).
Start date
The date when the log file is created in the Acquisition.
When no start time is
selected, a sequence
number will be used to
differentiate the different
log files.
Start time
The time when the log file is created in the Acquisition.
User text
Text that can be added to the log file name. Enter behind the option
User text: the text that has to be added to the log file name.
Check the items that have to be in the log file name. The order of the
items in the log file name can be changed by using
or
.
Select the item that has to be moved and use one of the buttons to move
the item upwards or downwards.
Between the different items in the log file name a separator is needed.
Selected for the option Separator the right separator (- _ . ,).
At the bottom the option Replace all dots in the log file name will replace
the dots with a dash (or an underscore when a dash is selected as
separator. This means that all the dots, also in the name of the runline,
will be replaced.
With
74 Starting PDS2000
the log file name will be reset to the default log file setting.
In the Acquisition it is possible to change the name of the log file name. If
the option is active in the Acquisition and a new logdata file is created the
user can specify a different log file name (see page 281).
Figure 5-10
Historical data can be stored in the Backup folder in the project. For all
the file types that are checked in the list a copy is made when a new
logging file is opened. The copy will only be made if the file is changed
after the last backup.
Check the option Keep history of files for Replayer and Editing if the
backups have to be made. The backups are used in the Replayer (see
page 439) and in the Editing (see page 445) when a log data file is
opened. The log data file will use the available files from the backup to
show the information. For instance when the color table is changed after
the data is logged; the color table that was used during the logging will be
used if Color Tables is checked for a backup.
To avoid that the backup folder will be overloaded with backups, a
maximum number of days can be set. If a backup is older it will be
removed from the backup folder.
Figure 5-11
Starting PDS2000 75
With the option When free disk space is lower than the oldest files will be
deleted when the free hard disk space is lower than the specified GBs.
The user can select one of the option or both. When both options are
selected then when one of the two options is valid the oldest log data files
will be deleted.
It is advisable to select always the option When free disk space is lower
than because if the number of days is too high then it is possible that the
hard disk is full before the oldest log data files are deleted. A full hard disk
will stop the system.
It is very important to backup the old log data files before one of the
options becomes valid; otherwise the log data files are lost.
Figure 5-12
5.4.1.9 Options
Figure 5-13
This page will show options that can be important to display or compute
data.
Show multibeam beams with no bottom detection
In PDS2000 the beams that have no bottom detection get a 0 (zero)
for the beam Z. By default the zero beams will not be displayed in the
views of PDS2000. When the user wants to see the zero beams then
he can check this option.
76 Starting PDS2000
Figure 5-14
This page will show the settings for the GPS time parameters. At the
moment only one setting is available.
st
Leap Seconds
The leap seconds for GPS receivers with a GPS time. The leap
seconds are used to correct the GPS time to UTC time.
The leap seconds as set here will be used through PDS2000.
Figure 5-15
Select or create in this page the active sonar targets file which can be
used in the Acquisition, Presentations, Replay and Editing.
The sonar targets can be classified. The user can make his own list of
classifications which can be used to classify the sonar targets. It is always
possible to classify a sonar target with a classification that is not in the list.
For more information about the sonar targets see the Sonar Targets view
in the Chapter Views (see page 420).
Starting PDS2000 77
Figure 5-16
Select or create in this page the active icon images file which can be used
at the moment only in the Acquisition, Presentations, and Replay.
For more information about the sonar targets see the option Add Icon
Image in the chapter Plan View Toolbar and Context Menu on page
394.
Figure 5-17
From the list of application types, select the one that describes the project
the best. The type and number of possible sensors and computations that
78 Starting PDS2000
Figure 5-18
By checking Run the configuration wizard the wizard goes over in a menu
where the configuration can be saved. When a name is given, click on
and the wizard will continue with the configuration name and the
vessels page (see below).
Is Run the configuration wizard not checked then by clicking on
the wizard will be finished and the configuration will not be saved. A new
configuration has to be made with the menu option Acquisition > New >
Configuration.
Starting PDS2000 79
Figure 5-19
Local
Click on
to open the Add Local Vessel window. Select one of
the available vessel configurations.
Click on
to create a new vessel configuration. The vessel
wizard will start with the Vessel Name page where a new name for the
vessel has to be defined and will continue through all the pages of the
vessel configuration (see page 105).
Figure 5-20
Remote
Vessels which are created on another location, that means for
instance on another ship, can be added or edited. This other ship can
be monitored by reading the data from that ship. To get a connection
with the other ship the Control Center on the remote vessel has to be
running.
80 Starting PDS2000
Figure 5-21
configuration
Give the hostname or the IP-address of the remote vessel. The port
704 will be used to get the vessel configuration from the remote
vessel. Do not change this port number!!
During the acquisition the sensor data from the remote vessel can be
read, but because of the data load an update rate can be set. Check
the option Use limited data update rate and set the update rate (in the
example above on 5 seconds).
Click on
to download the vessel configuration from the remote
vessel.
If the vessel configuration on the remote vessel is changed or the
update rate has to be changed, click on
under Remote to
download the new vessel configuration or modify the update rate.
5.4.5 Layout
Figure 5-22
The layouts page shows where the real time modules are displayed. The
module Control Center is by default on the local computer. The
acquisition server and presentations can be on the local computer or on
another computer in the network.
Click on
to add new presentations to the list. Select one of the
modules and click on
or just click on
to go to the Layout
dialog.
Starting PDS2000 81
Figure 5-23
Layout dialog
If the layout is not running on the local computer (main PDS2000) but on
a remote computer, give the name of the remote computer or select with
the computer in the network.
The name of the layout can be selected. Click on
to create a new
empty layout. This empty layout can be filled with views in the Acquisition
or Presentation. It is better not to use the same name for the layout in the
Acquisition and in the Presentation.
The UI (User Interface) profile is always the default. The user can defined
a UI profile where his own toolbar and shortcut keys settings are saved.
Click on
, give a new name for the profile and make the module
according the wishes of the user. A new UI profile starts always with the
default settings for the shortcuts and the toolbar.
5.4.6 Events
Figure 5-24
82 Starting PDS2000
On this page the events can be defined. Three automatic eventing modes
are available, conditions can be set and an event string can be defined.
For more detailed information about events see chapter Events on page
171.
5.4.7 Alarms
Figure 5-25
On the alarms page real time alarms can be defined. The alarms are
related to the configuration and will be active for each vessel in the
configuration.
Vessel specific alarms can be set in the vessel configuration (see page
149).
When an alarm is added a Conditions window, similar to the one in the
Vessel Alarms on page 149, is opened. In this window the alarm can be
defined.
If the condition for an alarm is not known yet leave the alarms page
empty. When an alarm is required on a measurement it is easy to make a
condition in the Acquisition with Edit > Alarms (see page 278). That way,
alarms can be checked immediately.
Starting PDS2000 83
Figure 5-26
Click on
84 Starting PDS2000
6 Coordinate System
6.1 Introduction
In PDS2000, a coordinate system database is available where for the
most common countries the standard coordinate systems are predefined.
It is also possible for the user to add new coordinate systems to the
database.
The active coordinate system has to be selected in the Project
Configuration (see page 72).
A new coordinate system can be created in the Project Configuration and
in the PDS2000 tab of the Explorer (see page 236). The new coordinate
systems will be stored in a separate database, where all the user defined
coordinate systems are available.
It is not possible to modify
the predefined coordinate
systems.
In the PDS2000 tab of the Explorer two different databases are available,
the pdsgeodatabase and the pdsusergeobase. The pdsgeodatabase is
the database with all the predefined coordinate systems and the
pdsusergeobase is the database with all the user defined coordinate
systems.
In this chapter will be discussed how to select, to create and/or modify a
coordinate system through the Project Configuration. For creating and/or
modifying a coordinate system in the Explorer General the same
dialogs and windows will be used.
Select in the Control Center the menu item Edit > Project Configuration or
click on
in the toolbar and select in the Project Configuration window
the option Coordinate System.
Coordinate System 85
Figure 6-1
86 Coordinate System
Figure 6-2
Give a name for the new coordinate system and check the option Based
on existing coordinate system if an existing coordinate system has to be
used as a start for the new coordinate system.
Click on
Coordinate System 87
Figure 6-3
The base of an existing
coordinate system is
always both ellipsoids. The
other settings of the
system can be modified.
On this page the user can select one of the existing coordinate systems
as a base for the new coordinate system. All the coordinate systems as
defined in both databases (pdsgeodatabase and pdsusergeobase) are
available in the list of coordinate systems.
If an existing coordinate system is selected, click on
to go to the
next page of the wizard. The next page will be the Datum Transformation
Parameters page (see page 92).
88 Coordinate System
6.3.3 Ellipsoids
Figure 6-4
This page will be opened if the user create a new coordinate system that
is not based on an existing coordinate system.
It is not possible to create
a new ellipsoid.
Click on
to select a satellite ellipsoid and a local ellipsoid from the
list of ellipsoids.
Figure 6-5
Coordinate System 89
Figure 6-6
If only the option New datum transformation is checked, the next page will
be the Datum Transformation Parameters page (see page 92).
For the other options the next page will be the Select Datum
Transformation page (see below).
90 Coordinate System
Figure 6-7
Wizard
On this page only the datum transformations that are possible between
the two selected ellipsoids of the new coordinate system will be available.
If one of the datum transformations is selected, click on
to go to
the next page of the wizard. It will depend on the selected option in the
Datum Transformation page (see page 90) what the next page will be.
If the option Use existing datum transformation was checked the next
page will be the Geoid Model page (see page 93).
For the other options the Datum Transformation Parameters page (see
page 92) will be opened.
Coordinate System 91
Figure 6-8
Wizard
This page will be opened if in the Datum Transformation page (see page
90) the option New datum transformation is checked. If also the option
Based on existing datum transformation is checked, first the Select Datum
Transformation page (see page 91) is opened before the Datum
Transformation Parameters page will be opened.
Name
Specify a new name for the to be created new datum transformation.
Method
At the moment the only available method is the Bursa/Wolfe method.
Shift X, Y and Z
The translations in the X, Y and Z direction, to translate from the
satellite ellipsoid to the local ellipsoid.
Rotation X, Y and Z
The rotations around the X, Y and Z axis, to rotate from the satellite
ellipsoid to the local ellipsoid.
Scale factor (ppm)
The scale factor between the two ellipsoids in parts per million (ppm).
Prime meridian shift Greenwich (deg)
This option is not available for the Bursa/Wolfe method.
File name
This option is not available for the Bursa/Wolfe method.
Description
The user can enter a short description for the new datum
transformation.
If all the parameters are entered, click on
to go to the next page
of the wizard. The next page will be the Geoid Model page (see below).
92 Coordinate System
Figure 6-9
In this page a geoid model can be selected for the coordinate system.
The geoid model will correct the satellite ellipsoid height to a local height.
The methods available at the moment are:
Belgium hBG03/xyGridLb72
The latest geoid model for Belgium.
DeMin
An old geoid model for The Netherlands.
Denmark DVR90
The latest geoid model for Denmark.
EGM2008
The Earth Gravitational Model 2008 is a spherical harmonic model of
the earths gravitational potential. After the EGM2008 Geoid is
selected and the project configuration closed, PDS2000 comes up with
the below message when the associated file is not selected or could
not be found.
Coordinate System 93
Figure 6-10
OSGM02 GB
The latest geoid model for England, Scotland and Wales.
This geoid model can only be used in a coordinate system with
ETRS89 GRS80 and the National Grid as projection. The reason is
that this geoid model contains the National Grid coordinates and not
the latitude and longitude of the ETRS89 or WGS84 as most of the
other geoid models do.
OSGM02 NI
The latest geoid model for Northern Ireland.
This geoid model can only be used in a coordinate system with
ETRS89 GRS80 and the ITM as projection. The reason is that this
geoid model contains the ITM coordinates and not the latitude and
longitude of the ETRS89 or WGS84 as most of the other geoid models
do.
94 Coordinate System
OSGM02 RoI
The latest geoid model for Republic of Ireland.
This geoid model can only be used in a coordinate system with
ETRS89 GRS80 and the ITM as projection. The reason is that this
geoid model contains the ITM coordinates and not the latitude and
longitude of the ETRS89 or WGS84 as most of the other geoid models
do.
Quasigeoid EGG97
The European Gravimetric Geoid based on all high-resolution gravity
and terrain data available in 1997.
If this option is selected, a BIN file can be selected. This BIN file is
standard not available in PDS2000, it has to be order. The BIN file has
to be placed in the folder Project Common Files.
Quasigeoid GCG
For Germany, the German Combined QuasiGeoid 2011.
For this method a GCG2011_NO file is needed. This file is not
supplied within the PDS2000 package and needs to purchased
externally. For PDS2000 the file needs to have the extension *.bin.
When this is not the case it needs to be renamed to
GCG2011_NO.bin.
Copy the file to the PDS2000 Projects/Projects Common Files and
select at the file selection this file.
Figure 6-11
RDNAPTRANS2004
An old geoid model for The Netherlands.
RDNAPTRANS2008
The latest geoid model for The Netherlands.
Sweden
For Sweden the following geoid models are available: SWEN01L,
SWEN08_RH2000 and SWEN08_RH70.
US State Plane
The geoid models for the United States on the NAD83 State Planes.
PDS2000 will detect which geoid model has to be used.
At the moment PDS2000 uses the GEOID06 and GEOID09 model for
Alaska and the GEIOD03 and GEOID09 models for all other states.
Select 2003, 2006 or 2009 and the right geoid model will be used.
When for instance 2006 is selected and the location is not Alaska
PDS2000 will select the state plane from 2003.
Click on
to go to the next page of the wizard. This next page will
be the Unit page (see below).
Coordinate System 95
6.3.8 Unit
Figure 6-12
Select an unit that will be used for the projection parameters. Because
this unit is used for the projection it will become the system unit for the
project.
Click on
opened.
to create a new unit type and the New Unit dialog will be
Figure 6-13
Name
Specify a clear name for the to be created unit type.
Meters per unit
Enter the number of meters per one new unit.
Name suffix
Give a suffix for the new unit type, like a m for meters.
If the right unit is selected or create, click on
to go to the next
page of the wizard. The next page will be the Projection page (see
below).
96 Coordinate System
6.3.9 Projection
Figure 6-14
If only the option New projection is checked, the next page will be the
Projection Parameters page (see page 99).
For the other options the next page will be the Select Projection page
(see below).
Coordinate System 97
Figure 6-15
98 Coordinate System
Figure 6-16
This page will be opened if in the Projection page (see page 97) the
option New projection is checked. If also the option Based on existing
projection is checked, first the Select Projection page (see page 98) is
opened before the Projection Parameters page will be opened.
Name
Specify a clear name for the to be created projection.
Unit
The unit that will be used cannot be changed on this page. If the unit
has to be changed click on
to go back to the Unit page (see
page 96).
Method
In PDS2000 several projection methods are available.
Cassini-Soldner
Hotine Oblique Mercator (A)
Hotine Oblique Mercator (B)
Lambert 1 Parallel
Lambert 2 Parallel
Mercator
RD (is only valid with the unit Meters)
Transverse Mercator
Stereographic
Universal Transverse Mercator (is only valid with the unit
Meters)
The number of parameters on this page will depend on the projection
method that is selected. The values of the parameters False Easting and
False Northing have to be in the unit, which is mentioned on this page.
Coordinate System 99
Figure 6-17
It is possible that a position calculated on the local grid not match with the
actual X, Y and Z for that point. With a post correction this point can be
moved so it match with the actual grid coordinates. This post correction is
only applied when a calculation is done from the local ellipsoid to the local
grid or vice versa.
On this page two ways to add a post correction are possible, manual or
with a model. The manual post correction is always a fixed shift in all the
X, Y and/or Z coordinates, while with post correction with a model for
each point a different shift can be used.
The models available at the moment are:
Belgium hBG03/xyGridLb72
The latest post correction model for Belgium.
Denmark DVR90
The latest post correction model for Denmark.
If HARN or OSTN02 is
selected, PDS2000 will correct
the local ellipsoid coordinates
before the coordinates are
projected on the grid.
HARN
The latest correction model for the United States.
In theory is HARN a correction on the local latitude and longitude and
not on the grid coordinates, but in PDS2000 the only place for a post
correction is on the X and Y coordinates.
OSTN02
The latest post correction model for England, Scotland and Wales.
In theory is OSTN02 a correction on the local latitude and longitude
and not on the grid coordinates, but in PDS2000 the only place for a
post correction is on the X and Y coordinates.
This correction can only be used in a coordinate system with ETRS89
GRS80 and the National Grid as projection. The reason is that this
correction are specific calculated for this coordinate system.
RDNAPTRANS2004
The old post correction model for The Netherlands.
RDNAPTRANS2008
The latest post correction model for The Netherlands.
Click on
to go to the next page of the wizard. This next page will
be the Save Coordinate System page (see below).
Figure 6-18
Figure 6-19
Wizard
On this page an overview is given of all the settings for the new
coordinate system.
Click on
to check the new coordinate system by entering a
known point in the Geo Calculator (see page 213).
If the new coordinate system is accepted, click on
to save the
coordinate system in the group as selected by the user. If one of the
settings in the overview is not right, click on
to go back the
relevant page in the wizard to change the settings. It is also possible to
save the coordinate system and use the Edit option (see below) to
change the coordinate system.
pdsusergeobase and click on the option Edit in the context menu to open
the Select Coordinate System window.
Figure 6-20
Select Coordinate System window with only the user defined
coordinate systems
Figure 6-21
system
From the pre-defined coordinate systems only the geoid model can be
modified, the user defined coordinate systems can be modified
completely. For all pre-defined coordinate system only the geoid models
EGM2008, Grid Model (Grid and Satellite coordinates) and Null Model are
available and for some systems also the local geoid model, if available.
For different geoid models first the method or country has to be selected
before a geoid model file, if needed, can be selected. This is for instance
valid for Sweden and US State Plane.
7 Vessel Configuration
7.1 Introduction
PDS2000 always needs a vessel configuration before the Acquisition can
be started. The vessel configuration will contain all the settings which are
necessary to do all the measurements.
Before a vessel configuration can be made a project has to be setup as
discussed in chapter Starting PDS2000 on page 67.
Figure 7-1
A new name for the vessel configuration has to be entered. The user can
choose to create a complete new vessel configuration or to use an
existing vessel configuration as template.
When the option Use existing vessel as template is checked, the user can
select from all the vessel configurations that are available in the Projects
Common Files map.
Click on
to continue with the wizard. It can take a while before the
next page of the wizard will be opened. The reason is that PDS2000 first
check if the new vessel configuration name exists or not. If the name
already exists an error message will appear and the user can enter a
different name.
The next pages of the wizard will be explained with the separate tab
pages below.
7.3 Geometry
Figure 7-2
The first page in the vessel configuration is the vessel geometry with the
vessel visualization, vessel draught, vessel turn radius, sea level, vertical
position and the offsets on the vessel.
Visualization
As visualization a standard shape or a custom shape could be
selected by the associated radio button.
Standard Shape
Pre defined standard shapes are selectable by the drop down
menu.
Figure 7-3
to define the
Figure 7-4
and
Figure 7-5
Figure 7-6
Squat table
Figure 7-7
Turn radius
Turn radius of the vessel is used to compute the lead-in lines (see
page 156) and for autopilot outputs.
Sea level
Sea level is the distance from the CGP (Center of Gravity Point) on
the vessel to the waterline and will be positive when the waterline is
above the CGP.
Offsets
An offset is a point of interest on the vessel, such as the location of a
sensor. The Zero Offset is a PDS2000 pre-defined offset, the CRP
and cannot be changed.
Click on
for an overview of the vessel contour and offsets. A topand a starboard view of the vessel are shown. If no vessel contour is
available, a default contour will be used.
PDS2000 uses a vessel coordinate system. This system is centered
around an arbitrary point on the vessel. This point is called the CRP and
has the coordinates X=0, Y=0 and Z=0. The units used are the PDS2000
computation units. Offsets and contour points are entered relative to the
CRP, using the sign convention as shown in the figure below. Sensor
offsets are entered from the CRP to the sensor.
+Z
Top
+Y
Bow
-X
Port
CRP
X=0
Y=0
Z=0
-Y
Stern
+X
Starboard
-Z
Bottom
Figure 7-8
Figure 7-9
The options in the right top panel of the vessel contour editor are:
Name: Point(x)
Add the X and Y value for point(x) in the vessel coordinate system.
Type
Point. Select this type if point(x) is not a start of line or a start of
polygon.
Start of Line. Select this type if point(x) is the first point of the line. Until
a new start of line or start of polygon is selected all points after this
point will be part of the line.
Start of Polygon. Select this type if point(x) is the first point of the
polygon. Until a new start of line or start of polygon is selected all
points after this point will be part of the polygon. The polygon will be
solid.
The buttons and options on the right side in the editor are:
Add a new point to the contour. The added point comes always at the
end of the list.
Insert a new point above the location of the cursor in the list.
Delete the selected point from the list.
Select the view side of the vessel contour; top, bottom, left, right, front
and back.
,
Zoom Extents, Zoom In / Out.
Click on
contour editor.
7.4 Equipment
Figure 7-10
After a device driver is added to the device list, check the items in the
device or computation by selecting the device or computation and click
on
to open the properties.
Most of the sensors have a timestamp mode available. When this is
set on Computer Clock latency can be applied when available in the
data. For the other timestamps the latency have no effect.
For some equipment, like multibeam, position and VRU, an offset as
specified in the Geometry page has to be selected. For sub system
devices the offset has to be entered manually.
For several devices the units for the incoming data can be specified.
Normally the units as set by PDS2000 will be the system unit. If for
instance the coordinate system is in feet then the system unit is feet
and most of the values related to distance are then in feet. With
the units can be modified when the input data has a different unit than
the system unit.
Each device has to be assigned to a communication port. Select the
device from the device list and click on
. Select a port and
change the settings if necessary. Add a new port by clicking on
. See for more information about the interfacing on page 184.
184
By default all the selected devices are active ( ) in the device list. If one
of the devices is not connected yet, it will give alarms in the Acquisition.
To avoid these alarms, the device can be switched off in the device list by
unchecking ( ) the device.
An equipment test is possible when the selected device is attached to the
port. Click on
and a test program checks the communication
with the device and the device driver.
It is recommended to test the equipment interfacing prior to the start of
the Acquisition.
Figure 7-11
Device Test
Figure 7-12
Navisound Control Center to set the port(s) and check the
communication with the echo sounder
This view will be opened when in the Equipment one of the Navisound
Graphical Trace devices is selected and on
or
is
clicked.
Click on
in the Navisound Control Center to set the Input Port(s)
for the echo sounder. When the port(s) are set, click on
or
and if the port(s) settings are right data will be displayed in the
view.
In the Equipment page the port is always NCC. The port settings for the
Navisound are stored in a different way than all the other devices in
PDS2000, it will be done through
7.4.3 Outputs
Figure 7-13
7.5 Computations
Figure 7-14
Figure 7-15
is grayed out
when a computation is not
possible (anymore) for the
chosen application type.
The user selects the required computations from the left window and adds
these with
to the list of defined computations. By default the given
computation name will be used and the properties of the selected
computation will be opened.
The properties of the added computations can be opened by selecting the
computation in the defined computations list and click on
to
access the properties of that computation.
Figure 7-16
Figure 7-17
Condition added
Figure 7-18
Creating a condition
Multiple conditions can be set on any data source. If one of the conditions
is true it will lower the rank of the source, provided automatic switch is
checked in the Data Sources page.
7.7 Guidance
Guidance is a method of assisting a vessel to sail along pre-defined
tracks or towards a pre-defined location or area. The guidance methods
are:
1.
Route
2.
Runlines
3.
Waypoints
4.
Design Model
5.
Cutter Dredge
6.
Work Areas
7.
Restricted Areas
8.
Vessel Placement
9.
Dredge Instruction
7.8 Tools
The Tools page is skipped in the vessel configuration wizard. If the vessel
configuration is opened outside the wizard always the interval logging tab
is available.
For several applications like (Rope) Excavator, Cutter, Trailing Suction
Hopper, Maggy Survey and Multibeam Survey extra tabs are added to the
Tool page.
The different tabs in the Tools Page are:
Anchor Definition (see below)
Crane Configuration (see page 124)
Cutter (see page 126)
Dredge Logging Settings (see page 127)
Interval Logging (see page 128)
Magnometer Dialog (see page 130)
Pipe Configuration (see page 131)
Production Parameters (see page 133)
Trip Registration (see page 134)
Statistics Report
Figure 7-19
application
Tools page with the Anchor Definition page of the cutter dredge
In the Anchor Definition page the anchor definitions for the vessel
(pontoon) and the handling tugs can be specified.
Figure 7-20
application
Rope Excavator:
Figure 7-21
Tools page with the Rope page of the rope excavator application
This Tools page is valid for the Rope Excavator application to setup the
crane configuration for a rope excavator with a backhoe.
On the three subpages the offsets for the boom, the rope and the tool
have to be entered. In the Acquisition the angles and/or offsets for the
boom and rope can be calibrated (see page 282).
For more information about this Tools page see the manual for the Rope
Excavator application in the manuals folder of PDS2000.
7.8.3 Cutter
Figure 7-22
This Tools page is valid for the Cutter Dredge application to setup the
cutter configuration.
For more information about the Cutter see the manual for the Cutter
Dredge application in the manuals folder of PDS2000.
Figure 7-23
Tools page with the Dredge Logging Settings page of the
excavator application
This page is to setup the logging conditions for the grid model logging
with a (rope) excavator, cutter or hopper.
In the Logging page the grid model logging should be setup as explained
on page 139. Next to that setup the option Enable grid model logging
should be checked otherwise there is no grid model logging in the
Acquisition.
Figure 7-24
application
In the Logging page the interval logging format have to be checked before
an interval log file is created (see page 143).
Item to log
Double click on a field and the Select Data window will be opened. In
this window the item from one of the available computations can be
selected.
When an item is selected automatically the row is filled with the default
settings.
User name
Double click on a field and the text in the field can be modified.
This name will be visible in the Interval Logging view in the Acquisition.
Method
Three options are available to select as method to display the values
in the Interval Logging view in the Acquisition.
Sampling. The last value will be displayed.
Averaging. The displayed value is the average of all the values in that
period.
Cumulating. All the values of that period are added together, a
cumulated value is displayed.
Start day
Select a day when the interval logging has to start.
Now. The interval logging will be started directly.
Today. The interval logging will start today at the time as specified in
the column Start time.
Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and
Saturday. The interval logging will start on the specified day of the
week at the time as specified in the column Start time.
Start time
The interval logging will start on the time as specified in the start time.
When the start time is earlier than the actual time the interval logging
will not start.
When for Start day today or one of the days of the week is selected
the default start time become 00:01 (1 minute). Select the field and the
user can modify the start time.
Period
At the end of a period the actual value will be logged to the interval log
file.
By default the period is set on 00:01 (1 minute). Select the field and
the user can modify the period.
Reset
The reset is for the methods averaging and cumulating.
Yes. The calculation starts again when a new period starts.
No. The calculation continues after a new period is started.
In the Acquisition the interval logging can be monitored in the Raw Data
view and in the Interval Logging view (see page 342).
When in the Logging page the Interval Logging Format is checked (see
page 143) then the data will be logged in the file xxxx_Interval.logyyyymmdd.csv in the Logdata directory of the project, where xxxx is the
vessel name.
Figure 7-25
The Tools page with the Magnetometer Dialog page of the maggy
survey application
This Tools page is valid for the Maggy Survey application to setup the
offsets for a multi-channel magnetometer.
The number of channels that will setup by default will depend on the
magnetometer device driver that is selected in the Equipment.
Figure 7-26
Tools page with the Pipe Configuration page of the trailing suction
hopper application
This page is valid for the Trailing Suction Hopper application to setup the
pipe segments.
In the Pipe Configuration page the configuration for a suction tube with a
bend, an upper pipe, a lower pipe and a draghead (suction head) has to
be setup. When the trailing suction hopper has a starboard and port
suction tube two Pipe Configuration pages are available in the Tools
page.
For more information about this Tools page see the manual for the
Trailing Suction Hopper application in the manuals folder of PDS2000.
Figure 7-27
The pipe detection will be available for applications where the multibeam
is available.
For more information about the pipe detection see the manual Pipe
detection.pdf in the manuals folder of PDS2000 see Pipe Detection in the
Help file.
Figure 7-28
Tools page with the Production Parameters page of the trailing
suction hopper application for two bunkers
Figure 7-29
Tools page with the Trip Registration page of the trailing suction
hopper application
Figure 7-30
Statistics Report
With Statistics Report the user can collect data over a self-defined period
and it will calculate the mean, the standard deviation, the minimum and
the maximum of that collected data. The results will be presented in a
PDF report together with a time series graph.
The table below describes the functions of the Statistics Report.
Function
Description
Items to log
Graph
Function
Description
Statistics
Remove Row(s)
Timespan
Channel layout
Observation period
Start
Stop
Report Style
Figure 7-31
Figure 7-32
7.9 Logging
How the logging is done is defined in the Logging page. The dialog sets
the file formats, manages log space and sets the log conditions. The
layout of the Logging page depends on the selected application type and
on the selected logging formats.
On top of the page it is possible to change the log directory. Select an
existing directory or enter in the box a new log directory. This is same
option as in the Log Files page of the Project Configuration (see page 73).
Figure 7-33
Index file after logging means that direct after the log file is closed an
index file of the log file is created. This will save time when the log file is
opened in for instance the Editing.
Figure 7-34
Backup log becomes available when the option Use backup log directory
is checked in the Project Configuration (see page 73). Check the option
Enable Backup log to log the PDS2000 logdata file also in the backup log
directory which is specified in the Project Configuration.
File name: Vessel name[application type]_runline name-date-time.PDS
The runline name is for a (rope) excavator application replaced by the
project name and for the dredge applications by the trip number.
This file name mentioned above is the default file name. With the option
user defined log file names in the Project Configuration a user-defined file
name can be defined (see page 73).
From PDS2000 version 3.6.0.0 onwards, the sonar image, side scan and
snippets data in the PDS2000 log file is compressed to reduce the size of
the log files. When this PDS2000 log file is opened in an earlier version
(3.5.0.x or older) the data of the sonar image, side scan or snippets
cannot be opened anymore!
From multibeam data all the pings will be logged in the PDS2000 format,
even the pings that are out of order. The pings with a bad time stamp will
only be logged when they are newer than the ping before and when they
meet the data rate criteria.
Figure 7-36
The tolerance is the minimum difference of the Z-value with the previous
Z-value. If the difference is more than the tolerance (e.g. 0.05 m) the data
point is added to the file.
The width of a sway is defined as 100%. By setting a minimum distance
(e.g. 10%) a point at every 10% of the width of the sway is added to the
file.
File name: Vessel name[application type]_runline name-date-time.XYZ
Figure 7-37
This is the same type of menu as for the PDS2000 Grid Model (see page
139).
File name: Name of the Grid Model.DTM
Figure 7-38
By setting the sampling rate the logging interval is defined (e.g. 30 sec).
File name: Vessel name[application type]_year_month_day.TRK
Figure 7-39
Not all the Multibeam types could be logged in XTF format as they are not
all specified.
Click on
to go through the settings of XTF format. See for a
detailed explanation of the XTF settings in the chapter Export on page
680.
File name: Vessel name[application type]_runline name-date-time.XTF
The XTF_HEADER_POSITION record is mentioned in XTF
documentation but it is not explained. Below this record will be explained.
Byte aligned structure of XTF_HEADER_POSITION:
typedef struct
{
WORD MagicNumber;
// Set to 0xFACE
BYTE HeaderType;
// XTF_HEADER_POSITION (100)
BYTE SubChannelNumber;
// Unused. Set to 0.
WORD NumChansToFollow;
// Unused. Set to 0.
WORD Reserved1[2];
// Unused. Set to 0.
DWORD NumBytesThisRecord;
// Must be 64.
DWORD ID;
DWORD TimeTag;
// Millisecond timetag.
double PositionX;
double PositionY;
double PositionZ;
BYTE IsHeightUsed;
// 0 = Z not used.
// 1 = Z is used (RTK).
BYTE TypeUnits;
BYTE Reserved2[16];
// Unused. Set to 0.
} XTFPOSITIONDATA;
Figure 7-40
This is the same type of menu as for the PDS2000 Grid Model (see page
139) but with an extra layer for the backscatter data.
The old backscatter grid models (created with the Sidescan sonar format
in the PDS2000 versions before 3.4.0.0) can still be used for logging the
side scan sonar or snippets data). Only in these old grid models is no Z
Average available to show the data in a 3D view.
File name: Name of the Grid Model [Backscatter-Model].DTM
Figure 7-41
7K logging reduction
Check the option Reduce on nadir filter if not all the data has to be
logged. The data that is rejected by the nadir filter (see page 370) will not
be logged.
Figure 7-42
Backup log becomes available when the option Use backup log directory
is checked in the Project Configuration (see page 73). Check the option
Enable Backup log to log the S7K file also in the backup log directory as
specified in the Project Configuration.
At the moment the following records, if available, will be logged:
1003 - Position
The position is the position of the vessel reference point.
The height is the height of the vessel reference point
relative to sea level when height source is None,
otherwise the height is relative to chart datum.
1008
Depth
Depth of the vessel reference point relative to sea level.
The value is obtained from the (selected) primary Sealevel
computation.
1010
1015
Navigation
The position is the position of the vessel reference point.
The height is the height of the vessel reference point
relative to sea level when height source is None,
otherwise the height is relative to chart datum.
1016
Attitude
7000
7004
7K Beam Geometry
7006
7K Bathymetry Data
The along track and across track values are related to the
vessel reference point and not to the sonar reference
point. The depths are relative sea level when the height
source is None, otherwise the depths are relative chart
datum.
7007
7008
7009
Vertical Depth
7027
7028
7030
7057
7058
7200
7K File Header
The FAU logging is available in two formats where one field can be beam
angle or beam number.
Figure 7-43
The default and standard format is FAU 1 with the beam angle. There is
no difference in the file name between both formats.
File name: Date_time_1_vessel name_runline name.FAU
The number 1 mentioned the first multibeam system from the equipment
list. If more multibeam systems are logged simultaneously then the
second gets a 2, the third a 3, etc.
When the number of beams is changed during the logging the actual file
will be closed and a new FAU file will be created. In a FAU file the number
of beams is placed in the header of the file.
At the moment some fields in the header of the file are not filled in due to
varies reasons. The fields that are not filled are TimeOffset,
SensorValsEdited, SwathNtPosJump, MaxNonLinearity, Major, Minor,
Autoflags, RotRectValid and BB_Tilt. All these fields will have a value 0.
The FAU format is made for UTM projections, but in PDS2000 all different
projections will be accepted. The header for the field
Minilab[MAXLABLNG] will have normally the UTM zone and the satellite
ellipsoid mentioned, like #utm32nNwgs84 for UTM Zone 32 and
WGS84.
For non UTM projections the field will be empty, except for the places
which are restricted. The field will look like #
N.
Figure 7-44
GSF logging
Select Uncorrected when the raw multibeam data has to be logged in the
GSF file. Select Fully Corrected when the corrected multibeam data has
to be logged in the GSF file. The corrected multibeam data in the GSF file
is computed according the multibeam xyz computation in the multibeam
device data.
File name: Date_time_1_vessel name_runline name.GSF
The number 1 mentioned the first multibeam system from the equipment
list. If more multibeam systems are logged simultaneously then the
second gets a 2, the third a 3, etc.
Figure 7-45
Figure 7-46
Logging conditions
Figure 7-47
A maximum size of the log file can be set. This means that when the file
exceeds the file size a new log file will be created.
Another option is by setting a time limit on logging in one file. If the time
limit is reached a new log file will be created.
7.10 Simulation
Figure 7-48
On this page the simulation parameters can be set. The simulator is buildin for training purposes.
Vessel position
Enter the grid position where the simulator will start.
Heading
The initial heading of the vessel.
Vru
Maximum values of the VRU simulator, Max. Heave in project units,
Max. Roll and Max. Pitch in degrees.
Depth
For each channel a depth value. Depth channel 1 is also used to
simulate a multibeam echo sounder.
Speed
Initial speed of the vessel. Depending on the chosen project units, in
knots or meters/second.
Simulate using runlines
Check Use Runlines to have the simulator running over the runlines.
Check Automatic Mode and the simulator will select the next runline
automatically.
Multibeam noise factor
Adds noise to the simulated multibeam swath, giving a more realistic
effect.
7.11 Aliases
Figure 7-49
GGA
Aliases are used to give multiple sensors of the same type distinguished
names. E.g. when there are two GPS sensors both using the device
driver Standard NMEA GGA, these sensors will have the same name in
the program. To give those sensors aliases such as GPS1 and GPS2 it
is more clear to the user.
Aliases are used throughout PDS2000 wherever the device name comes
forward.
7.12 Alarms
Figure 7-50
The alarms that can be set in this page are vessel specific or device
specific alarms and will be valid only for the vessel that is setup in this
vessel configuration.
Figure 7-51
Click on
to edit the selected alarm or on
to add a new
alarm. In both cases the Conditions window will be opened where the
alarm can be modified, the sound alarm can be set and the severity can
be selected.
Figure 7-52
Check the option Enable Alarm when the alarm has to be active.
Check the option Sound Alarm when the alarm should give a sound when
the alarm becomes valid. Each Severity (Low, Intermediate or High) gives
a different sound for the alarm.
With
or
a Condition dialog will be opened where the
selected condition can be modified or added. In this dialog an attribute
from the equipment or computation list can be selected and a condition
with a value for this attribute can be defined.
Figure 7-53
Condition dialog where the condition can be modified or an
attribute can be selected
The vessel alarm file will be placed in the Explorer - Project (see page
237), but cannot be edited through the explorer. It is only possible to
modify a vessel alarm file in the vessel configuration.
Step
Action
Click Add and give the alarm a name. (In this example alarm
heading difference.)
a. Click Add;
b. Select in the User computations, Difference;
c. Define the condition to generate an alarm with the
associated values. In this example the <> (within)
condition with minimum 1 and maximum 1. As the
heading data behaves cyclic (360 degrees around) the
minimum and maximum values could be interpreted as
negative and positive. In this example it means an alarm
is generated when the difference is less as one degree or
more as one degree.
7
8 Guidance
8.1 Introduction
Guidance is a method of assisting a vessel to sail along pre-defined
tracks, towards a pre-defined target or in/out pre-defined areas.
The number of guidance methods available in PDS2000 depends on the
application type that is selected. At the moment the different guidance
methods shown below are available through the different application
types:
1.
2.
Runlines (see page 156). Runlines are straight lines or route wing
lines which can be grouped in blocks. A number of block methods are
available.
3.
4.
5.
Cutter Dredge (see page 161). A work route for a cutter dredger.
6.
Work Areas (see page 162). A work area is an area where the work
takes place. A work area can be a rectangle or a polygon area.
7.
8.
9.
10. Object Distance (see page 167). Generate alarms when distance to
selected object become in alarm range.
Each method has its own definitions and computations and can have
many guidance files. In the Acquisition the user can change from
guidance file.
Guidance 155
8.2 Route
Figure 8-1
When a new route is created the user can select from three different
types of route; a generic route, a pipe route or a cable route. The generic
route is the standard route with Eastings and Northings. The pipe / cable
route has next to the Eastings and Northings also a Z-value or a depth.
This way a pipe / cable route can be used to show a pipe / cable with the
right depth.
The route editor can also
be opened in the Explorer Project with the Track
Guidance Routes option
(see in the Project
Database on page 241).
8.3 Runlines
Figure 8-2
The runlines guidance
editor can also be opened
in the Explorer - Project
with the Runlines option or
by opening the guidance
editor from the PDS2000
Control Center. Refer to
the Guidance Editor
manual for full details.
156 Guidance
Lead-in Lines
When the option Show lead-in lines is checked, PDS2000 computes a
lead-in line from the current vessel position to the start point of the
next runline. The lead-in curve is based on the lead-in line length and
the Vessel turn radius as set in the vessel geometry (see page 107).
The lead-in line length is the length of the straight line that is in line
with the next runline.
Check Use lead-in lines to compute off-line distances; distance to go
and traveled distances along the lead-in line.
Next line selection
In the next line selection the runline retrieval method needs to be set.
Normal. Each subsequent line is taken from the list with as start and
end of line the coordinates as defined in the runlines file.
Reverse. Each subsequent line is taken from the list with as start and
end of line the end and start coordinates.
Alternate. Each time a next line is selected from the list, the start and
end coordinates are alternately as normal or reversed. This allows
sailing line-by-line in a continuous way.
Enter or choose a number of lines to skip each time a next line is taken
automatically.
Check the option Automatic next line and click on
to set a
condition to discard the current line and goes to the next runline in the
list. The condition editor is equal to the one described on page 121.
Online condition
This condition is used for logging purposes. Check the Offtrack limit
and give a value for the offtrack limit. When a vessel is further away
from the selected runline than the offtrack limit, logging stops if the
appropriate check marks are set in the Condition Check in the
Logging page of the vessel configuration (see page 146).
8.4 Waypoints
Figure 8-3
The waypoints editor can
also be opened in the
Explorer - Project with the
Waypoints option (see in
the Project Database on
page 242).
Guidance 157
Figure 8-4
The 3D design model
editor and the grid model
editor can also be opened
in the Explorer - Project
with the 3D Models or the
Grid Models option (see in
the Project Database on
page 238 or on page 239).
158 Guidance
Figure 8-5
Guidance 159
If data is checked and there are errors the info box looks like:
Figure 8-6
After the check the errors are visible in the plan view of the editor. Zoom
in to one of the errors and click on the error to open a Fix window to solve
the error. After the error is fixed, click on
again to check if the error
is gone. Continue to solve all the errors. Click on
or
to save
the model, this is only possible when there are no errors left. As
mentioned in the info box the non-flat and overlapping areas cannot be
fixed.
If an error is fixed but the result is not what the user wants then with
the modification made to the error can be undone.
The 3D model can be exported to a 3D-DXF file. When it is not possible
to solve all the errors in the model, like the non-flat and overlapping
areas, the only option is to export the data to a DXF file and try to solve
the errors outside PDS2000 e.g. in AutoCAD.
Right clicking on the plan view window opens a context menu with several
functions. The most of these functions are also in the toolbar.
Zoom functions (
)
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents.
Pan ( )
Toggles the pan option on/off. When pan is active, keep the left mouse
button in and move the mouse to pan through the data.
The pan option can also be switched off by clicking on the right mouse
button.
Measure ( )
Measure a distance by clicking on one location and move the cursor to
the other location.
Save User Defaults
The settings of the 3D design model editor created by the user will be
saved.
Layer Control ( )
The background and foreground layers that are used in the 3D design
model editor.
Coverage Settings ( )
The settings of the grid model that can be added in the view (see
pagexxx).
160 Guidance
Properties ( )
The background color of the view can be modified.
All the attributes of the selected layers of the Layer Control are
available.
Figure 8-7
The route editor can also
be opened in the Explorer Project with the Track
Guidance Routes option
(see in the Project
Database on page 241).
A cutter dredger uses a work route as guidance. A work route is the same
as a route in Route on page 156.
Work route
On the cutter dredge page a (work) route file can be selected and
edited or a new file can be created. This opens automatically the route
editor (see page 156).
Work offset
An offset can be given to the work route. This offset route becomes
then the guidance route for the cutter dredger.
Swing limits
Angular swing limits
The maximum swing of the cutter to port and starboard side in
degrees.
Use also distance limits
Check this option to make it active.
The maximum distance from the cutter to the center line on port and
starboard side.
Prewarning distance end of cut
The distance from the end of cut (distance limits) from where a
warning is generated.
Guidance 161
Figure 8-8
A work area can be a dredge or dump area, and each area has a name
that can be descriptive and shown in the plan view.
With the option Only allow
single area selected in the
Acquisition only one work
area can be selected and
will be active.
In the Acquisition one or more work areas can be selected and becomes
the active work area(s). A line is drawn from the current vessel position to
the active work area or the center of active work areas. That line stays on
the vessels tracking point while the vessel moves, guiding the vessel
toward the active work area.
Polygon Area
Select an existing clipping polygon from the project as work area.
Rectangular Area
Enter a name, the center coordinate, the width, the height and the
rotation of the work area.
Alternatively, work areas can be created by importing ASCII files, click on
and converts these files to work areas. The ASCII file should be a
comma separated file with the format <Name>, <Center X>, <Center Y>,
<Length>, <Width>, <Rotation>.
162 Guidance
Figure 8-9
Restricted areas are kept together in files. A restricted areas file can hold
multiple areas; each area is either a polygon or a route. All areas of the
current file are valid in the Acquisition.
On the restricted areas page a restricted area file can be selected and
edited or a new file can be created. This will automatically open the
restricted areas editor.
Figure 8-10
Guidance 163
Figure 8-11
The placement points
editor can also be opened
in the Explorer - Project
with the Placement Points
option (see in the Project
Database on page 240).
164 Guidance
Figure 8-12
Click on
to add a new placement point to the list. The details of
the new point are displayed in the upper right corner of the placement
points editor.
Name
Enter a logical name for the placement point.
Guidance 165
Figure 8-13
Figure 8-14
On the left side of the dredge instruction editor all the information can be
added or modified. This information will be shown directly in the plan view
on the right side.
166 Guidance
Grid model
The grid model that will be shown the actual situation at the dredge
area.
3D design model
The 3D model that will be used in the dredge area.
Dredge depth offset
It is possible, by giving an offset to the 3D model, to dredge to an other
depth as specified in the 3D model.
Dredge polygon
The dredge polygon is the area where has to be dredged. A new
dredge polygon can be created through the context menu of the plan
view.
Create grid model update
A dredge instruction can be send to a vessel with all the information as
given in the instruction, that means also the data. The file size of a grid
model can be very large. To avoid sending every time the whole grid
model only the data of the grid model inside the dredge polygon will be
send.
Historical vessel tracks
The tracks from several vessels can be shown in the plan view and will
be send to the vessel.
Description
A description of the dredge instruction.
Class
One of the four classes for the quality of the dredge material can be
specified.
Disposal location
The location where the dredge material has to be dumped.
When the user is finished with the dredge instruction the instruction can
be saved and send later or send directly to the vessel.
Figure 8-15
This option is available for the (rope) excavator and grab crane dredge
applications will only work when 3D shapes of the crane are used.
Guidance 167
PDS2000 can generate alarms to warn the user when he is too close to
an object. The object can be selected as a DXF file in this page.
In the Object Distance page two alarms can be defined. Add a distance
for which the alarm becomes valid and enter a text that will be displayed
in the Acquisition. In the Profile Realtime Design view and Plan View
General Dredge Operation when the alarm becomes valid the frame will
be highlighted (grey or red) and the added text will be displayed in the
frame (see below).
Figure 8-16
168 Guidance
Figure 8-17
Guidance 169
9 Events
9.1 Introduction
Before events can be viewed in the Messages System Messages view
in the Acquisition, the event and the conditions to show the event have to
be defined. At the same time when an event is shown in the Messages
System Messages view the information is logged in the PDS2000 log file.
The Events page can be opened in two different ways:
1. Through the New Project wizard. Select File > New Project from the
menu bar of the Control Center to open the wizard (see page 82).
2. With Acquisition > Configure from the menu bar or with
on the
toolbar of the Control Center the Configuration window will be opened.
Click on the tab Events to open the Events page.
Figure 9-1
On this page the eventing interval, the conditions and the event definition
have to be set.
The option Enable eventing has to be checked if the user wants events in
the Acquisition.
When the option Follow Logging Enable is checked the event logging is
started and stopped with the PDS2000 logging. This option overrules the
Events 171
option Enable eventing. When the Acquisition is started and the option
Enable eventing is checked the event logging is started even if the
PDS2000 logging is off, but when the PDS2000 logging is started and
stopped the event logging follows the PDS2000 logging.
For each day an event logfile is generated with the information as defined
in the event definition (see page 172).
The name of the event logfile is Acquisition_EVENT_yyyymmdd.log.
9.2.1 Mode
Select one of the three interval modes for the eventing:
Time
Set a time interval, e.g. 60 sec. Every 60 sec an event is generated.
Distance
Set a distance interval, e.g. 100 m. Every 100 m sailed an event is
generated.
Line
Set a line distance interval, e.g.100 m. Every 100 m sailed along a
runline, a route or a wayline an event is generated.
9.2.2 Conditions
Click on
Figure 9-2
Conditions menu
Next to the automatic eventing with the interval mode and the conditions a
state event can be generated. Check the option Generate manual event if
a state event is needed. Click on
to select a push button device. This
device has to be selected in the Equipment page (see page 113).
This state event works independent from the automatic eventing. It only
looks at the information from the push button device to generate an event.
172 Events
Multiple definitions can be made and each definition has a name. The
event messages can be selected by that name in the Acquisition.
Select one of the event definitions and click on
to open the Event
Definition editor. If no events are available, click on
and a new
event definition can be created in the Event Definition editor. Another way
to open this editor is in the Explorer under the tab General.
Figure 9-3
The event can be defined in the Acquisition (see page 278) or through
the Event Definition editor in the Events page of the Configuration (see
page 82).
In the Event Definition editor click at the bottom of the editor on
to add a new message. An event can contains several
messages. Select the type of message: Separator Delimited or Fixed
Field.
Start creating a template. The template can contain text and/or data
items. The text can be typed directly in the template. For the data
items reserve space or place separators depending on the type of
message.
Click next to Field separator on
If all the data items are selected the event string can be checked by
clicking on
.
Events 173
Figure 9-4
174 Events
Figure 9-5
In this example select for Start character 23 for the X or 40 for the Y
and for Field length in both cases 12 to add the two data items.
For the explanations of the other options in the fixed field see the Field
Selection below.
Events 175
Figure 9-6
Figure 9-7
Click on
to select from the Select Data dialog the data item for the
relevant data source.
176 Events
Figure 9-8
Figure 9-9
Set a start number for the first event number and set the number
increment to the next event numbers. If the counting of the event numbers
is decreasing, check the Count down checkbox.
Events 177
10 Control Center
10.1 Introduction
When PDS2000 is started always the Control Center will be opened.
From the Control Center all modules of the program can be started.
The Simulator utility is a stand-alone program that can simulate the most
common sensors. With this Simulator a setup in PDS2000 can be tested
before the actual sensors are connected. At the moment no manual is
available. The Simulator can be opened from the menu bar with Tools >
Simulator.
The SonarSwath utility is made to analyze processed bathymetry data
and generate a report of sonar performance as a function of the beam
launch angle or the beam distance from the center. The SonarSwath can
be opened from the menu bar with Tools > SonarSwath.
See for a detailed explanation the manual Sonar Swath (the file Sonar
Swath.pdf in the folder manuals).
Figure 10-1
Help Topics
It will open the Help file of PDS2000 which contains a copy of all the
PDS2000 manuals. The Help file can also be open with the F1-key.
Download PDS2000 Updates
The FTP site of PDS2000 will be opened to download the latest
version of PDS2000.
PDS2000 On The Web
The PDS2000 site on the RESON website will be opened.
PDS2000 On Twitter
The PDS2000 twitter site will be opened where the latest information
of PDS2000 is available.
View Release Notes
The release notes of PDS2000 will be opened in the default PDF
reader.
Send Feedback To RESON
Via email
The default email editor will be opened to send an email to the
helpdesk of PDS2000 (pds2000@reson.nl).
Via the web
The Support page on the RESON website will be opened.
Show Support Phone Numbers
The telephone numbers for the PDS2000 support in The Netherlands
and for the RESON support in Denmark and USA will be given.
The display modes are working fine for the Windows Themes
Windows Classic and Windows 7 Basic. For Night, Twilight and
Bright in the Windows Theme Windows 7 (Aero Theme) not all the
items will be supported!
The display mode is also available in the Acquisition and in the
Presentation windows with View > Display Mode from the menu bar.
Figure 10-2
Clock device
Select one of the clock devices and click on
to display the
clock device as the Selected clock device.
For the clock devices with a GPS time automatically an extra item
will be displayed in the window; the leap seconds. With these leap
seconds the GPS time will be corrected to UTC time.
Input
Click on the first
select the right communication port with
the right settings (see page 184) for the time message of the
selected clock device.
When the pulse (PPS) is on the same port as the time message
then the pulse is automatically interfaced. If the pulse is on a
different port then click on the second
to select the port for
the pulse.
Figure 10-3
Figure 10-4
Icon
10.5 Interfacing
On the Equipment page an IO port has to be set when a sensor is added
to the device list (see page 113). When in the Equipment page on
is clicked only the communication ports for that specific
device driver are available and not all possible interfaces can be selected.
In the Interfacing window which can be opened in the Control Center all
the different communication ports are available.
Figure 10-5
Interfacing window
Select from the menu bar the option System > Interfacing or click on
the toolbar to open the Interfacing window.
in
The visible ports can be selected and on the right side in the window the
settings will be displayed and can be modified if necessary. If a
communication port is modified in the Interfacing window then the settings
of this port, if it is used in the Equipment page, will also be changed.
Click on
to add a new port or a new type of port to the list. In the
Select Interface dialog one of the available types for the selected device
can be selected. Select one of the available interface types and a new
network port name, a new com port name or a new OPC port name has
to be entered.
The different interfaces that are available are:
XSE (see below)
Socket (see page 185)
Serial (see page 186)
RTA (see page 187)
RGL (see page 187)
RESON Remote IO
R7KI (see page 188)
R7K (see page 188)
OPC (see page 189)
NCC (see page 189)
EDGETECH (see page 189)
It will depend on the device driver which interfaces will be available.
10.5.1.1 XSE
This type of communication port is only used for an Elac system. A
network port has to be entered and on the right side in the Interfacing
page an IP-address has to be entered for the XSE server.
Figure 10-6
10.5.1.2 Socket
This type of communication port is a network connection and can be used
for receiving and/or sending data through a network connection.
Figure 10-7
Local Port
The network port on the PDS2000 computer.
Host Address
The IP-address of the remote system. This is the system that sends
the data.
If the remote system is on the same computer as where PDS2000 is
running, the host address is 127.0.0.1.
Host Port
The network port on the remote system.
Check host address
This option is only relevant if the protocol is UDP/IP.
If the option is checked, only the data from the host address will be
accepted.
Protocol
There are two network protocols available:
UDP/IP. This protocol will be used for the communication with the
RESON multibeam systems.
TCP/IP. If this protocol is used an IP-address has to be entered as
host address. This protocol checks the communication between the
two ports before it send or received data.
IP Multicast
This is broadcasting from/to a select group of recipients. Check the
option Join multicast to receive or send data in the group. The group
name has to be entered. Normally this name is created by the sender
of the data. The protocol for IP multicast is always UDP/IP.
The table below gives the setting for receiving and sending data:
Local Port
Host Address
Host Port
Receiving
Sending
empty
host IP address
host IP address
The empty mentioned above in the table can also be replaced by host IP
address when only the data from the host address has to be accepted.
10.5.1.3 Serial
This type of communication port is a serial connection, called COM port,
and can be used for all the sensors with a serial connection.
If more than one COM port has to be used, serial extender cards have to
be installed. See in the chapter Installation on page 18 for more
information.
Figure 10-8
10.5.1.4 RTA
The RTA communication port is a network connection and is specific for
the devices which are received from the RTA (Real Time Appliance) box
used for the Odom ES3.
Figure 10-9
The Base Port Number is by default set on the right number (2020), do
not change this!!
Select the sensor type that matches with the selected device.
See for a detailed explanation the manual Interface Setup chapter Odom
ES3 (the file Interface Setup.pdf in the folder manuals).
10.5.1.5 RGL
The RGL communication port is a network connection and is specific for
the laser scan devices Riegl and Riegl Vline. The port cannot be selected
it will automatically selected when one of these laser scan types is
selected as device.
Figure 10-10
Host Address
The IP address is always from the Riegl laser scan.
Figure 10-11
The Base Port Number should be the port number as specified in the raw
data distribution in the SeaBat UI.
Select the sensor type that matches with the selected device. For each
device a separate RESON Remote IO interface has to be setup.
10.5.1.7 R7KI
The R7KI communication port is a network connection and is specific for
the RESON SeaBat 7K systems. This communication port is identical with
the Socket port as described above.
Figure 10-12
10.5.1.8 R7K
The R7K communication port is a network connection and is specific for
the RESON SeaBat 7K systems. The port cannot be selected it will
automatically selected when a RESON SeaBat 7K system is selected as
device.
Figure 10-13
Host Address
The host is always the 7K data server and, when it is running on the
same computer as PDS2000, the address is 127.0.0.1. If the 7K data
server is running on another computer then the address is the IP
address of the other computer.
Protocol
The protocol has to be UDP/IP.
This port can be used for all 7K drivers that need information from the 7K
data server, like the multibeam, the side scan sonar and the snippets, or
send information to the 7K data server, like the output to 7K.
10.5.1.9 OPC
The OPC communication port is a kind of network connection. The port
cannot be selected it will automatically selected when an OPC device is
selected.
Figure 10-14
10.5.1.10 NCC
This type of communication port is needed for the Navisound echo
sounders. The port is a dummy port which is used in PDS2000 to
communicate with the Navisound. The actual port and settings are
defined in the Navisound Control Center (see page 116).
The NCC port is automatically created when a Navisound echo sounder is
selected in the Equipment. So it is not necessary to add a NCC port, but
when by accident the port is deleted while the Navisound is already
selected then the port can be added. It is not needed to define the baud
rate, etc. because this will be done in the Navisound Control Center.
There can be only one NCC port in the Interfacing available.
10.5.1.11 Edgetech
The Edgetech communication port is a network connection and is specific
for the Edgetech side scan sonar system. This communication port is
identical with the Socket port as described above, only the Local port and
the multicast are disabled.
Figure 10-15
10.6 Import
On several places in PDS2000 data files can be imported and converted
to information that can be used in PDS2000. The different import
possibilities will be discussed in the different modules of PDS2000.
The import in the Control Center is made to convert data files to PDS2000
log data files.
If the Select Tool dialog is
not visible, select File >
New from the menu bar or
click on
in the toolbar
to open the dialog.
Select from the menu bar the option Tools > Import or click on
in the
toolbar to open the PDS2000 Import Utility. When the PDS2000 Import
Utility window is opened it will be an empty window with the Select Tool
dialog on top of it.
Figure 10-16
Select in the Select Tool dialog the type of import for which a new import
configuration has to be created or select an existing import configuration.
An existing import configuration can also be opened with File > Open from
the menu bar or with
from the toolbar.
If a new import configuration has to be created it is also possible to use
an existing import configuration file as a base. Check the option Copy
from existing config file and select the file that has to be used as a start.
At the end of the configuration the new import configuration can be saved
by clicking on
in the toolbar or select File > Save As from the menu
bar.
If there is already an import configuration that can be used with the import
files check the option Open existing and select the right import
configuration.
At the moment the PDS2000 Import Utility can import the following data:
Single Beam XYZ (see below)
XTF (see page 199)
S7K (see page 200)
SZ (see page 202)
Simrad EM3000 (see page 203)
Figure 10-17
Navisoft PRD
This is the ASCII output file from Navisoft.
Select one of the three formats, select the number of channels in the data
file(s) and the sign convention for the Z-value. Click on
to start
the setup of the import configuration or to check the import configuration if
an existing configuration. If an existing import configuration is selected or
the import wizard is finished, click on
to start the import of the
data.
For the Navisoft PRD files it is not necessary to open the import
configuration file. The user can click on
and select the PRD files
for the import.
With
the import configuration will be opened. It will depend on the
selection of the XYZ format and the number of channels which pages will
appear before the actual import can be started.
Figure 10-18
Figure 10-19
Figure 10-20
This page will appear for all three formats. The number of columns on this
page depends on the selections in the pages before.
Click on
to add a data file to the file selection. If in the runline
options page (see page 193) the option Pick runline from project is
checked and/or in the ASCII file options page (see page 192) the option
Timetag generation from start time and ping rate is checked, an Edit
Import File Settings window will be opened after the selection of the
file(s).
Figure 10-21
Import file
The added data file from the File Selection page.
Runline File
Select with
an existing runline from the project.
This option will be shown if the option Pick runline from project in the
run line options page is checked (see page 193).
The next three fields will be shown if the options Timetag generation from
start time and ping rate in the ASCII file options page (see page 192) is
checked or the ASCII (X,Y,Z) data file with or without an ID is selected.
Start date
Click on
date.
next to the date and select in the calendar the right start
Figure 10-22
Calendar
Start time
Set the right start time of the first XYZ in the data file. Select the hours,
minutes or seconds with the mouse, type in the right value or use the
up and down arrows to change the numbers.
Ping rate (Hz)
Set the frequency for the XYZ data; how many times per second is the
XYZ data presented in the data file.
Click on
in the Edit Import File Settings window to go back to the
file selection page. With
in the file selection page, the Edit Import
File Settings window can be opened to check or modify the import file
settings.
will only be active if a runline, date or time can be set.
If all the data files are added and the runline, date and time are set, click
on
.
Figure 10-23
To click on
behind one of the options will start the wizard for the right
settings of the selected option. It depends on the selection of the ASCII
data file and on the selections made in the pages before which parsing
options will be available on this page.
The different parsing options can be:
1. Parsing Of Date, Time, X, Y, Z for Channel 1 or Channel 2
2. Parsing Of X, Y, Z for Channel 1 or Channel 2
3. Parsing Of X1, Y1, X2, Y2 For Runline
Option 1 and 2 starts with the parsing of the XYZ data (see below). After
that option 1 will continue with the parsing of the date and time (see page
Figure 10-24
On this page the settings for the XYZ data are set, so that on the next
page the right columns with XYZ data can be selected.
File
The filename displayed in the file box is the first file from the file
selection page. At the bottom, in Preview Data, the data of that file is
shown.
Original data type
Delimited. Check this option if the data is separated with a delimiter,
such as a comma, a tab or a space.
Fixed Width. Check this options if the data is aligned in columns with
spaces in between.
Skip lines
Check this option if the first line(s) of the data file(s) contains
information that is not runline data or XYZ data.
Give a number for the number of lines that have to be skipped.
Line ID
Give an ID for the lines that have to be extracted from the data file. If
an ID is given, the preview data will change and will only show the
lines in the data file with the given ID. In the example shown above,
the ID for the XYZ data is EC and for the runline RT.
If all the settings are set, click on
parsing XYZ data.
Figure 10-25
This page will appear when Delimited is checked on the first page of
parsing XYZ data. If Fixed Width is checked the page will be similar as
the page for parsing the date and time, only the sub items will be X, Y, Z
and optional date and time (see page 198).
On this page the delimiter and the columns have to be defined.
Delimiter
Select a character as delimiter between the data fields. The options
are comma, tab, space or custom. With custom a user defined
character can be added.
If in the ASCII file options
page (see page 192) the
option Timetag parsing is
checked, also the date and
the time column have to be
selected.
Fields
If a column is selected in Select Column Names, a column number
will be added to the selected field name.
Select column names
Click with the right mouse button on a column and select one of the
available field names for the selected column.
If all the columns which are necessary for the import are selected, the
button
will become active (only for parsing XYZ data). Click on
and go back to the first page of the import utility.
If the parsing contains a date and time, the ASCII Parsing Wizard will
continue with parsing date and time (see below).
Figure 10-26
The locations of the year, month and day in the date column are defined
with a start and end position in the column.
Double click in Column For Field Name: on year, month or day and an
edit window will be opened.
Start Position
Set the start position of the item; in the example above the month
(here 02) starts at position 5.
Stop Position
Set the stop (end) position of the item; in the example above the
month (here 02) stops at position 6.
Factor
The multiplication factor should be 1.
Offset
An offset can be added to the selected item value to get the right
value. If for instance the year is presented in the data file as 05, then
with an offset of 2000 the year becomes 2005.
If the year, month and day are set, click on
to go to the page for
parsing the time. This page works similar as the page for parsing the
date, only here are the items hour, minute, second and millisecond. If the
hour, minute and second is set (millisecond is optional)
becomes
active.
This second page will similar to the second page of parsing XYZ data
(see page 196). On this page four columns have to be selected before
will become active.
Figure 10-27
Click on
to select the XTF file for the import. It is possible to add
more XTF files before the import is started.
Check one of the options Import sidescan data, Import snippet data or
Import tide data if side scan data, snippets or tide data is available in the
XTF file(s) and have to be imported.
Click on
Figure 10-28
Click on
to select the S7K file for the import. It is possible to add
more S7K files before the import is started.
For bathymetry data at least the following records should be logged in the
S7K file:
For Position :1003; or 1015
For Heading and Attitude: 1004; or 1011 and 1012; or 1016
For Bathymetry: 7000, 7004 and 7006; or 7000, 7004 and 7027
Check one of the options Import sidescan data or Import snippet data if
side scan data or snippets data is available in the S7K file(s) and have to
be imported.
When the data is logged with a survey vessel check the option Surface
Vessel and when the data is logged with an underwater vehicle, like a
ROV or AUV, check the option Subsea Vessel.
Click on
10.6.3.1 Offsets
When in the S7K file(s) the record 7030 is missing, automatically an
offsets dialog will be opened. The offsets for the Position, Attitude,
Multibeam and Sealevel can be added manually or loaded from a file.
In the file all the items in the dialog should be mentioned with the terms as
displayed below in the text file.
Figure 10-29
Text file with the offsets values for the offsets dialog
Figure 10-30
Check the option Apply to all files when for all the S7K files in the import
the same offsets have to be applied.
10.6.4 SZ Import
Figure 10-31
SZ Import page
Click on
to add SZ files to the list. If the SZ data contains records
with survey data (record 2122), the Grid model settings becomes
relevant. The survey data will be placed in a grid model. The default
setting for the Interpolation is No interpolation. If the user wants to fill the
grid model, select the option Interpolate circular and the empty cells
between the runlines will be interpolated. This circular interpolation will
take a long time. The cell size of the grid model can be set, with the
smaller the cell size the more detailed the grid model is and the longer it
takes to fill the grid model.
Click on
to start the import of the added SZ files. It will depend on
the information in the SZ file, what will be generated in the import. For SZ
files with design information the following files will be generated.
3D Model file with the design profiles.
3D Model file with the GLW values (levels).
Track Guidance Route file with the route of the axis of the river.
Runline file with all the runlines (cross lines) in the river.
Runline file with the reference lines for the left and right side of the
sailing channel, for the left and right side of the river and for the axis of
the river.
For SZ files with survey data the following files will be generated.
Runline file with all the runlines (cross lines) in the river. If also design
information is available in the SZ file, this file is identical with the
runline file mentioned above.
Grid Model file with the survey data and with the interpolated data if
applicable.
PDS2000 log data files for each cross line.
Log data file set with all the PDS2000 log data files mentioned above.
Figure 10-32
Click on
to select the ALL files for the import. It is possible to add
more ALL files before the import is started.
Check the option Apply imported sound velocity profile to PDS2000 file
when the imported sound velocity profile data from the ALL file has to be
applied to the created PDS2000 logdata file. When more ALL files have
the same sound velocity profile only one sound velocity profile file is
created in PDS2000.
Click on
Figure 10-33
Click on
to select the Kongsberg Maritime GeoSwath RDF files. It is
possible to add more GeoSwath RDF files before the import is started.
Click on
Figure 10-34
The Offset dialog box contains the offsets for the Position, Attitude,
Multibeam and Sealevel as read from the GeoSwath RDF file.
When the RDF file(s) does not contain these offsets they are 0 in the
offsets dialog box. The user should enter them manually or load them
from a file.
Click
to load the offsets from a file. Click
the offsets to a file.
Check the Apply to all files checkbox
all GeoSwath RDF files as added to be imported.
to save
Figure 10-35
Click
to add BlueView Son Sonar files. It is possible to add more
SON files before the import is started. Refer to the PDS2000 BlueView
manual for a description of the BlueView Son file import.
Figure 10-36
Batch Plot
Survey data
A XYZ file have to be selected with
. From this XYZ data file a grid
model will be generated and that grid model will replace the grid model
in the plot template.
The Name Prefix is automatically generated when the XYZ data file is
selected. The user can modified the prefix if he wants. The prefix
name will be used in the plot file and in the DXF file.
Check the option XYZ file contains Depths when the Z values in the
XYZ data file are depths. This is necessary because the depths in the
grid model are negative heights. So the Z values from the XYZ file get
a minus sign when the option is checked.
DTM
Set the cell size for the grid model that have to be generated from the
XYZ data file. The cell size doesnt have to be the same as in the XYZ
data file.
If there are gaps in the data or the grid model cell size is smaller than
the size in the XYZ data file then the data in the grid model can be
interpolated. As interpolation methods are available Circular and
Triangular. For more information about the interpolation see page 588
and pagexxx.
In the grid model the Hit Count is always present. The user can select
which data types should be in the grid model, he can choose between
Z Average, Z Minimum (Deepest) and Z Maximum (Highest). The data
type that is used in the plot template should always be selected
otherwise no data will be plotted. The other two data types are extra.
When there is an interpolation and all three data types are selected
then for all three an interpolation will be done.
Plot selection
Select a plot project with
. In this plot project the plot template
should be available.
Add one or more plot templates from the selected plot project for which
the generated grid model is valid.
Text labels
The text labels as defined in the plot template can be modified in the
column User Text. This modified text will be used in the plot which will
be generated.
A Batch Plot setup file (BPP file) can be opened. This file contains all
the information to set all the items in the Batch Plot dialog.
Saves a modified setup to the related BPP file.
Saves the setup and specify the name for the BPP file.
Opens the Print Setup dialog to setup the printer.
Prints the generated plot to the printer that is selected in the Print
Setup dialog.
Creates a plot file with the prefix name, date and time in the selected
plot project.
Creates a DXF file with the prefix name, date and time in the project
folder.
Closes the Batch Plot dialog without saving the setup in a BPP file.
The Quick Profile Plot can be started with Tools > Quick Profile Plot from
the menu bar.
Figure 10-37
Quick Profile Plot with a plot project and a plot template selected
In the tabs Filesets, DTM, Design and Text the right files for the profiles
plots can be selected and also the right text can be specified.
Under Select Runlines the runlines files or a set of runlines can be
selected which will be used to generate the profile plots.
10.8.1.1 Filesets
Figure 10-38
If in the profile panel of the plot template log data is specified as a layer
then with this tab the file set for the profile plots can be specified. Click on
to select an existing log data file set in the project for the
selected layer.
10.8.1.2 DTM
Figure 10-39
10.8.1.3 Design
Figure 10-40
10.8.1.4 Text
Figure 10-41
If the setup with the file selections is saved, the saved setup can be
opened again. Before
is used the plot project has to be
selected.
If the setup with the file selection is finished, the setup will be saved
with the name of the plot template.
If the setup with the file selection is finished, the setup will be saved
with a name specified by the user.
For each runline that is selected in the Select Runlines box a preview
of the plot will be displayed. Click on
in the preview file plot to
close the preview and continue with the preview of the next selected
runline. The preview can be stopped by closing the file plot preview
with
.
For the selected runline in the General tab a preview of the plot will be
displayed. Click on
or
to close the preview.
For each runline that is selected in the Select Runlines box a profile
plot will be generated with the setting as specified in the different tab
pages. Each profile plot will be placed in the plot project as a separate
plot file with the name of the plot template and a sequence number.
After the plot files are generated they will be printed.
For each runline that is selected in the Select Runlines box a profile
plot will be generated with the setting as specified in the different tab
pages. Each profile plot will be placed in the plot project as a separate
plot file.
A dialog will be opened to define the plot file name. The name can be
the plot template name, the name of the runline or a name specified by
the user. The plot files will be generated with the defined name and a
sequence number. The plot files with the runline name do not have a
sequence number.
Before the DXF file can be created the plot files has to be generated
as discussed above in the option
.
After the plot files are generated for each plot file a DXF file will be
created and will be placed in the plot project directory.
If a lot of DXF files has to be created, it can take a long time before the
creation of all the DXF files is finished. Move the cursor over the plot
icon ( ) in the taskbar and a display will tell the user how many tasks
(DXF files) still have to be processed. In the example below still 176
DXF files has to be created.
Figure 10-42
The Quick Profile Plot will be closed and the setup will not be saved.
The values for the latitude and longitude in the different pages does not
have to be in the format as displayed, it can be entered in several
formats. For example: 563007.2 N, 56 30 7.2 N or 56.502 N.
The Geo Calculator can be started with Tools > Geo Calculator from the
menu bar.
Figure 10-43
10.9.1.1 Convergence
The grid convergence is the angle between grid north and true north, so
in fact the angle between the grid lines and the projection of the
meridians. When using a gyro compass, and its input is read by
PDS2000, the heading value cannot directly be used in the computations.
The value has to be corrected for the grid convergence to obtain a grid
heading which can be used for the computations.
The complete computation for the grid heading is:
Grid Heading = True Heading + Convergence + Heading Correction
For some projection there is a grid skew. This skew will be added to the
convergence.
The heading correction is the correction derived from a gyro compass
calibration.
Below an example for a Transverse Mercator (TM) grid convergence.
Figure 10-44
TM grid convergence
For an UTM the scale factor is 0.9996 on the central meridian. When we
move to the east or west the scale factor will become bigger.
Figure 10-45
With
the display
format for the coordinates
can be changed.
Figure 10-46
In the file coordinate conversion page of the Geo Calculator a file with
coordinates can be converted to a file with converted coordinates using
the two selectable coordinate systems.
Figure 10-47
Satellite Ellipsoid
The coordinates should be WGS84 or ETRS89 coordinates. The
latitude, longitude and altitude (height z) are required. If no altitude
is available the conversion assumes that the altitude is 0.
Local Ellipsoid
The coordinates should be in the local ellipsoid system that is
specified in the project coordinate system. The latitude, longitude
and altitude (height z) are required. If no altitude is available the
conversion assumes that the altitude is 0.
Grid
The coordinates should be in the projection that is specified in the
coordinate system. The Easting, Northing and height are required.
If no height is available the conversion assumes that the height is
0.
Route
The coordinates should be in KP, Offtrack and height. The KP and
Offtrack should be related to the route that selected. If no height is
available the conversion assumes that the height is 0.
File Conversion
At the moment only one output format is available, Comma Separated
Volume (the output file is a CSV file).
Click on
to start the file conversion. The ASCII Import
Wizard will be open to select the right columns in the ASCII file.
Figure 10-48
The two default user accounts, Administrator and Basic Operator, do not
have a password yet. If the user wants a password to protect these two
accounts, select a user account and click on
to open the User
dialog to add a password.
Figure 10-49
User dialog
Enter the password in the field Password and repeat this in Retype
password. With the option Show password the actual text of the password
is displayed, if this option is unchecked only dots will be displayed (see
above).
At the moment are two access level present. With
a new
access level can be added or an existing user level can be modified (see
below).
Figure 10-50 Manage user level access window with the two default access
levels, Administrator and Basic Operator.
In this window the menu options from the Control Center, the Acquisition
and the Presentation that can be switched on/off are displayed. The menu
options that are accessible in all different access levels are not displayed.
The access levels are only valid for one application type. Each application
type has its own access levels, this is due to that menu options per
application type can differ.
The two default access levels, as displayed above, cannot be deleted or
modified. If the user wants for some menu options a different access as
defined with the two defaults then a new access level has to be created.
Click on
and the Add user access level dialog will be opened.
Figure 10-51
Check the option Make copy of access level if an existing access level
has to be used as base for the new one. If the option is unchecked all the
menu options in the new access level will be switched off (set on No).
Figure 10-52
Click on a Yes or No in the window and the selected menu item can be
changed. So is in the figure above the menu item Logging/Logging
Settings in the Acquisition changed to Yes.
Figure 10-53
Figure 10-54
On the top right side in the application the user account can be changed.
Select the option and select one of the available user accounts. If for the
user account a password is added, then the user has to enter the
password before the selected user account becomes active.
10.11 Language
At the moment, next to the English language, the other languages that are
available in PDS2000 are Deutsch (German), Franais (France), Italiana
(Italian), Nederlands (Dutch), Russian and Chinese.
If PDS2000 is running in a not English language it is possible that not all
items in a menu or in the text of the menus are in the right language. The
translation is made for a specific version of PDS2000, so if software
modification took place after that version the new items or text will be in
English.
Select from the menu bar of the Control Center the option Tools >
Optionsand in the Language tab select a different language for
PDS2000.
Figure 10-55
Figure 10-56
a message will
Restart PDS2000 and the selected language will be the active language
for PDS2000.
The message is only a warning that the performance can be better if the
advice as mentioned in the message is followed.
Figure 10-57
to do a check the
when no checks
Figure 10-58
Click on
to do a manually power management check. If everything
is OK then the following text will be displayed.
Figure 10-59
When one of the checks failed the following text will be displayed.
Figure 10-60
This option is only available for one specific client. It will add an extra tab
called User General to the Explorer. In this tab data from several projects
can be stored and can be used in the different projects.
The items that are available in this tab are: 3D Models, Contour
Definitions, Design Profile Templates, DXF Drawings, Profile Design
Models, Runlines and Track Guidance Routes.
Figure 10-61
Select the user general folder and automatically the selected folder will
become the folder used in the User General tab in the Explorer.
11 Explorer
11.1 Introduction
PDS2000 uses different types of data files to store the relevant
information and settings. All these data files are accessible through the
Explorer.
It is also possible to use
the context menu of the
Control Center to add or
remove the view.
The Explorer is one of the windows that is available in the Control Center.
If the Explorer is not present in the Control Center, select View from the
menu bar and check Explorer. To remove the window from the Control
Center uncheck Explorer.
In the Explorer the information is divided in nine databases.
Projects Common
The settings and data files from the Projects Common Files folder in
the PDS2000 Projects directory (see page 232).
PDS2000
General settings that can be used by all the applications and projects
in PDS2000 (see page 236).
Project
Project related settings and data files (see page 237).
Log Data
All available types of project related log data files (see page 265).
Multimedia
The multimedia files in PDS2000; the AVI, BMP, JPG and (Geo)TIFF
files (see page 266).
Report
The report files in PDS2000; CSV and PDF files (see page 267).
Charts
All available background charts. (see page 267)
Sonar Targets
The sonar targets files with the GeoTIFF images of the targets (see
page 273).
Camera Images
The icon images files with the BMP and JPG images for the icons (see
page 274).
Explorer 227
At the moment for some data files a preview is available. Select a file and
on the right side in the Explorer, if possible, the data will be displayed. If
the preview pane is not visible click on
in the Explorer on the top right
side to open the preview pane. Click on
to close the preview pane.
The order in the folder name, the size or the date can be modified with a
click on the relevant header on top of the Explorer. With an arrow the
order direction will be indicated; arrow down is descending and an arrow
up is ascending.
The database, the file groups and the data files have their own context
menu. With the options in the context menus the items can be checked
and/or modified. The different options in the context menus will be
discussed in this chapter.
The editors which are not discussed in other chapters of the manual
and/or the editors that are only accessible through the Explorer will be
discussed in this chapter.
Figure 11-1
228 Explorer
Figure 11-2
It is easier to add files with
the Add Files option in the
file group context menu
(see below).
Add Files
Add files to the selected database. Files can be selected in a standard
dialog window. Only files which belong to the database group can be
added.
Copy Project
Only available in the Project database. Copy the project to a different
location on the PC.
Backup Project
Only available in the Project database. A backup of the project will be
made. All project files will be compressed to a ZIP file, which can be
stored on any location on the PC.
For more information about how to backup files outside the PDS2000
project folder see below.
Show Details
If checked, behind the data files the size and date will be displayed. If
not checked, no size and date is visible.
Expand All Folders
Expand the folders in the View. All folder files are displayed.
Collapse All Folders
Collapse the folders in the View. Only the folders are displayed.
Refresh View
Refresh the view in the Explorer.
Properties
A window with the properties of the selected database will be opened.
Explorer 229
Extension
3D Studio Models
3ds
aic
Crane Configuration
ccf
Draught Table
ddt
Export Configurations
exp
Hopper Table
hdt
Import Configurations
imp
Numeric Pages
npg
Vessel Contours
vsl
Vessel Setups
vsf
Wireframe Drawings
dxf
SketchUP Models
skp
Events
evt
Besides the project folder and the project common folder, there is the
common application folder. This folder is for Windows XP C:\Documents
and Settings\All Users\Application Data and for Windows 7
C:\ProgramData\RESON\PDS2000 and is used for storing PDS2000
application settings.
Common Application Files
File name
Description
CustomActions[<module>].ini
DeviceTest.ini
Editor.ini
InterfaceDef.ini
Master.ini
pds2000.ini
pdsusergeobase.geo
PlotApp.ini
R7KDistribution.ini
230 Explorer
Care must be taken when restoring project backups, since the backup
could overwrite existing files in the destination Projects Common Files
and common application folders that also could be used by other projects
that are installed on the destination location.
Figure 11-3
New File
A new file for the selected file group can be made and the editor of that
file group will be opened.
Add Files
Add files to the selected file group. Files can be selected in a standard
dialog window. The file type is set to the file extension for the selected
file group.
Backup
A backup of the selected file group will be made. All the files in the file
group will be compressed to a ZIP file, which can be stored on any
location on the PC.
Refresh
Refresh the view in the Explorer.
Figure 11-4
Edit
Will open the editor belonging to the selected file. In the editor the file
can be checked and/or modified.
The editor can also be opened with a double click on the file.
View
Will open the selected file in Notepad where the file can be checked
and/or modified. It is better to use the editor to modify the file.
Delete
Delete the selected file(s) from the file group. It is possible to delete
more files at the same time.
Also the Delete key on the keyboard can be used to delete the files.
Rename
Change the name of the file.
Duplicate
Make a copy of the file. The copy will be placed in the same file group.
Explorer 231
Backup
A backup of the selected file will be made. The file will be compressed
to a ZIP file, which can be stored on any location on the PC.
Properties
A window with the properties of the selected file will be opened.
232 Explorer
Step
Action
Explorer 233
Step
Action
Click Next.
Press Next
234 Explorer
Step
Action
c.
Click Finish
been imported.
Explorer 235
Crane Configurations
The crane configuration file with the configurations for the boom, stick
and tool of the (rope) excavators as they are used in the Tools page of
the vessel configuration (see page 124).
The file contains also the pipe configurations for the suction pipes of
the trailing suction hoppers as they are used in the Tools page of the
vessel configuration (see page 131).
Draught Tables
The draught tables that can be used in the production parameters for a
trailing suction hopper (see page 133). Also the bending table and the
ballast table is incorporated in the draught table.
Events
The available events in PDS2000 (see page 171).
The events can also be edited in the Events page in the Configuration
(see page 82).
Export Configuration
The export configuration files as created in the Export Utility (see page
673).
Hopper Tables
The hopper tables that can be used in the production parameters for a
trailing suction hopper (see page 133).
Import Configuration
The import configuration files as created in the Import Utility (see page
190).
Numerics Pages
These are the numeric pages that are created in the Numerics
Standard view of the Acquisition and Presentation (see page 376).
SketchUP Models
SketchUp 3D models made in SketchUp. These models can be used
as 3D vessel contours.
Vessel Contours
The contours that are drawn in the vessel contour editor (see page
112).
Vessel Setups
The part of the vessel configuration with the geometry and the
equipment setup.
Wireframe (DXF) Drawings
The DXF files that are used as wireframes for the vessels and cranes.
Most of the modules in PDS2000 read the information from the PDS2000
database when the module is started. If modifications are made to the
files in this database, the module have to be closed and started again
before the modifications are visible in the module.
The different file groups of the PDS2000 database will be mentioned
below. The groups which are not discussed in other chapters of the
manual will have a detailed explanation.
236 Explorer
Application Types
The different applications which are possible with PDS2000.
The use of an application type is set in the dongle, so it is not
advisable to setup a project with a different application type then the
type(s) that is/are set in the dongle.
Color Maps
The four different display modes (light conditions) which are available
in the Control Center, the Acquisition and the Presentation (see page
181).
A new coordinate system
that is created through
New File, will be stored in
the pdsusergeobase.
This database shows the file groups with all the settings and data files for
the selected project, and can be opened by selecting the tab Project at
the top of the Explorer. These files are project related and can therefore
only be used in the selected project.
Explorer 237
Figure 11-5
Import from DXF files is an extra option in the file group context menu
of the clipping polygon. A DXF file can be imported with the restriction
that the data in the DXF file contain only one polygon.
Figure 11-6
238 Explorer
Export to DXF file is an extra option in the file context menu of the
clipping polygon. A clipping polygon file can be exported to a DXF file
and will be stored in the project.
It is possible to import multiple DXF files and also to export multiple
clipping polygons in one time. Each DXF file that is imported becomes
a clipping polygon file and each exported clipping polygon file
becomes a DXF file.
Color Tables
The color tables that can be used for the grid models, the 3D views, in
the plotting, etc (see page 244).
Configurations
The different configurations that are created in this project. The active
configuration can also be opened with Acquisition > Configuration from
the menu bar or with
in the toolbar of the Control Center.
Contour Definitions
The contour definitions that can be used in the plotting (see page 249).
CUBE Models
The CUBE models as generated in the Multibeam Area Editing
Standard view (see page 492).
Design Profile Templates
These templates can be used for creating 3D models in the project
(see page 251).
Explorer 239
The KML files contain the X and Y which are converted to WGS84
coordinates. The conversion is from grid coordinates to the WGS84
coordinates and is done according the project coordinate system. The
Z value is the value of the selected data type of the grid model.
OpenGIS Zipped KML Encoding Standard (KMZ) files
The KMZ files contain a compressed GeoTIFF file representing a grid
model. These files can be generated in the Export page of the Grid
Model Editor (see page 575). The KMZ files can be opened in an
OpenGIS system, i.e Google Earth.
Placement Points
The created vessel placement points which can be used as a guidance
in the project (see page 164).
Profile Design Models
The profile design models that can be used to create 3D models in the
project (see page 159). The profile design models can also be used for
the volume computations (see page 664). See for more information
page 252.
Project Files
The project configuration files of the project. The project configuration
can also be opened with Edit > Project Configuration from the menu
bar or with
in the toolbar of the Control Center. See for more
information on page 71.
Restricted Areas
The created restricted areas that can be used as a guidance in the
project (see page 240).
Runlines
The created runlines that can be used as a guidance in the project
(see page 156).
Figure 11-7
Import from DXF or Import from ASCII are extra options in the file
group context menu of the runlines. From the DXF file only the lines
that contain two points (straight lines) can be converted to runlines.
The lines have to be of the linetype Line One runlines file will be
generated with all the lines from the DXF file.
Figure 11-8
240 Explorer
Export to ASCII or Export to DXF are extra options in the file context
menu of the runlines. The runlines will be exported to an ASCII file
containing the runline name and the start and end coordinates of the
runline or to a DXF file.
Screen Layouts
The screen layout files as they are used in the Acquisition, the
Presentation and Editing.
Sound Velocity Profiles
The sound velocity profiles that are created and can be used in a
multibeam or single beam survey project (see page 255).
Stations
The station files with a position for a range range system.
Text (TXT) Files
The TXT files as generated in PDS2000.
Tide Stations
The tide stations that are setup in the project (see page 260).
Tide Values
The monthly files belonging to the tide stations that are setup in Tide
Station.
TIN Models
The TIN models that are created in the project (see page 599).
Track Guidance Routes
The created routes that can be used as a guidance in the project (see
page 156).
Figure 11-9
Import from ASCII, Import from DXF and Import from GPX are extra
options in the file group context menu of the track guidance routes.
From the DXF file only the polylines can be converted to track
guidance routes. For each polyline a separate track guidance route will
be generated.
User Interface Profiles
The UI Profiles which are used for the Control Center, the Acquisition
and the Presentation(s). These profiles contains the settings of the
toolbars used in the three windows. When the user changes one of the
toolbars it will be saved and the next time the new toolbar layout will
come up. Delete in the Explorer the UIP file of a window, if the user
wants to go back to the original (default) toolbar for that window.
User Maps
The user maps are files with user objects that can be created in the
plan views. The different user objects are lines, rectangles, circles,
polygons, text and symbols (see pagexxx).
User Presentation Defaults
There is only one file available, the file EditorView and it contains all
Explorer 241
the defaults for the editors. When in the context menu of a view the
option Save as Default is selected, the file EditorView will be created
or updated.
Vessels
The vessel configurations which are setup in the project. See for more
information the chapter Vessel Configuration on page 105.
Volume Computations
The end area volume computations that are computed during the
project (see page 663).
Waypoints
The created waypoints that can be used as a guidance in the project
(see page 157).
Figure 11-10
242 Explorer
Figure 11-11
Explorer 243
Figure 11-12 Color Table generator with a color table added (between 0 and -5)
to the existing color table
Add the values for the maximum and minimum range, select the number
of colors or the step size and click on
to create a color table. With
a color table can be added to the existing color table.
If the option is selected the generator will use the whole color spectrum
to generates the colors. It will start with the selected color for the
maximum value and will stop with the color of the minimum value. With
the option only the two selected colors will be used to generate the
color table. The color starts with the selected color for the maximum value
and will stop with the color of the minimum value and for the intermediate
values the colors will run into one another.
244 Explorer
Figure 11-13
from 0 to -2
Explorer 245
With this option only the colors of the maximum and minimum
value and the colors that run into one another will be used.
Figure 11-14
from 0 to -2
246 Explorer
Figure 11-15
When the color table is
generated again the edited
values with a star will be
kept in the color table.
Add a new color and a minimum value to the color table. The same
Color Table Entry dialog as above will be opened. The added color
gets a star, the same as above.
Figure 11-16
Explorer 247
Figure 11-17
In this color table only the colors and the text of the labels can be
modified. Click on
if it is needed to reset the colors and text to the
default settings.
Double click on one of the colors and the Color Table Entry dialog will be
opened.
Figure 11-18
For the values between the minimum and maximum value as displayed
on top of the dialog a different color can be selected and another text can
be entered.
248 Explorer
It is not possible to modify the range and the steps for this type of color
table.
Figure 11-19
The dredge differential color table generator has three section; above
underdredge limit, below overdredge limit and between the two limits. For
each section the number of colors and maximum/minimum color can be
set. The edges between the section are defined by the underdredge limit
and overdredge limit.
In the Acquisition the underdredge limit and overdredge limit will be
automatically synchronized with the settings of the design model. So
when the limits for the design model are specified as 1 and -1 then the
limits in the color table will be changed from 0.5 to 1 and from -0.5 to -1.
The color scheme stays the same.
See the 3D View Online Dredge on page 298 for an example of the
dredge differential color table.
Explorer 249
Figure 11-20
If a new contour definition has to be generated, the left side will be empty.
Start then with
or generate a contour definition with the option
or
.
A contour line can be added to the list on the left side. A Contour
Properties window will be opened, where the settings for the line can
be set.
Figure 11-21
Contour Properties
Add a value for the level and select a color for the contour line.
For the line style three options are available; a continuous, a dashed
or dotted line.
Give a line width for the contour line.
If a label with the depth value has to be plotted, check the option
Show labels.
Will delete the selected contour line.
Will edit the selected contour line. The Contour Properties window will
be opened (see above).
A contour definition will be generated based on a minimum level, a
maximum level and an interval. A Generate Contours window will be
opened.
250 Explorer
Figure 11-22
Generate Contours
A color table will be used to generate the contours. Each value from
the color table becomes a contour line with the color from the color
table.
Figure 11-23
Create a new template. Give a name for the new template and add the
offsets and heights.
Rename the selected template.
Explorer 251
Figure 11-24
Click on
to add a new exclude area to the list. Check the option
Polygon or Route and select the right clipping polygon or route with a
tolerance. The clipping polygon or route should exist in the project.
252 Explorer
Figure 11-25
Figure 11-26
The selected template can be edit. The Add to Design Model window
will be opened (see above).
The selected template will be deleted.
Explorer 253
Figure 11-27
254 Explorer
Figure 11-28
Explorer 255
Figure 11-29
When a new sound velocity profile is created the editor will be empty. The
table of the profile can be filled manually or an ASCII file with sound
velocity data can be imported with the option
. Before this button
is opened to select the type of import the user has to select which part of
the data has to be imported; the upcast, the downcast or both.
The units for the four columns are not depending on the settings in the
project configuration (see page 72). The depth is always in meters, the
velocity is in m/s, the temperature is in C and the salinity is in parts per
ton (ppt).
To add a SVP value to the table, fill in a depth value on the empty place
at the bottom of the depth column. When the next column is selected the
depth values will be automatically sorted.
A depth value can be deleted by selecting one of the values in a row and
click on
. The whole row will be removed from the table. With
the Ctrl-key multiple values can be selected and with
multiple
rows can be deleted.
If the data density is too dense, a reduction of the data is possible with
. With too dense data it will take more time to do the
computations for the ray-bending.
The values for the velocity can be modified by adding an offset. This way
an imported profile that is not fully correct, which could be caused by a
wrong SVP probe, can be used. Add a value behind Sound velocity offset.
256 Explorer
Step
Action
Explorer 257
258 Explorer
Step
Action
Click Import.
Step
Action
a. Click
b. Click
to select a predefined import format:
Comma Delimited
ASCII file where the columns are separated with a comma.
The data has to be in the same order as in the table of the
editor.
Space Delimited
As above but with a space as seperator.
Tab Delimited
As above but with a tab as seperator.
SVP 20, Format String
The sound velocities taken with the SVP20 probe and
saved as a *.log file can be imported directly in the editor.
Be aware the comma delimited, space delimited and tab
delimited ASCII files import only the depth and the velocity.
Use the ASCII import wizard if also the temperature and
salinity have to be imported. (See step c.)
c. Alternatively select Use wizard settings to start the ASCII
wizard to import a file. Refer to section Projects common
database on page 232 for a description of the ASCII
import wizard.
Explorer 259
depths are sorted. When the dragging is stopped the table will be
updated. With undo ( ) and redo ( ) the modifications done in the
graph can be undone or redone.
The actual sound velocity profile data can be compared with other sound
velocity profiles. In the Layer Control ( ) a sound velocity profile layer
can be added in where an different sound velocity profile can be selected.
Each added sound velocity profile will be colored automatically and the
file name will be displayed with the same color in the top left corner of the
view.
Figure 11-30
Before the tide station can be used, the tide station has to be setup. Click
on
to setup the information for the tide station.
260 Explorer
Figure 11-31
If more than one tide station will be used the location (Easting and
Northing) has to be entered. The Station ID is only relevant if multiple
tide gauges are used with a tide gauge driver that supports multiple tide
gauges. With the ID, PDS2000 can relate the tide data from the incoming
message to the right tide station.
The gaps between two tide values in the predicted tide data will be
interpolated as long the gap between two tide values in the predicted tide
data is smaller then the specified maximum gap. The value for the
maximum gap has to be entered in seconds.
The maximum extend is the time in seconds that PDS2000 will
extrapolate the tide data after a tide value. This can happen after the last
tide value in the file or when the gap is bigger than the maximum gap.
After the tide station information is set, it will depend on how the tide
station is used in PDS2000 what the next step will be. If in the Acquisition
online tide gauges are used the editor can be closed. If predicted tides will
be used or the tide data will be applied in the Editing, the tide data has to
be imported in the editor (see the option Import Tide Values below).
Select multiple days by
dragging the mouse over
the days.
Explorer 261
Figure 11-32
In the table new entries can be made at the bottom of the table. After
added an entry the tidal data will be order according the date and time.
By double clicking on a cell in the date column the date can be
modified. The cell will change to
and the date can be
change with the arrows on the right or manually. Also by double on the
cell in the time column the time can be modified. The data in the tide
column can be modified when the cell is selected.
The time can be entered as hours (hh), hours minutes (hh:mm) or as
hours minutes seconds (hh:mm:ss). Below is displayed what can be
entered in the cell of the time column and what the time will be in the
column.
Entered value
Displayed time
262 Explorer
00:01:00
12
00:12:00
123
01:23:00
1234
12:34:00
12345
12:34:05
123456
12:34:56
With
at the bottom of the editor a empty row is added to enter
one tide value to the table. By default the actual date is entered, the
time and tide value has to be entered by the user. The date can be
modified as explained above.
With
multiple tide values can be entered with a fixed time
interval. A dialog will be opened where the start time, end time and
time increment can be set.
Figure 11-33
Please read the attention in the dialog, the time used in the tide station
file is always the local time.
Enter the date for which a tide values have to be added. Enter a start
time, end time and an interval (increment). Click on
to accept
the settings. In the table the time is already filled in according the
start/end time and increment from the dialog. Only the tide values have
to be entered manually.
With
one or more rows in the table can be deleted. Use the
Ctrl and Shift key to select more than one row. It is also possible to
drag with the mouse over the rows to select the rows that have to be
deleted.
Explorer 263
Figure 11-34
Please read the attention in the dialog, the time used in the tide station
file is always the local time.
Select the long date/time format and give the order of the data by
selecting the date, time and tide with the separator between the data
fields. For the date and time a format and a separator have to be
selected. If everything is set, click on
to import the ASCII data
and the data will be displayed in the editor. In the group Tide Values
of the Explorer one or more PDS2000 tide files are added with the
name of the station, the year and the month. PDS2000 will create for
each tide station a separate PDS2000 tide file per month.
264 Explorer
Figure 11-35
Enter a start and an end date and when View report is checked, the
report is opened automatically after generation. The width and height
of the images (graphs) can be set in the appropriate windows.
Channel Properties
The Properties window for the active tide station data will be opened.
Properties
The Properties window for the Tide Station editor will be opened.
Figure 11-36
Next to the information that can be available in the file name, two extra
items are available: PDS2000 version and File version. The different file
versions are:
Explorer 265
Before 3.4.0.0
Original
2.0
2.1
3.6.0.0.
In the file context menu (see page 231) is next to the standard options an
extra option, Show log info, available. This option is only available for the
PDS2000 logdata files.
Figure 11-37
Figure 11-38
Next to the same information as given in the tool tip it is possible in the
Log File info dialog to modify the runline name for the selected PDS2000
log data file. In the Plot module a profile or profiles are plotted with the
use of a runline that should be mentioned in the log data file name.
If the PDS2000 log data file is logged with the wrong runline or the user
wants profiles over a different runline then it is now possible to change the
runline in the log data file. Type a new runline name an click on
to apply the new runline name to the log data file.
266 Explorer
Figure 11-39
Export to GeoTIFF is an extra option in the file context menu of the BSB
Charts. The BSB charts cannot be used in PDS2000. The file has to be
exported to a
GeoTIFF|document=Explorer.docx;bookmark=GeoTIFFImages file
before PDS2000 can use the information (see page 269).
Drawing Exchange Format (DXF) Drawings
All different DXF drawings used in the project. The DXF drawing can be
used as background layer or as import file in several editors.
The DXF wireframes that are used in the project are available in the
Projects Common tab (see page 232).
ESRI Shapes (SHP)
ESRI shapes which can be added in the Plan View Navigation
Explorer 267
Figure 11-40 File group context menu of the Tagged Image File Format
(GeoTIFF) Images
Import From BSB Charts is an extra option in the file group context
menu of the Tagged Image File Format (GeoTIFF) Images. A BSB
Chart with the extension KAP can be imported and will be converted to
a GeoTIFF image.
Refer to section GeoTIFF Images Raster Editor for a description of the
Raster Editor.
C-MAP Databases
All the C-map databases; the original C-Map databases from the CMap DVD and databases from the conversion from S-57 to C-Map.
The S-57 converted files can be used as a C-Map database in
PDS2000.
The S-57 converted charts are always with a specific scale. When in
the views the scale is different from the S-57 scale the chart cannot be
displayed. The message No proper chart scale level available will be
displayed in the contour of the charts and the location of the charts is
hatched.
The file group context menu has other options than the standard
context menu:
Figure 11-41
268 Explorer
Figure 11-42
Set as default database With this option the selected database can
be set as default, which means that the selected database will be used
in the C-Map layers in PDS2000. It is also possible with the Chart
Manager from C-Map to set a default database.
Unregister database The selected database will be unregistered
from the available databases in the Chart Manager.
C-MAP Filters
There are three C-Map filters available; for not showing the buoys, the
buoys and beacons and the buoys, beacons and piles in the C-Map
layer (see page 38).
S-57
All the S-57 charts. Charts could be dragged and dropped into the
Charts tab. The files will be automatically placed in the correct folder.
Zipped folders will be unzipped automatically by PDS2000. Refer to
section Installing and using S-57 Charts on page 48 for a full
description of S-57 Charts in PDS2000.
Explorer 269
Figure 11-43
The only way new files can be created is through the option New File in
the Explorer. After a filename is given the user can import a TIFF or a
JPG file to create a GeoTIFF file.
In the Raster Editor are two methods available to create from the
imported file a GeoTIFF file.
Tiepoint/Scale Mode
If one of the corners of the image is known in local grid coordinates
enter the pixel X and Y and the grid coordinates directly in the left
pane.
If not, select one location in the image that is known in local grid
coordinates. Use the zoom in and zoom window functions to get a
clear picture of the location, double click with the mouse on the
location and enter the right grid coordinates for that location.
Figure 11-44
After that enter a scale X and scale Y in m/pixel to define the size of
the image.
Calibration Point Mode
For this mode two points have to be known in the image with local grid
coordinates. Enter the grid coordinates directly in the left pane or
select the option Calibration Point 1, double click with the mouse on
the known location in the image and enter the grid coordinates as
shown above. Repeat this for Calibration Point 2.
270 Explorer
The S-57 converted charts are always with a specific scale. When in the
views the scale is different from the S-57 scale the chart cannot be
displayed. The message No proper chart scale level available will be
displayed in the contour of the charts and the location of the charts is
hatched.
Figure 11-45
Explorer 271
Database name
Enter the name for the C-Map database in which the converted S57 files will be stored. Click on
to start the conversion.
Before the conversion can be started, an eToken dongle from CMap with the permission to convert S-57 files to C-Map should be
installed!!!!
If the S-57 files are encrypted with S-63 protection then the S-63
support option have to be filled before the conversion can be
started.
S-63 support
S-63 is an IHO standard for encrypting and securing electronic
navigational chart (ENC) data. This option is to decrypt encrypted ENC
data, authenticate and verify it in compliance with the procedures
defined in the S-63 protection scheme.
To decrypt the data an hardware ID is needed, this can be
available in the eToken dongle or can be added manually.
Figure 11-46
Figure 11-47
272 Explorer
Figure 11-48
Processing
Information will be displayed for each converted file.
For each file conversion a log file is generated with the conversion
information, warnings and errors. With this button the list with log files
becomes available.
Close the dialog when the conversion is finished.
11.9.2.1 Updates
The original file has
extension 000, while the
updates have 001, 002,
etc.
When updates for the S-57 charts are available then the updates and the
original S-57 file have to be converted at the same time. The update files
need the original file to do the conversion to the C-Map database.
The original file cannot be the old original file that is converted before;
there should be a new one next to the update files. The new original file
knows how much update files are available and need them to make the
new database.
It is possible that the update is only a new original file. Then convert only
the new original file. Keep in mind that when the conversion is started the
folder with the existing database is replaced by a new database. So for an
update of some files all S-57 files have to be converted again to create a
new C-Map database.
Sonar Targets
The sonar target files as created in the Project Configuration (see
page 77) and filled with targets in the Acquisition or Replay. See for
more information the Sonar Targets view (see page 420).
Export to Waypoints and Export to Commas Separated Values (CSV)
are extra options in the file group context menu of the sonar targets.
Tagged Image File Format (GeoTIFF) Images
The GeoTIFF images which are generated when a sonar target is
created.
Explorer 273
274 Explorer
12 Acquisition
12.1 Introduction
The Acquisition in PDS2000 takes care of reading the sensor data, doing
the necessary computations, and data logging. The data and the
computations are visible through a number of views, which can be used to
get information over the processes and to control the survey. Some other
views are designed to guide the vessel.
The Acquisition can be started in a simulation mode and in a realtime
mode. The simulation mode can be used to setup in the office the
different layouts for the survey and the realtime mode is the online mode
where the actual survey can be monitored and logged.
12.2.1 Simulation
When the equipment is not yet connected to the PDS2000 computer the
Acquisition in simulation mode can be used to setup the different layouts
for the survey. The Acquisition in simulation mode can be opened from
the Control Center of PDS2000 with:
12.2.2 Realtime
The Acquisition in the realtime mode can be started when the project and
a vessel configuration is created. The Acquisition in the realtime mode
can be opened from the Control Center of PDS2000 with:
Acquisition 275
12.3.1 Layout
When the Acquisition is started for the first time, it will have only one view,
the Messages System Messages view (see page 347).
In the Displays window the necessary views can be added to the layout.
There are several ways to open this window:
Select View > Displays from the menu bar.
Click on
in the toolbar.
Figure 12-1
Figure 12-2
Click on
and the Add Display dialog will be opened to select a
new view. PDS2000 gives a default name for the view, but the user can
give the view any name he wants. For information about the views see
the chapter Views on page 295.
276 Acquisition
Figure 12-3
In the Displays window the views can be checked on or off. This means
that the checked views will be displayed on the screen. The views that are
checked off are not removed from the layout file. It only means that these
views are not shown on the screen. A view can be removed from the
layout file by using
in the Displays window.
There are also some fast methods to add views to the layout in the
Acquisition.
Select View > Add Display from the menu bar.
Click on
in the toolbar.
Figure 12-4
After all the wanted views are selected and placed on the right place in
the Acquisition window, with or without docking, the layout can be stored.
Use File > Save Layout As from the menu bar to save the new layout.
To open another layout use File > Open Layout from the menu bar and
select one of the created layouts.
With File > Save Layout As Preset the layout can also be saved as a
preset to one of the four layouts.
Acquisition 277
278 Acquisition
Acquisition 279
Figure 12-5
3D Object Manager
280 Acquisition
Figure 12-6
Acquisition 281
Figure 12-7
Figure 12-8
Select the location on the bucket from where the measurement has to
start (for example the left side of the bucket, see above), click on
and in the Measure dialog the information under From is
entered. Move the bucket and select the same or a different location
on the bucket, click on
and in the Measure dialog the
information under To is entered. Now the distance, bearing and
elevation between the two point is calculated.
282 Acquisition
Acquisition 283
Figure 12-9
Select a runline
In a plan view (see page 384) an other runline can be selected by clicking
on an other line. That line should be one of the lines in the runline file that
is selected in the layer Active Runlines. The button
in the plan view
toolbar should be on before it is possible to click on a runline in the plan
view.
284 Acquisition
12.5 Logging
There are three logging methods:
The logging formats and
the logging filenames are
selected in the Logging
page (see page 134).
(off),
(on) or
In the Acquisition the data logging can be switched on and off with:
F4 key on the keyboard.
(Un)check Logging > Enable Data Logging from the menu bar.
Click on
or on
(or
) in the frame indicator in the right
bottom of the Acquisition view to start or stop the data logging.
Switching from log file can be done with:
Select Logging > Switch Log File from the menu bar.
2. Logging of events in an event log file.
(off) or
(on).
(off) or
(on).
(Un)check Logging > Enable Message Logging from the menu bar.
Click on
or on
in the frame indicator in the right bottom of
the Acquisition view to start or stop the message logging.
Acquisition 285
12.6 Shortcuts
In the Acquisition default keyboard shortcuts are defined. The user can
change or add new shortcuts that can be used in the Acquisition. Select
from the toolbar of the Acquisition to get an overview of the existing
defined keyboard shortcuts.
Figure 12-10
As shown in the overview above PDS2000 has shortcuts under the Fkeys on the keyboard (see below) and shortcuts with a combination of
several keys (see page 294).
The Customize window can be opened with Tools > Customize from the
menu bar or with
from the toolbar.
Figure 12-11
286 Acquisition
Select the option User Toolbar if the user wants to display the F-keys as a
part of the toolbar (
).
12.6.1 F-Keys
There are two methods to attach an action to a F-key, through the Button
Properties window and through the Attach to Button option.
The Button Properties window can be open in the Commands page of the
Customize window.
Figure 12-12
Select the category User Buttons and the F-keys will be displayed on the
right side in the page. If the selected F-key has already a shortcut it will
be displayed at the bottom under Description. With
the selected Fkey can be modified in the Button Properties window.
Figure 12-13
Acquisition 287
In the Button Properties window two pages are available, the Default and
the Custom page. In the Default page the actions as defined by PDS2000
are available. These default actions are already assigned to one of the Fkeys. In the Custom page all the actions are available which are added by
the user.
With
an action from the list of available actions can be added to the
list of selected actions. It is possible to select more actions for one F-key.
With
an action can be removed from the list of selected actions.
If more than one action is added to the list of selected actions, the order
of the actions can be modified by using
or
. With
the list
of selected actions can be removed. For the actions in the list of selected
actions the description and the tool tip for that action can be modified by
the user.
If the actions are selected close the Button Properties window with
to accept the new actions for the F-key.
In the Custom page the user can add a new action to the list of available
actions. Select the right action group and click on
. It depends on
the selected action group what the next steps will be.
The actions for the shortcuts are divided in different groups.
Attribute Actions
These actions have direct access to one of the attributes in the
properties of the equipment and the related computations (see page
289).
Handler Actions
These actions are the same as the options in the menu bar or in the
toolbar of the Acquisition. Only available in the Default page and the
user cannot add new handler actions to the list.
Manual Input Actions
These actions are the actions for the manual input devices which are
accessible in the Acquisition (see page 291).
View Attribute Actions
These actions have direct access to one of the attributes in the layer
properties of the views or to one of the attributes in the properties of
the views in the Acquisition (see page 291).
For the attribute actions and the view attribute actions an Attach to
Button button becomes available in the properties windows to attach the
selected attribute directly to one of the F-keys.
288 Acquisition
Figure 12-14
Select the device or the related computation on the left side and the
properties will appear on the right side. Select one of the attributes in the
properties and click on
. The selected attribute action can be
attached to the F-key in the Button Properties window as discussed on
page 287.
In the Acquisition are for the Attach to Button option two ways possible to
open the properties of the equipment, through the Raw Data view and
through the Select Data window.
Figure 12-15
Acquisition 289
In the Raw Data view double click on an item in the tree and the related
properties window will be opened. Select in this properties window the
attribute for the F-key, click on
and the Attach to Button window
will be opened (see below).
The Select Data window can be opened with
in the toolbar or with Edit
> Equipment in the menu bar of the Acquisition.
Figure 12-16
With double clicking on one of the items in the Select Data window the
related properties window will be opened. Select in this properties window
the attribute for the F-key, click on
and the Attach to Button
window will be opened (see below).
Figure 12-17
290 Acquisition
Figure 12-18
Select the attribute of the device data that can be used fore the manual
input. and click on
.
Attach this manual input action to a F-key in the Button Properties window
as discussed on page 287.
Figure 12-19
Click on
and select in the Select Layer window the layer from
which an attribute has to be selected.
Acquisition 291
Figure 12-20
Click on
and select in the Select View Attribute window the
attribute for the F-key.
Figure 12-21
Click on
and attach this view attribute action to a F-key in the
Button Properties window as discussed on page 287.
The quick way to attach a view attribute actions to a F-key is with the
Attach to Button option.
292 Acquisition
Figure 12-22
Add an attribute from the layer properties by opening the Layers window
of the view in the Acquisition through the option Layer Control in the
context menu or with
in the toolbar of the view. Select in this window
the layer from which an attribute has to be selected. Open this layer by
double clicking or by clicking on
. Select in the Properties window
of the selected layer the attribute for the F-key and click on
. The
Attach to Button window will be opened to attach the attribute to the right
F-key (see page 290).
Figure 12-23
Add an attribute from the view properties by opening the properties of the
view in the Acquisition and select the attribute for the F-key. Click on
and the Attach to Button window will be opened to attach the
attribute to the right F-key (see page 290).
Acquisition 293
Figure 12-24
Figure 12-25
and a window to
12.7 Presentations
A Presentation can have the same views as the Acquisition, but it gets the
information from the Acquisition. In other words, a Presentation is
connected to the Acquisition and send requests to the Acquisition to send
data for showing in the views.
That is the reason a Presentation cannot control data logging and further
system settings. The only selections that can be done in a Presentation is
selecting the active runline, selecting the active waypoint, create a new
waypoint and the Man Over Board option.
Multiple presentations can be connected to an Acquisition. Presentations
can run on the same computer as the Acquisition (Local computer) or
over a network on a remote computer. To connect to a remote, see page
23 where the installation and running of a remote presentation is
described.
294 Acquisition
13 Views
13.1 Introduction
To show all the survey information in the Acquisition and in the
Presentation(s) several views can be used. These views together are
called a layout.
There are two ways to create a layout and to add the views to that layout.
See Data Visualization on page 276 to add a view to the layout.
In the Acquisition or Presentation with File > New Layout from the
menu bar.
By changing an existing layout in the Acquisition or Presentation. Save
the changed layout with File > Save Layout As... from the menu bar.
In this chapter all the possible views for the Acquisition and the
Presentation will be discussed in alphabetical order. It will depend on the
application type if a view is available in the Acquisition and in the
Presentation.
At the moment following views are available in the Acquisition and in the
Presentation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Views 295
13.2 3D View
In the Acquisition are two 3D Views available.
3D View Online (see below)
3D View Online Dredge (see page 298)
3D View Online Water Column (see page 300)
The views are nearly identical, the only difference is that the 3D View
Online Dredge has as default a dredge layer instead of a vessel layer and
the 3D View Online water Column has next to the vessel layer 2 extra
layers, water column data and sonar wedge.
In the 3D View the standard 3D view navigation can be used (see page
64).
296 Views
Figure 13-1
Views 297
Figure 13-2
3D View Online Dredge with a cutter dredger and an updated
active grid model
298 Views
Figure 13-3
3D View Online Dredge with a cutter dredger and an updated
active grid model with a dredge differential color table
Views 299
Figure 13-4
column data
300 Views
Figure 13-5
3D View Online Water Column with multibeam data and a sonar
wedge with a school of fish in the center
Click in the Toolbar at the Water Column icon to access the Water
Column properties.
Figure 13-6
A dialog menu will be displayed. In this display the properties could be set
of:
Sonar Wedge.
Views 301
Figure 13-7
to validate changes.
302 Views
Color mode.
Sonar palette.
Transparency.
Views 303
Sector(s).
Small window:
304 Views
Function
Description
Visualization
Tick the checkbox to enable the Water
Column projection layer.
(Notice the layer is an image.)
Sonar palette.
Sector(s).
Views 305
306 Views
Selected Sector
Detections of the selected sector will be
displayed in the water column projection
layer.
Sector All:
Sector Right:
Sector Left:
Views 307
Clip to bottom.
308 Views
Description
Visualization
Tick the checkbox to enable the Sonar
Wedge layer.
Sonar palette.
Views 309
Clip to bottom.
Zoom Functions (
)
Zoom In, Zoom Out and Zoom Extents.
Follow Vessel ( )
If the option is on, the vessel will be displayed in the center of the
view.
If the option is off, the vessel can be anywhere in the view, even
outside the view.
Show Spotlight ( )
If the option is on, the spotlight window will be displayed in the view.
In this window the light source can be moved by moving the yellow dot
in the circle.
310 Views
Measure ( )
A distance can be measured in the view. Click on a point in the view
and keep the left mouse button pressed while drawing the measure
line to the second point. Release the left mouse button and the 3D
distance between the two points is given.
Figure 13-8
Measure window
When the cursor comes close to the arrows of the measure line, the
line is highlighted and the cursor is changes in a hand. Grab the
arrow to move the end of the measure line.
When the cursor is away from the arrows of the measure line, the line
is dimmed and cannot be moved. Click on a new position and keep the
left mouse button pressed to draw a new measure line.
Click on the right mouse button to stop the measure option.
Show Grid Layer ( )
If this option is on, the coordinate axis system is shown in the center
of the view.
Color Table Layer ( )
If the option is on, the color table will be displayed on the right side in
the view. This is only valid when in the Properties a color table is
selected (see page 313).
Save Snapshot ( )
An image of the 3D View will be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Create Sonar Target ( )
Draw a box around an area in the active grid model and the area will
be saved as a sonar target.
The symbol for the sonar target can be defined in the Active Sonar
Targets Layer which will be created when the first sonar target is
selected.
When the sonar Target symbol is drawn in the view a context menu
becomes available for that sonar target. A right mouse click on or in
the symbol gives some extra options. For more information see page
397.
Layer Control ( )
The Layers window of the view will be opened (see below). In this
window only the used layers will be displayed; layers can be added,
modified or removed.
Coverage Settings ( )
If a grid model is added to the view then the available data types of the
grid model with their color table will be displayed in the Coverage
Settings view. Select the data type and its color table for the display of
the grid model.
The transparency of the grid model can be defined, where 0 is no
transparency and 100 complete transparency.
The resolution of the grid model can be set in 5 steps from Very Low to
Very High. This means that when the grid model is zoomed out and
the resolution is Very High more detail of the grid model is shown than
when the resolution is Very Low. The resolution has no impact when
the view is zoomed on the grid model, because then the resolution is
always high.
Views 311
Figure 13-9
Properties ( )
The Properties window of the view will be opened (see below).
312 Views
Figure 13-10
The alarms can also be
displayed in the Acquisition
and Presentation with the
Status Alarms view (see
page 434).
The alarms and timeouts are displayed in the Acquisition with the Alerts
view. In this view all active alarms and active timeouts are displayed with
an indication if they are accepted. There is an option in the view to set the
view as a pop-up view with the option that the view will pop up when an
alarm is created. Click on in the top left side of the view and checked
the option Auto-Show Alerts and the view will act as a pop-up view.
This view will stay on the screen until the user click on
or
. With View > Alerts from the menu bar or by clicking on the alarm
Views 313
Figure 13-11
314 Views
Figure 13-12
In the Compass view the true heading will be displayed with the CMG
(course made good). It is possible through the properties in the context
menu to display the guidance heading (route or waypoint) as an extra
heading (see below).
Views 315
Figure 13-13
In this page the Frequency, Range, Power, Max. ping rate, Gain, Pulse
Length and Pulse Type can be set. It will depend on the RESON SeaBat
7K type (f.i. 7101, 7125) what the values for each setting will be.
The different sonar settings are:
Frequency
The used frequency for the sonar will be displayed. If more
frequencies are possible for the used sonar then the user can select a
different frequency and the sonar will switch from frequency
automatically.
Range
The range setting determines how far the sonar will see.
Power
To increase or decrease the amount of power (acoustic energy)
transmitted into the water.
316 Views
Pulse length
To change the pulse length of the transmitted signal.
For a given power setting, a narrow pulse length provides a higher
resolution at a shorter range. A wider pulse length provides maximum
range with lower resolution image results.
Pulse Type
The pulse type can be CW (Continuous Wave) or FM (Frequency
Modulation). It will depend on the type of RESON SeaBat 7K which
option(s) is/are available.
Figure 13-14
In this page the Absorption, Spreading and the Sound Velocity can be set.
The different physics settings in the Ocean Menu are:
Absorption
The absorption is the amount of loss expected through the ambient
water medium.
Spreading
The spreading is the amount of cylindrical and spherical spreading
loss that is expected through the ambient water medium.
This coefficient value is used in conjunction with the absorption loss
value to compute the TVG curve applied to the returned signal.
Sound velocity
The sound velocity is an external measured speed of sound through
the local water.
Views 317
Figure 13-15
With this data recording page the recording in the related 7K Center can
be started and stopped.
318 Views
Figure 13-16
In this page the sonar steering settings can be set to steer the beams
automatically for optimal route or pipe sonar coverage.
The table below summarizes the functions:
Function
Description
Enable route Steering
Route Steering
Active route
Local route
Steering mode
Views 319
Function
Description
With horizontal steering the swath will be steered. With flex mode the
angle of the center beams of the flex mode will be steered.
Flex
The flex mode has to be selected in the RESON Seabat 7K, before the
flex steering can work.
Steering difference
Steering delay
320 Views
In this page the Range, Gain, Power Level, Pulse Length and
Minimization can be set. When for the first time the Acquisition is opened
the HydroBat will not be pinging.
The different multibeam settings are:
Auto pilot
With the option Auto pilot, default settings depending on the Range
setting will be used. The value for the Power Level and Pulse Length
are controlled by the auto pilot, the other settings can still be set by the
user.
When the auto pilot is off the Power Level is still depending on Range
and the Pulse Length. It is not possible to set the Power Level on
maximum when the Range is small and/or the Pulse Length is on
maximum.
Range
The range setting determines how far the sonar will see.
Gain
The amount of receiver gain applied to the returned sonar signal (in
addition to the calculated gain).
Power Level
To increase or decrease the amount of power (acoustic energy)
transmitted into the water.
Pulse length
To change the pulse length of the transmitted signal.
For a given power setting, a narrow pulse length provides a higher
resolution at a shorter range. A wider pulse length provides maximum
range with lower resolution image results.
Minimization
The minimization will help with the bottom detection and can be set by
the user.
Views 321
,
,
and
First click on
to do an internal calibration of the HydroBat
system. This calibration has nothing to do with the standard multibeam
calibration that has to be done to calibrate the complete system (see
for more information the Multibeam Calibration manual).
With
the HydroBat will ping one time. Click on
to start
the Hydrobat pinging and with
the pinging can be stopped.
Figure 13-18
view
In this page the Absorption and the Sound Velocity can be set.
The different physics settings in the Ocean Menu are:
Absorption
The absorption is the amount of loss expected through the ambient
water medium.
Sound velocity
The sound velocity is an external measured speed of sound through
the local water. See also Override sound velocity.
Override sound velocity
The sound velocity will normally be read from the sound velocity
sensor and therefore cannot be set in this page when the option
Override sound velocity is unchecked. Check this option and the slider
for the Sound Velocity becomes available. The user can now manually
set the sound velocity value and will overrule the data from the sensor.
322 Views
Figure 13-19
Figure 13-20
Take Control
The Sonar Control settings are only available when the communication
with the sonar is established.
Views 323
Figure 13-21
Figure 13-23
Control setting
Logging
Description
Start, Pause and Stop logging of the
Geoswath Raw Data Format (RDF) on
the GeoSwath Deck Unit.
The logging is used in conjunction with
a specified or new created line
number. It will create this line on the
Deck Unit named with this specified or
created number. E.g. 1234.rdf
Broadcasting
324 Views
Control setting
Description
stop thee Broadcast.
Remote PC
Project
Header
Sonar Settings
Filters
Views 325
Control setting
Description
can be set in the Water
column height box below.
Water column auto. This can
be seen as a depth filter
filtering based on the mean
water depth.
Transducers
Pinging
Transmit
Test
Figure 13-24
The Dredge Bars Horizontal view will display attributes from the
computations as a bar with the actual value.
326 Views
A bar can be added to the view by opening the Layer Control in the
context menu of the view. Add an Up=Down Indicator Layer and select as
Source Item an attribute from the one of the computations.
Figure 13-25
The Dredge Bars Vertical view will display attributes from the
computations as a bar with the actual value.
A bar can be added to the view by opening the Layer Control in the
context menu of the view. Add an Up=Down Indicator Layer and select as
Source Item an attribute from the one of the computations.
Figure 13-26
Views 327
328 Views
Figure 13-27
By default are in the time series view the load, the hopper volume, the
TDS and the dredge status selected. In the numerics part of the view are
four pages by default defined; Hopper Sensor, Draught Sensor, Load and
TDS. In the view a context menu is available to setup the view or to add
extra items to the view.
It will depend on the settings in the dongle which pages are available and
which computations will be computed to display the data in the view.
See the application manual for the Trailing Suction Hopper for more
information about this view.
Views 329
Figure 13-28
The Dredge SCADA view
is at the moment special
made for Boraciet.
Figure 13-29
The Dredge Status view is not a standard view which can be added
through the Displays window or the Add Display option in the context
menu of the Acquisition.
Select the option Tools > Equipment Control in the menu bar of the
Acquisition to add the Dredge Status view. Select the view in the Add
Equipment control display(s) window and click on
to add the view
to the Acquisition. After the view is added the window can be closed.
330 Views
From now on the view is available in the Displays window where it has the
same functionality as all other views.
Before the view can be selected in the Add Equipment control display(s)
window, the device driver for the dredge status has to be added to the
equipment list in the Equipment page (see page 113).
The number of buttons that are displayed in the view will depend on the
device driver that is selected. When the dredge status is in Automatic
mode the dredge state selection will be based on the status signals as
received from the vessel. With Idle the Automatic mode can be switched
off and the user can select the different statuses manually.
Figure 13-30
Views 331
With the buttons at the bottom of the view some general settings can be
modified by clicking on one of the buttons and a different setting can be
selected. All these options are also available in one of the settings pages
(see below).
Before this view can be selected, the echo sounder with graphical trace
has to be added to the equipment list in the Equipment page (see page
113).
Figure 13-31
Save Snapshot ( )
A snapshot of all the data from the start to the present time will be
stored in a temporary file, called snapshot.log. Click on
in the
Information dialog and a Print window will be opened where the data
can be selected that has to be printed.
332 Views
Figure 13-32
Use the slider to scroll through the data and set a start and end marker
in the window to select only a part of the data that has to be printed.
Click on
to change to channel 3 & 4 (RT2), and vice versa.
Views 333
Figure 13-33
In this page the port settings for Channel 1 &2 (Port 1) and, if applicable,
for channel 3 & 4 (Port 2) can be set.
Figure 13-34
334 Views
Figure 13-35
In this page the graphics colors for the echo trace can be set.
There are 4 user defined possibilities for the color settings and one
default for the gray scale palette.
Graphic Level 1 is the background color; Graphic Level 8 has the highest
voltage level (strongest echo return) and Graphic Level 2 the lowest.
Click on
palette.
Views 335
Figure 13-36
In the page of the settings nearly all the sounding related commands are
available. The most used commands are also available as buttons at the
bottom of the view.
The most important settings are:
Draft
The draft of the echo sounder transducer can be set. The draft is the
depth of the transducer below the water level. The draft is added to the
measured depth to get the total depth.
If the draft is entered here, the draft should also be entered in the
properties of the echosounder device in the equipment.
Frequency
The frequency of the transducer can be set.
Range
The range of the transducer can be set. The value should be more
then the actual depth below the transducer. The bigger the range the
slower the update rate of the data in the view will be.
336 Views
Figure 13-37
In this page the settings for the paper or screen can be set.
Paper Range
The range (depth) as displayed on the paper or screen can be set.
The size of one pixel of the graphical trace is depending on the paper
range; the range is divided in 200 samples to present the graphical
trace.
At the moment PDS2000 supports only the 200 samples as the
presentation for the graphical trace.
Paper Offset
An offset on the paper of screen can be set. The offset will shift the
paper range down so the echo sounder data can be displayed more in
the middle of the paper.
Views 337
Figure 13-38
In this page all the settings that are not placed in the other pages can be
modified.
Figure 13-39
If a heave sensor is connected to the echo sounder check the option Use
Heave and fill in the port settings for the heave.
338 Views
Figure 13-40
A Helmsman needs to know the position of the vessel in relation with the
current line. This can be a runline, a route or a wayline. With the
Helmsman view the offtrack, different headings and different distances
can be displayed.
At the top of the view an offtrack indicator is displayed with a user
selectable scale. The offtrack limit, as specified in the runlines page of the
Guidance (see page 156), will be shown as triangles.
The offtrack lines in green and red are always displayed at an interval of 5
system units (for example 5 meter or 5 feet). The offtrack limit, if
specified, will be displayed as light blue lines.
On the bottom line of the view from left to right: vessel heading, line
heading, current line, heading to steer to next point of the line and
distance to next point on the line. The next point can be the end point of
the line, if it a straight line, or it can be the next tangent point in a route.
On the right side the bar graph (here in black) gives the distance traveled
form the start of the line. The actual value for the distance traveled is
displayed at the bottom next to the bar graph. At the top next to the bar
graph is displayed the distance to go to the end of the line.
Show Toolbar
If checked, the toolbar will be shown in the view.
Zoom In, Zoom Out ( , )
Zoom in and out in the view.
Save Snapshot ( )
The picture of the view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Views 339
Auto Ranging ( )
If checked or if the button is in, the view will zoom automatically to the
predefined settings as specified in the properties.
Perspective View ( )
If checked or if the button is in, the view is a top view but from behind
the vessel (a kind of 3D).
If not checked or if the button is out, the view will be a top view (2D).
View Reference (
)
The view point can be selected; the vessel or the runline.
Properties ( )
The properties of the view (see below).
340 Views
Figure 13-41
The Icon Image view is a view that will be created for each icon image
that is selected in the Plan View. The view shows the image with as extra
an icon image info table.
In the caption of the Icon Image view is visible in which icon images file
the image is stored. In the example above the icon images file is test and
it is the first image in the file.
The Icon Image view can be opened from the Plan View Survey
Coverage or Plan View Navigation. Double click on an icon and the
image with the info table will be opened.
Only the Description in the icon image info table as displayed below the
view can be modified by the user. The other item are generated when the
icon image is created. Click on the field right of the item Description and
enter some text. After the description is modified click on
to save
the modification to the icon images file. The name of the icon images file
can be set in the Project Configuration (see page 78).
To delete an icon from the Plan View and form the icon images file, open
the context menu of the Icon (right mouse click on the icon) and select the
option Delete Icon Image.
All collected icon images will be saved in the selected icon images file,
which is available in the Icon Images tab of the Explorer (see page 274).
The corresponding BMP and/or JPG files are also stored in the Icon
Images Database of the Explorer.
Views 341
Figure 13-42
The Interval Logging view displays the items as specified in the Interval
Logging page for a cutter dredge application (see page 128).
Before the view can be selected in the Acquisition, the right Laser Scan
device driver has to be added to the equipment list in the Equipment page
(see page 113).
Select the option Tools > Equipment Control in the menu bar of the
Acquisition to add the Output Control view. Select the Laser Scan device
driver in the Add Equipment control display(s) window and click on
to add the view to the Acquisition. After the Laser Scan Control
view is added the window can be closed. From now on the view is
available in the Displays window where it has to same functionality as all
other views.
342 Views
Figure 13-43
Figure 13-44
Laser Scan Control View for the Riegl Z Series laser scan
The values in the control view will be populated with values obtained from
the laser scan.
Select for Frame Motion the option Continuous to get a proper working
with PDS2000.
Views 343
When the Frame Scan Number is zero there will be no frame movement.
If the background of an edit box becomes red it means that the value in
the edit box is out of range.
Figure 13-45
and delays
Manual Input Dredge Status view with all the dredge statuses
When the Manual Input Dredge Status view is opened the first time it
will be empty. In the properties the configuration file for the right vessel
can be selected.
In the view several dredge statuses can be selected during the dredge
operation. Not all the dredge statuses will be displayed at the same time
as it is displayed in the example above. Only the dredge statuses that can
be possible as next status are displayed in the view. If it is necessary,
with the Undo (Ongedaan maken) button it is always possible to go back
several dredge statuses. The OK button is only visible when a trip can be
finished. After the user clicked on the OK button the next trip will be
started.
Next to the dredge statuses several delays (Verlet) types can be switch
on or off. There is no delay when the delay button is white and the delay
is active when the button is red. An active delay can continue over several
dredge statuses and will be finished automatically when the OK button is
selected.
344 Views
All the steps done in the Manual Input Dredge Status view will be
reported in an activity report. This report will be generated at the end of
the dredge instruction and will be logged in the Logdata directory.
Figure 13-46
In the main page the available sonar systems are displayed, normally it
will be only one as displayed above. Double click on the sonar name and
for the RESON HydroBat the Event page will be opened and for the
RESON SeaBat 7K the BITE page will be opened.
Views 345
Figure 13-47
In the Event page the events (messages) from the sonar system will be
displayed.
Figure 13-48
In the BITE page the BITE messages from the RESON SeaBat 7K
system will be displayed.
This page is not available for the RESON HydroBat.
Figure 13-49
In the Messages I/O Port view the incoming and/or outgoing data can
be displayed.
Select in the Properties window (available through the context menu) for
the item I/O Port Selection an I/O port and in the view the incoming
and/or outgoing data on that port will be displayed.
Also the font and the color for the different types of text can be modified in
the properties.
346 Views
Figure 13-50
In most of the views the multibeam filters can be set (see page 364). The
multibeam filters can only be accessed when in the properties the item
Multibeam Source is set to Multibeam xyz computation. The current
presentation of the data is displayed in the title bar of the view, Raw
Device Data for the mode Device Data and XYZ Relative Data for the
mode Multibeam xyz computation.
The depths in the Multibeam xyz computation mode are corrected for the
Z-offset, heave, pitch, roll, sound velocity profile, sea level computation
and off course the multibeam filters. The depths displayed in the view are
then relative to the sea level.
Views 347
Quality
When the Multibeam Source is set on Device Data the multibeam
data is displayed in the color of the quality with four different colors;
quality good, colinearity not good, brightness not good and colinearity
and brightness not good.
Figure 13-51 Multibeam QC- 3D Seafloor view with the raw data in the
display mode Quality
348 Views
Detection
The multibeam data is displayed with the colors of detection method;
amplitude, phase or combined.
Figure 13-53
Detection
Depth Dots
The multibeam data is displayed as dots. It is possible to show the
colors as the colors of the selected color table.
Figure 13-54
Dots
Views 349
Depth Grid
Between each four points of multibeam data a plane is displayed. It is
possible to show the colors as the color of the selected color table.
Figure 13-55
Grid
Figure 13-56
Sample Grid
350 Views
Slope Grid
The data is displayed on the same way as the Depth Grid only the
coloring is based on the slope angle. It is possible to show the colors
as the color of the selected color table, with the values 0.1 = 10, 0.2 =
20, etc.
Figure 13-57
Grid
Figure 13-58
Sample Grid
Views 351
Figure 13-59 Multibeam QC Backscatter Signal Strength Profile view with the
multibeam xyz computation and all four the multipings
352 Views
Quality
When the Multibeam Source is set on Device Data the multibeam
data is displayed in the color of the quality with different colors for the
quality is good, the colinearity is not good, the brightness is not good
and the colinearity and brightness are not good.
Figure 13-60 Multibeam QC Raw Profile view with the raw data in the
color mode Quality
Figure 13-61 Multibeam QC Raw Profile view with the multibeam xyz
computation in the color mode Quality
Views 353
Detection Process
The multibeam data is displayed with the colors of detection method;
amplitude, phase or combined.
Figure 13-62 Multibeam QC Raw Profile view with one ping in the color
mode Detection Process
Sequence number
The RESON SeaBat 7K systems can be setup to output multipings.
This means that there are four different pings after each other and they
can be displayed in four different colors in the view.
When there are no multipings in the multibeam data, the data will be
displayed in black.
Figure 13-63 Multibeam QC Raw Profile view with multipings in the color
mode Sequence number
354 Views
Figure 13-64 Multibeam QC Raw Profile + Total Propagation Errors view with
the color mode Quality and the vertical and horizontal TPEs
Views 355
Figure 13-65 Multibeam QC Total Propagation Errors view with the vertical
and horizontal TPEs and IHO errors
356 Views
Swath
Per beam
Total vertical
reduction error
Range error
Measured heave
error, Induced
heave error
Beam uncertainty
or computed
range error
(sample distance,
pulse length) +
sound velocity
error
Angle error
Pitch error
Beamwidth error
Along beamwidth
coefficient over
depth
Angle measured
error:
Beam across
width error
(Amplitude/Phase)
Figure 13-66
Views 357
standard deviations of the VRU offsets, the GPS offsets, the heading, the
roll and the pitch. The error takes also in account the GPS offsets.
Swath
Per beam
Range error
Heading error
Angle error
Pitch error
Beamwidth error
SV profile error +
Range
measurement
error
Heading sensor
error over beam
range
Angle measured
error + Angle svp
error + Angle
surface speed
error
GPS horizontal
error
Total Latency
error
Vessel speed
error, Heading
error, Pitch error
Range
measurement
error:
Beam uncertainty
or computed
range error
(sample distance,
pulse length)
Angle measured
error: Beam
across width error
(Amplitude/Phase)
Total Tx relative
error
Offset
measurement
error + related
heading, roll, pitch
errors
Figure 13-67
358 Views
Default
Description
0.00 s
0.02 m
Speed-over ground
error
0.00 m/s
GPS error
0.00 m
VRU:
Parameter
Default
Description
0.01
Heading alignment
(C-O)
0.01
Latency error
0.00 s
X,Y,Z offset
measurement
0.02 m
Roll error
0.05
Pitch error
0.05
Pitch stabilization
0.00
Fixed heave
0.01 m
Percentage of heave
variable error
5%
Default
Description
Latency error
0.00 s
0.01
Heading alignment
(C-O)
0.05
Range error
0.05 m
SVP profile
0.25 m/s
0.25 m/s
Water level
0.00 m
Compass:
Parameter
Default
Description
???
Multibeam:
Parameter
Compass
Depth sensor:
Views 359
Parameter
Default
Description
Loading
0.00 m
Dynamic draft
0.00 m
Tide gauge:
Parameter
Default
Description
Tide gauge
0.02 m
0.02 m
Figure 13-68
item Quality
360 Views
A message is displayed
when the data cannot be
shown because it is not
available.
Views 361
362 Views
Views 363
Figure 13-69
Figure 13-70
Figure 13-71
364 Views
Figure 13-72
The filters are active when the filters are displayed in the window and the
checkmark ( ) is set. With
, a not displayed filter can be added to
the list. Uncheck a displayed filter and it will be not active anymore.
Click on
The port and starboard angle from the nadir. See Figure 13-78 on
page 370.
The angle can be defined as the angle to the detection point or as the
Views 365
The port and starboard distance from the nadir. See Figure 13-81 on
page 371.
Slope filter
Reject the beams where the slope angle exceeds the given slope
angle.
The maximum acceptable slope angle. See Figure 13-76 on page 369.
Intersect filter
Reject the beams where the intersection angle is smaller then the
given intersection angle.
The minimum acceptable intersection angle. See Figure 13-76 on
page 369.
Statistic filter
Reject the beams where the statistic computation exceeds the given
settings.
The window size options are 3x3, 5x5 and 7x7 beams. See Figure
13-82 on page 371.
The strictness is from 1 (low) to 9 (high), where a setting of 1 has less
influence then a strictness of 9.
Smart filter
Reject the beams that are outside the filter band created with the
smart filter settings. It only available when an interferometry device is
used.
366 Views
The user can enter a maximum vertical total propagation error. See for
an explanation on page 356.
Amplitude Detection Filter
Reject amplitude detections after a specified number of phase
detections
in a ping. See page 375 for more details.
With the option Swath reject a full sway will be rejected when the
percentage of rejected beams is more than the given percentage.
There are three methods to use sound velocity information in the
multibeam computation; No SV Profile, SV Profile File and SVP Sensor.
The option No SV Profile means no sound velocity profile will be used.
When the option SV Profile File is selected, a sound velocity profile can
be selected. The profile will be used in the multibeam computation.
When the option SVP Sensor is selected, the data from the sound velocity
profile sensor that is selected in the Equipment will be used in the
multibeam computation.
Click New to create or import a new sound velocity profile. The new
profile will get the current date and time as filename (e.g. 20141217155921) It becomes the active sound velocity profile as used by the
multibeam computation.
The sonar requires a speed of sound near the head for beamforming. A
speed of sound sensor near the head is the best solution. The used
surface speed of sound is always known (setting in multibeam system).
When in PDS2000 sound velocity profile data is used, the option Use
surface speed of sound as firtst entry in the table becomes available.
Figure 13-73
Views 367
Figure 13-74 Two profiles with a different surface speed of sound but remainder
of the profile remains the same.
With the now available surface speed of sound as first entry in the table
the refraction correction will be done correctly.
Do not select the Use surface speed of sound as first entry of table
option when the total profile changes with the surface speed of sound.
In other words it depends on the environment if the option needs to be
enables or not.
Range
Filters
Nadir
Depth
Filters
Figure 13-75
For the depth filter the points outside the depth limits will be rejected.
For the range filter the points outside the range limits will be rejected.
368 Views
Intersection
Angle
Nadir
Slope Angle
Figure 13-76
The intersection filter checks the enclosed angle of 3 data points against
the given minimum angle. A smaller angle then the intersection angle will
reject the middle data point of the 3 data points.
The slope filter checks the angle between two adjacent points and the
plane against the given maximum angle. When the angle is larger than
the maximum angle, the beam will be rejected.
2 3 S 5 6 7
Figure 13-77
The flying object filter will reject each beam that is too high in relation to
the sea bottom.
In the figure above the size is 4 and the border is 3. This means 4 beams
from point A to the center (point C) gives point S and then 3 beams to
both sides. This will give 7 beams to check against point A. The flying
object filter will reject point A if one of the 7 beams is further away in X
direction from the center beam (point C) then point A. In this example is
point 1 and 2 further away than point A, so point A will be rejected.
Views 369
Port
Angle
Figure 13-78
Nadir
Starboard
Angle
The angle nadir filter checks if each beam is inside the port or starboard
angle and the nadir. Points outside the angle will be rejected.
Incidence Angle
Figure 13-79
Incidence angle
Angle to
detection point
Figure 13-80
The incidence angle is the angle between the nadir and the received
angle at the transducer head. This is the angle on which the data is
received in the transducer head.
The angle to detection point is the angle between the nadir and the line
between the detection point on the seafloor and the transducer head. The
detection point is the point where the beam with ray-bending will hit the
seafloor.
370 Views
Nadir
Starboard
Distance
Port
Distance
Figure 13-81
The distance nadir filter checks if each beam is inside the port or
starboard distance and the nadir. Points further away from the nadir then
the limits will be rejected.
depth
Figure 13-82
A statistic filter checks each data point in a multibeam sway against its
surrounding data points.
Each point is surrounded by a window of points, depending on the
selection either 3x3, 5x5 or 7x7 points. The window will give 9, 25 or 49
observed depths. These values will be sorted and from the sorted points
the median value is taken. This median is used as a robust estimate for
the point under test. In case the point under test differs more than 3%
from the median value than the point is rejected immediately.
The point that passed the first test will be tested further. From the sorted
depths two quartile values are taken, at .25 and .75 from the number of
observations. The difference of those two points will be used in an
integration routine together with 9 previous (approved) differences. (10%
of each depth is taken). The result of this routine is a variation value.
The difference of the found median value and the absolute value of the
point under test are compared with a value set by the variation value and
a user definable Strictness. A strictness of 1 takes the variation value
Views 371
times 10, and a strictness of 9 takes the variation value times 2. This
means that a strictness of 1 (low) has less influence than a strictness of 9
(high).
A point will be rejected when the difference between median value and
the absolute value is more than (variation value x [11 strictness]).
372 Views
Figure 13-83
The most common settings for the smart filter parameters are:
Reliable sector - between 8 and 40 from the nadir.
Used to calculate the mean depth.
Depth to width ratio between 4 and 6.
Maximum used width based on the mean depth.
Number of averaging clips between 10 and 50.
For specific types of seabed different values are advised.
For a sandy-flat area between 10 and 15.
For a seabed with a slope between 15 and 35.
For a seabed with ripples between 20 and 50.
Nadir area use the default value of 10%.
Defines the unreliable nadir area.
Vertical tolerance inside reliable between 0.03 and 0.10m.
Vertical tolerance outside reliable between 0.05 and 0.15m.
Figure 13-84
The item Reliable sector is the reliable angle sector which is the sector
between the nadir and the reliable angle. All beams inside this sector
should be used to determine the average sway depth (ASD). In the
example above with a reliable angle sector of 30 ASD is about
10.25m.
With the ASD and the item depth to width ratio the maximum sway
width (MSW) can be calculated. In the example the maximum sway
width will be depth to width ratio x ASD = 4 x 10.25 = 41m.
Starting from the nadir beam, all the beams farther away than the
MSW should be excluded from the computation. So all the beams in
the Outer area will be excluded.
The area that is left (this is the MSW) can be divided in three other
areas; Nadir area, Reliable area and Unreliable area. A very common
distribution for the MSW is 10% for the Nadir area, 60% for the
Reliable area and 30% for the Unreliable area. The Nadir area is a
parameter of the smart filter. At the moment the distribution as
mentioned above will be used in the smart filter.
Views 373
Figure 13-85
374 Views
Figure 13-86
depths
Around the average depths a vertical tolerance can be defined. For the
Reliable area the tolerance can be set with the item Vertical tolerance
inside reliable and for the Unreliable area with the item Vertical tolerance
outside reliable.
With these two tolerances an offset from the average depths can be set.
The area between the two tolerances (above and below the average
depth) is the valid area. All the beams outside the tolerance areas will be
rejected by the smart filter.
Figure 13-87
Figure 13-88
Views 375
Figure 13-89
Figure 13-90
A Numerics Standard view can be filled with the information that the
user wants to see. Each view can have several pages and each page can
376 Views
have a descriptive name. On the left hand side of the view are the names
of the pages and on the right hand side the items belonging to the
selected page. Both parts have their own context menu.
The first time this view is opened the user has to create a Numerics view.
Select the option New from the context menu of the left pane and create a
name for the view. In the new view, pages can be added by using the
option Add New Page from the context menu.
Each page can have several items on the right hand side. Select in the
context menu of the right pane the option Edit Page to add items to this
page. It will open a separate window where the page configuration can be
defined.
The page can also be filled by using the Drag & Drop method from the
Raw Data view (see page 418).
Figure 13-91
above
and
In the Numerics Standard view the font, the background, etc. can be
changed by selecting the option Properties in the context menu. Double
Views 377
clicking on an item in the page gives also the possibility to change the
color and the font of that item.
Action
378 Views
Views 379
Figure 13-92
Set the alarm and select which actions should be taken when an alarm
occurs. The action Blink Numerics item will start flickering the field of the
item in the Numerics view.
When the alarm is set it can be disabled again with the context menu
option Edit alarm. The same dialog as above will open and just uncheck
the option Enable Alarm.
After the alarm is disabled it can be removed with the context menu
option Remove alarm. It is also possible to leave the alarm linked to the
item and with Edit alarm the alarm can be edited and enabled again.
When this alarm is set and the same item is set in the Numerics Layer of
the plan view, the item in the plan view will start flickering when the alarm
occurs.
Figure 13-93
The Numerics Sonar Targets view is a view with a table where the
information about the created sonar targets is displayed.
The displayed sonar targets are stored in the sonar targets file as created
or selected in the Project Configuration (see page 77). The sonar targets
file name is displayed in the caption of the view; Sonar Targets 4 in the
example above.
Double click on a sonar target will open the Sonar Targets View with the
GeoTIFF image and the information which can be modified (see page
420).
The user can select in the Properties which columns have to be displayed
in the view. The Properties can be opened through the context menu.
In the context menu next to the Properties two other options are available;
delete the selected sonar target or delete all sonar targets. The delete
implement that the sonar target(s) will be deleted in the views and from
the active sonar targets file. Along with the sonar target(s) the
corresponding GeoTIFF file(s) of the image of the sonar target(s) will be
deleted.
For more information about the sonar targets see the Sonar Targets view
on page 420.
380 Views
Figure 13-94
Before one of these views can be selected, the output control has to be
added to the equipment list in the Equipment page (see page 113).
Select the option Tools > Equipment Control in the menu bar of the
Acquisition to add the Output Control view. Select the right output control
in the Add Equipment control display(s) window and click on
to
add the view to the Acquisition. After the Output Control view is added the
window can be closed. From now on the view is available in the Displays
window where it has to same functionality as all other views.
Every change of one of the slides is send directly to the control unit of the
multibeam system. Use
for the range and depth filter to send the
filter settings to the control unit. With
all the
settings will be send to the control unit to setup the multibeam system.
A context menu and a properties window are not available for an Output
Control view.
Views 381
Figure 13-95
the pipe.
382 Views
Pipe Lay Pipe Angle view with the J-Lay tower, the criteria and
Figure 13-96 Pipe Lay Pipe Position view with both multibeam systems and
the detected pipe for the Pipe Position Monitor application
The view for the application Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay is completely
different. The view shows a plan view of the vessel with the J-Lay tower,
the overbend and sagbend criteria, the used beams and the computed
pipe.
Figure 13-97 Pipe Lay Pipe Position view with both multibeam systems and
the detected pipe for the Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay application
Views 383
Figure 13-98 Pipe Lay Sonar Video view with the pipe position for the Pipe
Position Monitor application
The view will be different for both application types, for the application
Pipe Position Monitor the display is from a RESON SeaBat 6012, while
for the application Pipe Position Monitor J-Lay the display is from the
RESON SeaBat 8125.
384 Views
Figure 13-99
In this view a plan view with 3 panes (bars) are displayed. The panes can
be used to display values that are useful for the survey, like the distance
to a waypoint or the offtrack.
Use the context menu in the panes to open the Layer Control to select in
the Up Down Indicator Layer the Source Item that have to be displayed.
In the pane any value available can be monitored. Default only one item is
displayed. It is possible to have more than one item displayed, just add for
each extra item an extra up-down indicator layer to the pane.
Views 385
In this view the grid model, the 3D model, the dredge polygon, the
disposal area and the historical tracks from the dredge instruction will be
displayed.
The Plan View Dredge Instruction shows the location where the dredge
activity has to take place. In this view nothing has to be added, because
all the relevant information is already loaded and displayed through the
dredge instruction.
When the vessel received a dredge instruction it can be selected in the
guidance as the new dredge instruction. Select from the menu bar in the
Acquisition the option Guidance > Guidance Settings or select
from
the toolbar to open the Guidance window to select a new dredge
instruction.
A quick way to select a new dredge instruction is with the option
Guidance > Select Dredge Instruction from the menu bar or with
from the toolbar in the Acquisition. A preview window will be opened
where all the available dredge instructions can be viewed and the new
dredge instruction can be selected.
386 Views
Figure 13-101 Plan View Dynamic Positioning with a bulls eye and a waypoint
Views 387
Figure 13-102 Plan View General Dredge Operation with an updated grid
model
The Plan View General Dredge Operation can be used for general
dredge operations where the active grid model will be updated
immediately after the bottom is dredged.
This view can be used in the Acquisition in conjunction with one or two
Profile Realtime Design views (see page 409) to get a complete
monitoring of the dredge activity.
388 Views
The Plan View Navigation can be used for the navigation of the vessel.
For the background several options like C-Map or a DXF chart can be
used. All the options to navigate the vessel, like the different guidance
options, are available in this plan view. It is possible to show survey data
(e.g. Grid model) in this plan view as a background layer.
With
the view can be used as a Plan View Dynamic Positioning (see
page 387).
The information from the C-Map background is available with the two
extra buttons (
and
). This option makes this plan view very useful
for a buoy laying vessel.
In the Plan View Navigation an image layer of the wedge of a forward
looking sonar can be added. In this wedge sonar targets can be selected.
Views 389
The Plan View - Production can be used to show the production with a
production grid model. This production grid model is the grid model that is
selected in the Logging page of the vessel configuration with the file
format Production Format (see page 134).
The display and the options of the view are similar to the Plan View
Survey Coverage (see below).
390 Views
Figure 13-105 Plan View Survey Coverage with an active grid model
The Plan View Survey Coverage can be used to show the update of the
grid model. This grid model is the grid model that is selected in the
Logging page of the vessel configuration for the file format PDS2000 Grid
Model (see page 134).
In this plan view the coverage of the survey can be shown, not only for a
multibeam survey but also for a single beam survey.
The Plan View Survey Coverage can be used to display the sonar
targets as created in this view or in the Sonar Views.
Views 391
The Plan View Survey Coverage and Edit shows the update of the Grid
model as also in the Plan View Survey Coverage, but now also this grid
model could be edited at the same time.
The left pane of the view contains the created grid model name as
selected in logging page, an Info, an Edit and a Filter tab.
Figure 13-107 Top of left pane with grid model name and tabs
The tabs contain the same functionality as applicable in the Grid Model
Editor. Refer to the Grid Model Editor on page 559 for a description of
these tabs.
392 Views
Zoom Functions ( , , , )
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents. The zoom
window option works only when Follow Vessel is off. The Zoom
Extents is only available in the Plan View Dredge Instruction.
Pan ( )
Toggles the pan option on/off. When pan is active, keep the left mouse
button in and move the mouse to pan through the data.
The pan option can also be switched off by clicking on the right mouse
button.
Redraw
Redraw the plan view.
Measure ( )
To measure a distance and a bearing in the plan view. On the first use
the measure starts at the vessels tracking point. With a mouse click
the start of the measurement can be at any location in the view. The
measure window shows start and end coordinates as well as distance
and bearing between the two locations.
Click on
to change the presentation from grid to latitude and
longitude coordinates in a selectable format. Select in the project
configuration for local or satellite coordinates (see page 76).
Click on
to change the distance unit.
A right mouse click stops the measure option.
Measure Relative Vessel ( )
To measure a distance and a bearing from the vessel to a selected
point in the plan view.
Click on
to change the distance unit.
A right mouse click stops the measure option.
Measure Line Relative
To measure a distance to the start and end of a line and the offtrack to
that line. Draw a line by selecting a start and end point of the line with
the left mouse button. The measure window shows start and end
coordinates and the coordinates of the current location of the cursor.
Views 393
Also the distance from the cursor to the start and end point of the line
and the offtrack is given.
Click on
to change the presentation from grid to latitude and
longitude coordinates in a selectable format. Select in the project
configuration for local or satellite coordinates (see page 76).
Click on
or
to change the distance unit.
A right mouse click stops the measure option.
Save Snapshot
The picture of the plan view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Save as GeoTiff
The picture of the plan view will be saved as a GeoTIFF file (georeferenced TIFF file). The file is compressed with the compression
LZW.
Create Sonar Target ( )
Draw a box around an area in the active grid model and the area will
be saved as a sonar target.
The symbol for the sonar target can be defined in the Active Sonar
Targets Layer which will be created when the first sonar target is
selected.
When the sonar Target symbol is drawn in the view a context menu
becomes available for that sonar target. A right mouse click on or in
the symbol gives some extra options. For more information see page
397.
This option is available in the Plan View Survey Coverage and Plan
View Navigation. In the Plan View Survey Coverage the active grid
model is used to detect the sonar targets.
Delete All Sonar Targets
All the sonar targets from the active sonar targets file will be deleted in
the views and from the active sonar targets file. Along with the sonar
targets the corresponding GeoTIFF files of the images of the sonar
targets will be deleted.
This option is only available in the Plan View Survey Coverage and
Plan View Navigation.
This option is only
available in the Plan View
Survey Coverage and
Plan View Navigation.
394 Views
Add Runline
Draw a new runline in the plan view and the new runline becomes the
active runline.
Add Symbol
A C-Map object can be added to the plan view, only possible when a
C-Map layer is added in the Layer Control.
Select an object and its attributes from the list. Select with the crossshaped cursor the location for the new object.
A right mouse click stops the select location option.
Find Symbol
Search for a C-Map object in the plan view.
Views 395
Figure 13-112 C-MAP Object Information window with a radio calling point
396 Views
Interactive Selection ( )
If checked, it is possible to select items in the plan view with the
mouse.
Edit Mode ( )
If checked, it is possible to modify the routes and clipping polygons
and to add or edit the user maps objects. See below for a detailed
explanation of the user maps and the edit option.
Undo ( )
Will reverse the last action done in the edit mode.
Redo ( )
Only active after an Undo and will reverse the last undo action of the
edit mode.
Show Color Table ( )
Toggles the display of the color table on the right side in the view
on/off.
Grid Model Color Mode (
)
In the view different grid model color modes can be displayed:
if available the Z Average, Hit Count, Z Standard Deviation, Z
Minimum (Deepest), Z Maximum (Highest) and Time.
Coverage Settings ( )
The settings of the grid model in the plan view (see page 403).
Edit Alarm ( )
For the items as set in the Numerics Layer of the Plan View an alarm
can be defined or edit. First a Numerics Layer has to be created with
the item selected.
This option will open a dialog in which an alarm can be added, edited
or removed.
See for information about the alarms also the Numerics view on page
379.
Layer Control ( )
The overview of the used background and foreground layers in the
plan view (see page 400).
Properties ( )
The properties of the plan view with some extra settings for the Follow
Vessel option (see page 401).
Classification
The type of sonar target can be defined, select one of the options that
are available. If no option match with the sonar target enter a
classification in the table of the Sonar Targets view (see page 420).
Symbol
Select a symbol that will be placed on the location of the sonar target.
Delete Sonar Target
The selected sonar target will be deleted from the sonar target file and
the GeoTIFF file of the sonar target will also be deleted.
Edit Sonar Target
The Sonar Targets view of the selected sonar target will pop up and
Views 397
the information can be edited in the table of the Sonar Targets view
(see page 420).
Set New Sonar Target Position
Select this option when the location of the sonar target in the Sonar
View has to be modified.
Draw a new box around the right location of the sonar target and the
symbol will be moved to the new location. The new location will be
updated in the table of the Sonar Targets view.
Figure 13-113 Context menu in the Edit Mode and without user maps
Click on the active route or clipping polygon and the route or clipping
polygon can be edited. The way of editing the route or clipping polygon
will be identical as editing an object of the user maps (see below).
Before the user maps object can be viewed, added and/or edited, the
User Map Layer has to be added in the Layers window. If a file with user
maps objects exists, it can be selected in the properties of the layer.
Figure 13-114 Context menu in the Edit Mode with the user maps options
After one of the user maps options is selected the cursor will change in a
cross. With the cross the location(s) for the user map object can be set in
the view. The way the different objects can be drawn will be explained
below.
Line
Click with the left mouse button on the locations for the line. Click on
the right mouse button to accept and finish the drawing of the line.
Rectangle
A rectangle can be drawn by selecting two opposite corners of the
rectangle with the left mouse button.
Polygon
Click with the left mouse button on the locations for the polygon. Click
on the right mouse button to accept and finish the drawing of the
polygon.
Circle
The circle can be drawn by selecting the center point and a point on
the circle with the left mouse button.
Text
Click with the left mouse button on the location where the text has to
be located and enter in the Name dialog the text.
Symbol
Click with the left mouse button on the location where the symbol has
to be placed and select a symbol from the list in the Select User
Symbol window.
398 Views
For each selected symbol a symbol text can be entered. For the
symbol Obstruction also the least depth can be entered. The text will
be displayed next to the symbol and the least depth in the symbol.
Figure 13-115 Select a symbol from the list in the Select User Symbol
window
The user maps objects, the routes or the clipping polygons can be edited
by double clicking with the left mouse button on the object. The object
becomes active and the cursor change in .
The active object can be moved by selecting the object and keep the left
mouse button down. Move the object to the new location and release the
left mouse button.
This option is not possible
for the user maps objects
Text and Symbol.
The other option with the edit mode is modifying the objects by moving
one or more points. Select one of the points of the object and keep the left
mouse button down. Move the point to the new location and release the
left mouse button. After editing the object the context menu gives the
following options.
Redo
Only available after an Undo and this option will reverse the last undo
action.
Undo
Reverse the last action.
Insert Point
Insert on the cursor location a point to the object. This is only available
for the Line and Polygon and also for the active route and the active
clipping polygon.
Delete Point
The point that is selected with the cursor will be deleted from the
object. This is only available for the Line and Polygon and also for the
active route and the active clipping polygon.
Views 399
Delete
The edit mode for the active user map object will be closed and the
active user map object will be deleted. This is not possible for the
active route and the active clipping polygon.
Save
The edit mode for the active object will be closed and the changes
made in the object will be saved.
Cancel
The edit mode for the active object will be closed and the changes
made in the object will not be saved.
With
new layers from the Add Layer window can be added to the
list of used layers in the plan view.
The layers are the items that are shown in the plan view, e.g. Run Lines,
Grid Model and Color Table. In the window the layers can be switched on
or off by checking or unchecking the specific entry of the layer.
Click on
or double click on the selected entry to open the
properties of the selected entry. The properties are different for each layer
and the attributes in the properties can be for example file selections, line
styles, colors and computation selection.
The layer order can be changed by using
and
. The layer on top of
the layer window will be drawn first. The layers lower in the list will be
drawn on top of the layers that are above it in the list. If some information
in a layer is important and have to be shown in the plan view, move that
layer as far down as possible with the down arrow.
The entries in the Active layers cannot be removed by the user. Most of
these active layers are linked to the selection in the Logging page (see
page 134) or the Guidance page (see page 155) of the vessel
configuration. For example, the layer Active Route Layer gives the route
that is selected in the Guidance page.
400 Views
In the Properties window the Follow Vessel mode and the Off-Center
option can be defined. These options are not available in the Plan View
Dynamic Positioning view.
It is also possible to enter manually a fixed skew value for the orientation
of the plan view.
Below the relevant items in the properties will be explained.
Follow Vessel
The Follow Vessel mode can be switched on and off.
Position Source
Any position source or position computation can be selected as
tracking point on the vessel for the follow vessel mode.
Follow Mode
The follow mode is by default Relative Motion; the vessel is always
displayed in the center of the view. Another option for the follow
mode is True Motion; the vessel will not stay in the center but the
view will update when the vessel is nearly leaving the view.
Vessel Radius
Vessel radius is the minimum distance from the vessel to the
edge of the view.
When the vessel comes in the minimum distance from the edge
of the view and with the follow mode on True Motion, the view
will be updated and the vessel will be placed in the center of the
Views 401
view.
The vessel radius can also be used in combination with the offcenter (see below).
Off-Center
When the follow mode is set on Relative Motion the vessel can be
displayed out of the center of the view.
This option can be used when the user wants to look forwards for
more than a half view. Enter a negative percentage and the vessel
will be moved backwards in the view (the data moves with the
vessel).
When for instance the user wants to see more multibeam data
behind the vessel enter then a positive percentage.
With the vessel radius the distance from the edge of the view can
be defined. With a vessel radius of 0 and -100% or +100% for the
off-center the vessel is placed on the edge of the view.
Figure 13-119 Plan View with an off-center of -100% (left) and +100%
(right) with a vessel radius of 10
Orientation Mode
One of the three modes can be selected; North Up, Heading Up or
Fixed Skew (see page 396).
Fixed Skew value
A skew for the plan view can be entered. This is only valid when
the orientation mode is set on Fixed Skew.
Next to the view properties, all the attributes of the selected layers of the
Layer Control are available.
402 Views
Function
Description
Grid model
Sun illumination
Views 403
404 Views
Views 405
When the position height is unstable next to the height of the position
source, a depth sensor or the height of the grid model can be used.
For the position of the tool a position can be entered or selected with the
mouse or as a waypoint.
Before the view can be selected, a manual input device for the positioning
system (XY) has to be added to the equipment list in the Equipment page
(see page 113).
Select in Acquisition the option Tools > Equipment Control in the menu
bar to add the Positioning System XY Manual Input view. Select the
right device control in the Add Equipment control display(s) window and
click on
to add the view to the Acquisition. After the view is added
the window can be closed. From now on the view is available in the
Displays window where it has to same functionality as all other views.
Position Selection
Next to the manual input a standard positioning system should be
selected in the Equipment list. The standard positioning system should
be the primary positioning system and the manual input the secondary.
Positioning system Geogs(1)
As positioning system the primary positioning system will be used.
Average Positioning system
To make the unstable primary position more stable an average of
the primary position can be used.
Enter the period over which the average has to be calculated.
Manual Position
As positioning system the manual position as given in this view will
be used. Before the manual input can be used, a manual position
has to be set.
Height Selection
Next to the height from the position system a depth sensor on the tool
or the height of the grid model can be used.
Manual Position Reference Point
There are two different ways to set a manual position.
The first method is that for the Easting, Northing and Height manually
a value can be entered.
For the second method the position selection should be set on
Positioning system Geogs(1). Click on the button Set from Position to
set the actual primary position as manual position.
Manual Position From Tool
Select which position on the tool should be used by selecting one of
the location on the tool.
The position can be set entered manually with the button Enter
Position or can be selected.
Click on
and select in a Plan View or 3D View a location
that will be used as the position of the tool.
406 Views
Click on
and select one of the existing waypoints as the
new position of the tool.
Click on
and the position will be saved as a waypoint.
Figure 13-122 Profile Grid Model view derived from the Draw Profile option in
the plan view
The Profile Grid Model view shows a profile over a route or runline. The
profile can be from a grid model or from a design model.
The profile view is not an active view; the data will not be updated.
Therefore it will only be used in combination with the option Draw Profile
from the context menu of the Plan View Survey Coverage, the Plan
View Production or the Plan View General Dredge Operation (see
page 395).
If the view is closed it will disappear from the list in the Displays window.
If the Profile Grid Model view is added to the Acquisition through the
Displays window or with Add Display in the context menu, it will stay
empty.
Views 407
Figure 13-123 Profile Multibeam view with an active grid model profile
The Profile Multibeam view can be used to compare the multibeam data
or the scanning profiler data online with a (active) 3D design model profile
or a (active) grid model profile.
When this profile view is created the active grid model profile layer and
active design model profile layer are already set. The active grid model
profile can be compared with the (active) design model profile if the
quality of the multibeam data is not so good.
408 Views
The depths rejected by the filters will have a different color in the profile
view. The rejected depths are always logged in the raw data files, but not
in the cleaned data files.
Figure 13-126 Profile Realtime Design view with a right view of a suction
hopper and the design difference as up/down indicator
The Profile Realtime Design view can be used for a dredge application
to show the vessel with a drag head and the grid model and/or design
model. The view can be from the left, the right, the front or the back side
of the vessel.
The profile view can also be used in the (rope) excavator application to
show the (rope) excavator with grab or bucket and the grid model and/or
design model.
Views 409
Figure 13-127 Profile Realtime Design view with a left and a back view for an
excavator
Figure 13-128 Profile Realtime Design 3 Bars view with a design model
The Profile Realtime Design 3 Bars view can be used if more than one
indicator is needed in the profile view. In this example the left and right
indicator display the height of the left and right side of the structure above
the design model. The bottom indicator displays the difference between
the two other indicators.
If in a Profile Realtime Design view two indicators are necessary, for
instance the absolute depth and the height above the design model, then
this profile view can be used. The bottom indicator can be slide away from
the view if necessary.
410 Views
Figure 13-129 Profile Realtime Design Antwerpen with an active grid model, an
active design model, dredge limits and level contacts
The Profile Realtime Design Antwerpen view is almost identical with the
Profile Realtime Design view (see page 409). The toolbar, the
properties and the layers in this profile view are identical; the only
difference is that this profile view has an option to show the two level
contacts from the engine control.
The level contacts and the
tab Control are special
made and therefore only
available for one specific
client.
By default the level contacts will be displayed with a default color. In the
properties of the Active Design Model Profile Layer the level contacts can
be switched on/off and the color can be changed. The values for the level
contacts have to be set in the Tools Settings. Select Tools > Tools
Settings in the menu bar of the Acquisition and add in the tab Control
values for the level contact 1 and 2.
In the up/down indicator pane any value available can be monitored.
Default only one item is displayed. It is possible to have more than one
item displayed, just add for each extra item an extra up-down indicator
layer to the up/down indicator pane.
Views 411
Figure 13-130 Profile Realtime Design Cutter view with a grid model and a
design model
412 Views
Figure 13-131 Profile Realtime Design Pipe view with a top and side view of
the trailing suction hopper with a drag head
The Profile Realtime Design Pipe view can be used for a trailing suction
hopper application to show the vessel with a drag head in a top and in a
side view.
The top view is a basic plan view where the relation between the heading
of the drag head and the suction hopper can be displayed.
The side view is identical with the Profile Realtime Design view (see
page 409).
The Profile Realtime Design Pipe Vertical view can be used for a trailing
suction hopper application to show the vessel with a drag head in a top
and in a side view and is identical with the Profile Realtime Design Pipe
view (see above).
The top view is a basic plan view where the relation between the heading
of the drag head and the suction hopper can be displayed.
The side view is identical with the Profile Realtime Design view (see
page 409).
Views 413
Figure 13-133 Profile Sound Velocity view of the active sound velocity profile
The Profile Sound Velocity view is not an active view; it will not update
the sound velocity profile in the Acquisition. It shows the selected sound
velocity profile that is used to correct the depth readings of the multibeam.
Zoom Functions ( , , , )
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents. The zoom
window will only work when Follow Vessel is off.
Horizontal Zoom In, Horizontal Zoom Out ( ,
)
The display can be zoomed in and out only in the horizontal direction
of the view. These two options are only available when in the
properties of the profile view the option Scale Mode is set on Fixed
Vertically or on Scale Freely (see page 416).
Vertical Zoom In, Vertical Zoom Out ( ,
)
The display can be zoomed in and out only in the vertical direction of
the view. These two options are only available when in the properties
of the profile view the option Scale Mode is set on Fixed Horizontally
or on Scale Freely (see page 416).
414 Views
Pan ( )
Toggles the pan option on/off. When pan is active, keep the left mouse
button in and move the mouse to pan through the data.
The pan option can also be switched off by clicking on the right mouse
button.
Redraw
Redraw the profile view.
Vertical Auto Ranging ( )
If checked, a vertical zoom extents is active. This option is only
available in the Realtime Design Profile views.
Follow vessel ( )
If checked, the attach point selected in the properties of the Realtime
Design Profile views will always be located in the center of the view.
In the Profile Multibeam view the nadir depth will be displayed in the
center of the view if the option is checked.
Save Snapshot ( )
The picture of the Profile Multibeam view can be saved as a JPG or
BMP file.
Print Snapshot ( )
The picture of the Profile Multibeam view can be printed.
Singlebeam Filter Settings
This option is only available in the Profile Projected Runline view
when a single beam data channel is selected.
Through this option three filter settings can be set (see Figure 13-125
on page 409).
Layer Control ( )
The overview of the used background and foreground layers in the
profile view. New layers can be added to the used list.
Properties ( )
The properties of the profile view. In most Properties windows the
Scale Mode can be set (see below).
Views 415
The three of the four Profile Realtime Design views have the same
Properties window, only the Profile Realtime Design Cutter view has
less items. Some of the items are available for the Profile Grid Model
view, Profile Multibeam view and Profile Sound Velocity view. The
Profile Projected Runline view has different properties to define the
graph display.
The most relevant items in the Properties window of the profile views will
be explained below.
Follow Vessel
If Enabled, the selected attach point will always be in the center of the
view. For the Profile Multibeam view the center beam will be in the
center.
Position Source
Any position source or position computation can be selected as
tracking point on the vessel for the follow vessel mode.
For the Profile Realtime Design view, the Profile Realtime Design 3
Bars view and the Profile Realtime Design Antwerpen view the
position source has to be Drag-head Absolute Position.
For the Profile Realtime Design Cutter view the position source has
to be Cutter Absolute Position Computation.
For the Profile Multibeam view the position source has to be
Multibeam xyz computation.
Attach To
The position source can be attached to the Dredge Point or the Sensor
Reference Point.
Vertical Auto Ranging
If Enabled, a vertical zoom extents will be active.
Scale Mode
The display of the profile view has different scaling options; Fixed
Aspect Ratio, Fixed Vertically, Fixed Horizontally and Scale Freely.
416 Views
Aspect Ratio
The ratio between the horizontal and vertical scale used in the profile
view.
Next to the view properties, all the attributes of the selected layers of the
Layer Control are available.
The Raw Data view has in the left pane the tree with all the sensors, the
computations and the data sources. In the right pane the data of the
selected item as it is received from the sensor or is calculated in the
computation.
If there are no problems with the data all the items have the sign . If the
connection is lost the last data will still be shown in the view, but the sign
before Data Buffer will change to . Also the Alerts view (see page 313)
will appear on the screen with the alarm messages. If the received data is
corrupted the sign for the Data Buffer becomes and for all the items
the sign becomes . If some of the data items have the sign then that
data is not received or cannot be calculated.
Only possible when the
logging is switched off
Double click on a data item on the left hand side will open the Properties
window of that data item. This Properties window is the same window as
in the Equipment page or Computation page of the vessel configuration.
13.22.1 Statistics
When right clicked at the right hand side a context menu with the options
Properties and Statistics will appear.
Views 417
With the option Statistics the user can collect data over a self-defined
period and it will calculate the mean, the standard deviation, the minimum
and the maximum of that collected data.
Click
With
Click
to create a pdf report representing the results. The pdf report
could be viewed in the PDS Explorers Report menu.
Figure 13-139 Data item GPS mode can be moved with the Drag & Drop
method
418 Views
Figure 13-141 Reference Point window to enter or select the reference position
There will be three ways to enter a reference point for the Scatterplot
view:
1. The reference point can be entered manually in the fields Ref. x, Ref.
y and Ref. z.
2. Click on
3. With a double click on one of the available waypoints in the list the
selected waypoint becomes the reference point.
With Tolerance 1 and Tolerance 2 tolerance circles will be drawn around
the reference point. They become visible as red circles in the bulls eye
display.
Views 419
The left side of the Scatterplot view has the following fields:
Reference x, y, z
The entered reference position.
Current x, y, z
The currently computed position.
Diff x, y
The difference between the reference position and the current position.
Average x, y, z
The average of the computed position.
DRMS
The Distance Root Mean Square value of the computed position. This
value is the radius of a circle into which the position will fall with a 68%
probability. Only useful for a stationary position.
Average diff x, y, z
The average of the difference between the reference position and the
computed position.
Sample no.
The number of current samples. If the option Limit is checked and a
value is entered the number of samples will stop when this limit value
is reached.
Bulls eye
If checked, the bulls eye circle will be displayed in the right top
display. The interval and number of circles depends on the scale in the
display.
Tolerance circles
If checked, the tolerance circles in red will be displayed in the right top
display.
DRMS circle
If checked, the DRMS circle as a dashed line will be displayed in the
right top display.
One item in the properties ( ) can be useful for the display of the
computed position, Track Buffer Length. The computed positions are
shown as crosses in the display and the option Track Buffer Length sets
the number of crosses that will be displayed in both displays.
420 Views
Figure 13-142 Three Sonar Targets views with sonar targets created in three
different views
Views 421
All collected sonar targets will be saved in the selected sonar targets file,
which is available in the Sonar Targets Database of the Explorer (see
page 273). The corresponding GeoTIFF files are also stored in the Sonar
Targets Database of the Explorer.
At the moment a set of sonar targets consist of one or more sonar targets
files and all the corresponding GeoTIFF files. Dont forget to copy the
GeoTIFF files when a copy is made of the sonar targets. When no
GeoTIFF files are available no picture is available anymore.
Zoom Functions ( , , , )
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents.
Pan ( )
Toggles the pan option on/off. When pan is active, keep the left mouse
button in and move the mouse to pan through the data.
The pan option can also be switched off by clicking on the right mouse
button.
Measure ( )
To measure a distance and a bearing in the plan view. On the first use
the measure starts at the vessels tracking point. With a mouse click
the start of the measurement can be at any location in the view. The
measure window shows start and end coordinates as well as distance
and bearing between the two locations.
Click on
to change the presentation from grid to latitude and
longitude coordinates in a selectable format. Select in the project
configuration for local or satellite coordinates (see page 76).
Click on
to change the distance unit.
A right mouse click stops the measure option.
Measure Object LWH (
)
This option is to measure the Length, Width and Height of the object in
the sonar target GeoTIFF as displayed in the view.
By default the option is set on Disabled, so no measurement can be
done. Select one of the options Length, Width or Height and the cursor
will change to a cross. With a mouse click the measurement can be
started, click again to stop the measurement. The measured distance
is entered in the table below the view. With a right mouse click the
options can be stopped (or use the option Disabled).
Layer Control ( )
The raster layer and grid layer are available in the Layer Control.
Properties ( )
In the Properties the background color can be modified.
422 Views
Views 423
Figure 13-145 Sonar Wedge view with depth gate and beam selected
When zoomed in, press the left mouse button when the cursor is inside
the view and the cursor will change to a small hand. With the left mouse
button still pressed it is possible to pan through the view.
When a second Sonar Wedge view is opened and the user zooms in on
the data then the outlines of this view will be visible in the first Sonar
Wedge view.
424 Views
Figure 13-146 Zoomed in the first Sonar - Wedge view indicated by a outline in
the other Sonar Wedge view
Sonar settings are displayed in the top left side of the view when the Info
Layer is enabled and the Sonar Configuration device is added in the
equipment list.
Views 425
Figure 13-147 In the top left the info layer is showed containing the sonar
settings.
426 Views
When the option is selected the start is always at the sonar location
and the cursor will change into four small arrows. Move the mouse
around in the view and the distance will be displayed next to the
cursor. Click on a point in the wedge and that will become the new
start point for the measurement.
Click on the option again or use the right mouse button the stop this
option.
Save Snapshot ( )
The display of the Sonar Bathy view can be saved as a JPG or a
BMP file.
Stop Update ( )
Toggles between updating and stop updating the data in the view.
Layer Control ( )
This will open the Layer Control of the Sonar -Wedge view. Layers can
be added or removed. In the Layer Control are six layers available.
The wedge layer displays the wedge.
The Info Layer displays the sonar configuration parameters on the left
side in the view.
In the Sonar Data Layer the color for the bottom detection can be
defined.
With the gates layer the user can set the gates by dragging the
associated lines up or down. (e.g. Depth, range and adaptive)
The grid layer displays the grid.
With the action layer the user can control by the sliders the steering
and coverage angle(s). (Depends of the sonar type)
With Edit layer properties can be set.
Properties ( )
This will open the Properties of the Sonar - Wedge view.
The most important options in the Properties are:
Sonar Palette; the palette for the sonar data in the view can be
modified.
Grid Color; the color for the vertical axis and the line around the edge
of the wedge can be modified.
Views 427
Figure 13-148 Sonar - Wedge view with Obstacle Avoidance Forward Looking
data
This view is only available when in the Equipment list the right sonar
image device is selected.
The view is available for the forward looking RESON SeaBat 7K systems
and BlueView systems.
Press the left mouse button when the cursor is inside the view and the
cursor will change to a small hand. When the left mouse button is still
pressed it is possible to pan through the view.
When a second Sonar - Wedge view is opened and the user zooms in on
the data then the outlines of this view will be visible in the first Sonar Wedge view.
428 Views
Sonar settings are displayed in the top left side of the view when the Info
Layer is enabled and the Sonar Configuration device is added in the
equipment list.
Views 429
Beam Selection ( )
Click in the wedge and the beam number with the beam coverage will
be displayed.
Measure ( )
A distance can be measured in the view.
When the option is selected the start is always at the sonar location
and the cursor will change into four small arrows. Move the mouse
around in the view and the distance will be displayed next to the
cursor. Click on a point in the wedge and that will become the new
start point for the measurement.
Click on the option again or use the right mouse button the stop this
option.
Save Snapshot ( )
The display of the Sonar Wedge view can be saved as a JPG or a
BMP file.
Stop Update ( )
Toggles between updating and stop updating the data in the view.
Layer Control ( )
This will open the Layer Control of the Sonar -Wedge view. Layers can
be added or removed. Four layers are available.
With the Action layer the user can set the sonar steering and coverage
angles (depending of the used sonar) by dragging the siders.
The Grid layer displays the grid.
The Info layer displays the sonar configuration at the top left of the
view.
The Wedge layer displays the sonar wedge.
With Edit layer properties can be set.
Properties ( )
This will open the Properties of the Sonar Wedge view.
Figure 13-150 Sonar Sidescan view with for color palette rust and gray
For information about the toolbar and context menu of the Sonar
Sidescan view see Sonar Toolbar and Context Menu on page 431.
430 Views
Figure 13-151 Sonar Snippets view with for color palette rust and gray
For information about the toolbar and context menu of the Sonar
Snippets view see below Sonar Toolbar and Context Menu.
Views 431
Invert Colors ( )
Toggles between a black background (Out) and a white background
(In).
Slant Range Correction ( )
Toggles between Slant Range Correction Off (Out) and On (In) (see
page 433).
Save Snapshot ( )
Save the display as a JPG or BMP file.
Create Sonar Target ( )
Draw a box around an area in the view that has to be saved as a sonar
target.
The symbol for the sonar target can be defined in the Active Sonar
Targets Layer which will be created when the first sonar target is
selected.
When the sonar Target symbol is drawn in the view a context menu
becomes available for that sonar target. With a right mouse click on or
in the symbol gives some extra options. See Sonar Targets Options in
Sonar Views on page 433.
See the Sonar Targets view on page 420 for more information.
Delete All Sonar Targets
All the sonar targets from the active sonar targets file will be deleted in
the views and from the active sonar targets file. Along with the sonar
targets the corresponding GeoTIFF files of the images of the sonar
targets will be deleted.
Layer Control ( )
The overview of the foreground layers in the sonar views. By default
the Active Sonar Targets Layer is present and at the moment the only
layer(s) that can be added are the Sonar Targets Layer.
Properties ( )
The above-mentioned settings in the view.
The color palette can be set to rust or gray.
13.25.4.1 TVG
The Time Varied Gain applies a variable gain to the sonar data. The TVG
can make the color difference smaller or bigger between the data near to
the sonar and the data further away.
For example: If
is out, increasing the TVG makes the data further
away lighter than the data near the sonar.
432 Views
Classification
The type of sonar target can be defined, select one of the options that
are available. If no option match with the sonar target enter a
classification in the table of the Sonar Targets view (see page 420).
Delete Sonar Target
The selected sonar target will be deleted from the sonar target file and
the GeoTIFF file of the sonar target will also be deleted.
Edit Sonar Target
The Sonar Targets view of the selected sonar target will pop up and
the information can be edited in the table of the Sonar Targets view
(see page 420).
Set New Sonar Target Position
Select this option when the location of the sonar target in the Sonar
View has to be modified.
Draw a new box around the right location of the sonar target and the
symbol will be moved to the new location. The new location will be
updated in the table of the Sonar Targets view.
Views 433
The Status Alarms view will show the alarms which are set by the user
in the configuration (see page 83) and/or in the vessel configuration (see
page 149). All the conditions in the alarm files are shown and the alarm
can be on ( / ), off ( ) or disabled ( ).
The Alarms dialog can be opened with Edit > Alarms from the menu bar
or with
from the toolbar. Through this way only the existing alarms in
the configuration can be changed or new ones can be added to the
configuration.
With a double click on one of the alarms in the view directly the
Conditions window can be opened. Through this way also the alarms in
the vessel configuration are accessible.
The Alarms dialog and the Condition window are identical with the dialog
and window as explained in the Vessel Alarms on page 149.
434 Views
Figure 13-154 Status Equipment view with no data for some equipment
The Status Equipment view displays the status of all sensors or outputs
created in the Equipment page of the vessel configuration. The view will
be red when at least one of the sensors has no data input ( or ). The
reason will be displayed in the Input or Output column, Timeout or ---
(no data). If all the sensors are working properly, all the data is received in
the system and have in front of the sensors, the view will be green.
This is only when the user has set the status color in the context menu.
The Status Logging view displays the information about the data logging
such as file name, file size and logging rate. The view will be green when
logging is on and it will be red when the logging is switch off. If logging is
on and conditions are checked in the Logging page (see page 146) the
view becomes yellow if the condition is not true and the logging will be
suspended. This is only when the user has set the status color in the
context menu.
If the view is green it is obvious which file is logged and in which directory.
Views 435
A Tide Manual Input view is not a standard view which can be added
through the Displays window or the Add Display option in the context
menu of the Acquisition. With this view a manual input for the tidal
information can be given.
Before the view can be selected, a manual input device for the tide gauge
has to be added to the equipment list in the Equipment page (see page
113).
Select in Acquisition the option Tools > Equipment Control in the menu
bar to add the Tide Manual Input view. Select the right device control in
the Add Equipment control display(s) window and click on
to add
the view to the Acquisition. After the view is added the window can be
closed. From now on the view is available in the Displays window where it
has to same functionality as all other views.
If the option Force Manual Tide is checked the manual input becomes the
primary data group in the data sources for the tide computation (see page
120). A modified tide value in the view will be directly used in the tide
computation.
A context menu and a properties window are not available for the Tide
Manual Input view.
436 Views
On the right side in the view the actual value of the data channel is
displayed with below the value the text 1/div. This means that the
distance between two horizontal lines in the graph is 1 unit of the data
item. On the bottom the total length of the X-axis is displayed in hours,
minutes and seconds.
When this view is selected for the first time in the Acquisition by default
one channel is already added to the view.
If more than one graph is displayed as in the example above, the graph
where the text is underlined is the active graph. To make a graph active
just click with the mouse in that graph.
Views 437
Properties ( )
Settings for the view can be modified. It is also possible to show all the
data in one graph (overlayed) or in separate graphs (stacked).
438 Views
A data channel can also be added by using the Drag & Drop method
from the Raw Data view( see page 418).
14 Replay
14.1 Introduction
Data recorded in the PDS2000 logging format can be replayed in this
module. By changing the vessel configuration before a replay is started,
the data will be recomputed with the new vessel configuration settings.
Replayed data can be recorded again into new log data files. To
distinguish replayed log data from the original files, the replayed file gets
an R and the date and time of the replay in the file name.
The three options to start the replay from the Control Center are:
Click on
in the toolbar.
Figure 141
If the Replayer is open it is also possible to change the file set selection.
For a project with more vessels, instead of a file set bar, a vessel bar can
be displayed. Select from the menu bar the option View > Vessel Bar to
get the vessel bar in the toolbar. With the option View > File Set Bar the
above displayed toolbar comes back.
When a logdata files are loaded in the Replayer, automatically the layout
used in the first logdata file will be opened.
Replay 439
Figure 142
Stop ( )
Stops the current replay and clears the client area.
One Step ( )
Each time this button is pressed the next record is read.
Play ( )
Starts the replay.
Pause ( )
Temporarily stops the current replay.
Slow/Fast Play (
)
Slow play is the normal survey speed and when the bar moved to the
right the replay speed goes faster and faster.
Figure 143
When no external layout is used, the option Keep same layout when
playing files should be checked to use only one layout during the replay of
the log data files.
440 Replay
Replay 441
15 Processing
15.1 Introduction
The goal of a survey usually is a presentation of the results in the form of
tables, charts and files. Before the presentation is finalized the data is
normally checked for anomalies, outliers and measuring faults.
Sometimes it is also necessary to correct a survey for influences that
could not be measured in real time, e.g. tides.
Processing 443
444 Processing
16 Editing
16.1 Introduction
In the Editing, the user can check the data for outliers, anomalies and
measuring faults. If necessary, it is possible to remove or correct the data.
Each view is an editor and each editor takes its data from the PDS2000
data files. The data can be edited in the data files (see page 467 for an
explanation) and the corrected data is directly available after editing.
In contrast with other programs, a separate processed data file or
database is not been made. Indexing and caching takes place in the
PDS2000 data files. That means that the file size increases significantly.
The advantage lies primarily in having both original (raw) and processed
data in one file. This allows the user to revert to original data when
needed.
Please note that only the data from PDS2000 data files can be edited with
these editors.
Select Processing > Editing from the menu bar or click on
toolbar of the Control Center to start the Editing.
in the
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Editing 445
The editors can be used simultaneously and multiple times. Each editor
uses the same data file, but only one editor is active, that is the one
currently used for editing. The cursor location in each editor is the location
of the record in the current data file. This is called Synchronous
Processing. Stepping through the file will update all open editors.
Open all the editors necessary to give a good view on the data. For
example, a multibeam editor together with a position editor tells the
physical location of the multibeam soundings.
It is not necessary to save the data files after editing because all the data
files are saved automatically.
Figure 16-1
446 Editing
Figure 16-2
Click on
to make a new file set and click on
to modify an
existing file set. In both cases, the same dialog with all available
PDS2000 log data files (in the current project) will be opened.
Figure 16-3
Editing 447
Figure 16-4
Figure 16-5
Editing
Click on
and the Add Display window will be opened to select a
new editor (or viewer). PDS2000 gives a default name for the editor, but
the user can give the editor any name he wants.
Figure 16-6
In the Displays window, the editors can be checked on or off. This means
that only the checked editors will be displayed on the screen. The editors
that are checked off are not removed; it only means that these editors are
not shown on the screen. An editor can be removed by using
in
the Displays window.
448 Editing
There are also fast methods to add editors to the layout in the Editing.
Select View > Add Display from the menu bar and the Add Display
window will be opened (see above).
Select Add Display in the context menu.
Figure 16-7
After all the wanted editors are selected and moved to the right location in
the Editing the layout can be stored. Select File > Save Layout As from
the menu bar to save the new layout. To open another layout use File >
Open Layout from the menu bar and select one of the created layouts.
16.2.4.1 Jumping
Click on
or
and the red indicator (red stripe) in the data bar will
jump to the previous or next file in the file set. A click in the data bar
brings the red indicator to a specific record in the file. Cursors or locators
in all open editors will go exactly to that point.
Editing 449
In most of the editors, one or more points can be selected. It will depend
on the edit mode what the action will be. The pressed button tells which
edit mode is active and the default edit mode is Normal
.
After a point or points are selected in the Normal mode, a right mouse
click on the selection gives a context menu with edit options. The edit
options are Delete, Undelete, Interpolate, Smooth, Move, Edit and
Info. When the Delete mode
is active, selecting one or more points
in the editor will directly remove the point(s). Select the deleted point(s) in
the Undelete mode
and the deleted point(s) will come back in the
editor.
450 Editing
Figure 16-8
The Find window can also
be opened with Edit > Find
from the menu bar.
Find window
Editing 451
Figure 16-9
Click on
if the modifications have to be applied to all the files of
the file set. Click on
if the modifications have to be applied only
to the active logdata file. The recache can take some time and the
progress is shown in the Progress dialog.
Figure 16-10
The last Vessel in the list is the active vessel configuration. Select a
different vessel configuration and click on
to accept. Then this
452 Editing
selected vessel configuration becomes the last one in the list. The data of
the logdata file will be recached to match the setting as in the selected
vessel configuration.
When the Vessel Selection Dialog is opened there is a possibility that the
active vessel configuration is invalid.
Figure 16-11
The method to fix this problem is to use the Repair File option (see page
465).
Figure 16-12 Dialog when active vessel configuration is different from the other
vessel configurations
In the list above it is possible that not all files from the File Set are
displayed. The settings of the missing files are identical with the leading
(active) vessel configuration.
Click on
to apply the settings of the leading (active) vessel
configuration to the listed vessel configurations in the File Set.
Editing 453
When all the vessel are equal the following message will appear.
Figure 16-13
Figure 16-14
454 Editing
Figure 16-15
Apply tide
Select a computation mode and one or more tide stations. For multiple
tide stations along a route select at Selected route the appropriate route.
Click on
and the tide data is applied to the logdata files in the file
set. If there are problems with applying the tide data, a data error window
appears. This window shows the cause of the data error(s) and to which
data files no tide data is applied.
There are several methods to check if the tide data is applied correctly to
the file set.
Check the height method used in the reference point computation.
Select Tools > Edit Vessel from the editing menu. On the tab
Equipment select under the positioning system the computation
Reference Point Computation and click on
to open this
computation. The item Height Source should show Tide and the item
Tidal Data Source should point to the tide computation.
Open in the Time-Based Editing Standard view (see page 546) from
Reduced depths the data channels Depth ref. Sealevel and
Depth ref. Chart Datum. Overlay the two graphs in the editor and the
difference between the two data channels should be the applied tide.
It is also possible to view the applied tide data in the editor. Select
from the Reference Point Computation the data channel Applied
Tide.
Open the Tide Station Viewer (see page 544). This viewer shows the
applied tide data for the selected file set.
Editing 455
Figure 16-16
Select in the data source selection page the data source that have to be
switched. Below the list of data sources one of the two options have to be
selected.
Select option Set for whole file when the data source switch has to be
applied to the active logdata file. Click on
to select the order in the
data groups.
Figure 16-17
Select in the data groups page the order of the computations. Click on
to apply the first computation from the list as the primary data
source to the active logdata file.
When in the data source selection page the option Advanced editing is
selected, it is possible for the user to set his own data source switches on
456 Editing
any location in the active logdata file. When this option is selected and the
user clicks on
the data elements page will be opened.
Figure 16-18
Select in the data elements page the item that has to be opened in the
Data Source Switching view. In the view a channel is created for each
data group of the selected data source. Next to these channels, also an
extra channel is created with the data source switch. At the bottom of the
view the primary data is displayed; this is the data from the primary parts
of the different data groups. See for an explanation of the Data Source
Switching view on page 481.
Editing 457
Figure 16-19
458 Editing
Figure 16-20
Report Style
At the moment only one report style for the statistics report is
available.
Show Report
If this option is checked then the report will be displayed in the
PDS2000 Reporter.
POSPAC data;
TerraPOS data;
Import POSPac
Editing 459
It is very important that the SBET files contain UTC time (not GPS time).
The SBET and SMRMSG files have to be named in a special way. The
file name must contain the start date of the data in the following format:
sbet_YYYYMMDDxxx.out
smrmsg_YYYMMDDxxx.out
Select Tools > Import Post-Processed GPS Data > POSPac from the
menu bar to open the Open dialog to select the SBET file(s) for the
import. This dialog will only open when PDS2000 logdata files are loaded
in the Editing. It is possible to select one or more SBET files in the dialog.
After the POSPac file(s) are opened, the user has to select which POS
MV data will be used to replace the device data in the PDS2000 logdata
files.
Figure 16-21
The position is the latitude, longitude and the altitude of the position
device. The attitude is the roll, pitch and heave of the VRU device. The
heading is the heading of the compass device.
Before the import is started, PDS2000 will check if for the position in the
PDS2000 logdata files a POS MV device driver is used. If this is not the
case, the import will not be done.
All dependent computations will be recached when necessary. It is always
possible to revert to the original data by using the Revert to Original
option ( ).
Import TerraPos
It is very important that the PTS files contain UTC time (not GPS time).
Select Tools > Import Post-Processed GPS Data > TerraPos from the
menu bar to open the Open dialog to select the PTS file(s) for the import.
This dialog will only open when PDS2000 logdata files are loaded in the
Editing. It is possible to select one or more PTS files in the dialog.
All dependent computations will be recached when necessary. It is always
possible to revert to the original data by using the Revert to Original
option ( ).
460 Editing
Date
Time
Latitude degrees
Longitude degrees
Latitude minutes
Latitude seconds
Longitude minutes
Longitude seconds
Editing 461
Figure 16-22
Quick Calibration
To see the impact of the changes in the dialog it is advisable to have the
Multibeam Area Editing Standard view open.
Device
Select for which multibeam or laser scan device the calibration values
have to be displayed.
Click on this button to get for the roll, pitch and yaw the original values,
as stored in the files.
Roll, Pitch and Yaw
Move the sliders to change the values. The changes will be directly
visible in the Multibeam Area Editing Standard view.
With these changes, the user can see if the actual values are valid for
the data set.
Calibration setting
When the values for the roll, pitch and yaw are set then it is possible to
apply these to a data set; to log data files, to a file set or to the vessel
configuration. For each option, a dialog will be opened to select the
right data set or vessel configuration.
Click on
462 Editing
Figure 16-23
If more than one multibeam is available in the view select the multibeam
for which the TPE results has to be computed.
For the error model two options are available:
CUBE implementation; horizontal error without the fore-aft
beamwidth error
CHS implementation; horizontal error with the fore-aft beamwidth
error
Check the option Use Multibeam Uncertainty when the real-time
uncertainty values have to be used. Uncheck the option when the range
error has to be computed.
Click on
to generate the TPE text file. The text file is saved
in the project folder and can be found as text (TXT) file in the Explorer. In
the filename is composed from the ping number, date and time of
generation.
The text file can be opened with the special created Excel sheet that is
available in the PDS2000 folder and is called TPEview.xslm. When the
sheet is opened click on the button, select the right text file and the table
and graph are automatically generated. Below an example of a table and
graph.
Figure 16-24
Editing 463
Figure 16-25
Figure 16-26
Click on
464 Editing
Tide data (only necessary if the tide data was already applied in the
editing).
Coordinate system.
It is only necessary if there is a relation between the data in the active
editor and one of the data items mentioned above. For example, if the tide
data is modified and the echo sounder data is loaded in the active view
then recaching is necessary to update the data in the active view.
Select the menu option Tools > Force Recache to recache the data file
and a dialog will be opened.
Figure 16-27
Click on
Figure 16-28
Click on
file or click on
file set. Click on
data.
Editing 465
Due to a side effect of the check of the data block table the repair
always reverts to the first vessel configuration in the file.
All the re-caches are recached and will be removed from the file.
Select the option Tools > Repair File(s) from the menu bar and a dialog
will be opened where can be chosen to repair all the logdata files in the
file set or only the selected logdata file.
Figure 16-29
Click on
file or click on
file set. Click on
Figure 16-30
Figure 16-31
466 Editing
only (
). Amplitude and phase points are points which are
detected by the multibeam by amplitude or by phase.
To switch quickly between functions during editing, the following functions
do also have a keyboard shortcut:
Keyboard shortcut
Function
N
Normal
Delete
Undelete
points only.(
Set the Editing in delete mode ( ) and the deleting of the multibeam
data can be started. The cursor in the multibeam editor will change to
.
There are several ways to delete one or more points in the multibeam
editor.
Delete one point by clicking on the beam with the cursor in
combination with the Ctrl key.
Delete more points by placing the cursor on the right location. Keep
the left mouse button pressed in combination with the Ctrl key and
move the cursor over the multibeam data. It looks like erasing the
Editing 467
data.
A different method to delete more points is by drawing a polygon
around the points that have to be deleted. All the data that is visible in
the polygon will be deleted. The polygon can be a polygon with line
segments or it can be a free drawn polygon.
With the undelete mode ( ) the data that should not be deleted can
be undeleted. Draw a polygon around the area where the points have
to be undeleted.
A different option is to use the undo ( ) when too much or the wrong
points are deleted.
In the 3D View the standard 3D view navigation can be used (see page
64).
468 Editing
The data points from the inactive layers, which are related to the data of
the active layer, are automatically updated when the data points are
edited.
It possible to have several 3D Box views opened at the same time. The
drawn box from the active 3D Box view will be the only drawn box that is
visible in the Multibeam Area Editing Standard view (see page 517).
Figure 16-32
The editing of the multibeam data in the 3D Box view is similar as the
editing in the other 3D views (see page 467).
The data in the 3D Box view will not be updated when in the Multibeam
Area Editing Standard view a new grid model or CUBE model is added.
When the 3D Box view is closed in the Editing it will not be available
anymore as a view in the Displays window (see page 448).
Editing 469
Zoom Functions ( , ,
)
Zoom In, Zoom Out and Auto Zoom Extents.
The Auto Zoom Extents is a switch on/off button. When on and the
profile is changed/moved in the Multibeam Area Editing all the data will
be shown in the 3D Box view. Will automatically switch off when zoom
in or zoom out (also with mouse wheel) is used.
Vertical Zoom Functions ( , )
Increase and Decrease the scale factor of the Z-axis of the data.
Pan ( )
Keep the left mouse button pressed to pan through the data in the
view.
Show Spotlight ( )
Toggles the spotlight window on/off. It is also possible to toggle with
the key o.
With the spotlight window, the light intension and light source location
in the viewer can be modified.
Click on the yellow ball and move it around in the circle. How further
away from the center how less intense the light will be. The location of
the yellow ball in the circle gives the location of the light source.
Measure ( )
A distance can be measured in the view. Click on a point in the view
and keep the left mouse button pressed while drawing the measure
line to the second point. Release the left mouse button and the 3D
distance between the two points is given.
When the cursor comes close to the arrows of the measure line, the
line is highlighted and the cursor is changes in a hand. Grab the
arrow to move the end of the measure line.
When the cursor is away from the arrows of the measure line, the line
is dimmed and cannot be moved. Click on a new position and keep the
left mouse button pressed to draw a new measure line.
Click on the right mouse button to stop the measure option or use the
Esc-key.
Save Snapshot ( )
The display of the view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Grid Axis Layer ( )
Toggles the cross on/off.
Profile Box Layer ( )
Toggles the box around the data on/off.
Show Color Table ( )
Toggles the display of the color table on the right side in the view
on/on/off. It will toggle between both color tables present in the view
and no color table. The two color tables are CUBE color mode / Grid
model color mode (depends on the active mode) and Multibeam color
mode.
Grid Model Layer ( )
The selected grid model in the grid model layer can be switched on/off.
Grid Model Color Mode (
)
In the view different Grid model color modes can be displayed:
if available the Z Average, Hit Count, Z Standard Deviation, Z
Minimum (Deepest), Z Maximum (Highest) and Time.
CUBE Layer ( )
The CUBE layer can be switched on/off. That means if the button is
470 Editing
in, the CUBE layer is on and the CUBE model will be displayed in the
view.
CUBE Color Mode (
)
In the view different CUBE color modes can be displayed. See page
518 for more information about the different CUBE color modes.
CUBE Surface (
)
Different CUBE surfaces can be selected to display in the view. See
page 520 for more information about the different CUBE surfaces.
Previous/Next CUBE Surface (
)
The previous/next available hypothesis will be displayed. These
options are only available when as CUBE surface (
) the option
Hypothesis is selected.
Show Combined with Main Surface ( )
The main surface can be displayed in combination with one of the
hypotheses. This option is only available when as CUBE surface (
the option Hypothesis is selected.
Multibeam Layer ( )
The multibeam data can be switched on/off in the view. If the button is
active, extra buttons will be added to the toolbar.
Beam Color Mode (
)
The multibeam data can be show in different color modes: File Set,
Depth, Filter, Statistics and Multiping sequence. The different color
modes help to analyze the multibeam data. See page 476 for more
information about the beam color mode.
Laserscan Color Mode (
)
The laser scan data can be shown in different color modes. See the
chapter Multibeam Area Editing Toolbar and Context Menu on page
522 for pictures of the different color modes.
Connect Beams With Lines ( )
Toggles between only beams and beams connected with lines.
Increase/Decrease Point Size ( ,
)
The size of the beam points can be increased and decreased.
Only Show Valid Beams ( )
Toggles between showing only the valid data and showing all the data.
Editing 471
polygon, which have to be bigger than the ignore filters area, and all
the selected data gets their own filter setting back.
Multibeam Export Multibeam Points To ASCII
The XYZ of the multibeam data as displayed in the view will be
exported to a file with extension ASC.
Layer Control ( )
Opens the Layers window where layers can be added, edited or
removed. Only the used layers will be shown in the Layers window.
Properties ( )
Opens the Properties window of the view where next to for instance
the color table and the scale factor several option from the toolbar
and/or context menu are accessible.
Next to the view properties, all the attributes of the selected layers of
the Layer Control are available.
16.5 3D View
The 3D View Standard is only a viewer, it is not an editor. Next to the
multibeam data from the file set, it can show a grid model or a 3D design
model in 3D with some extra information.
472 Editing
Figure 16-33
Zoom Functions ( ,
,
)
Zoom In, Zoom Out and Zoom Extents.
Follow Vessel ( )
Toggles the follow vessel mode on/off.
Show Spotlight ( )
Toggles the spotlight window on/off. It is also possible to toggle with
the key o.
With the spotlight window, the light intension and light source location
in the viewer can be modified.
Figure 16-34
Spotlight window
Click on the yellow ball and move it around in the circle. How further
away from the center how less intense the light will be. The location of
the yellow ball in the circle gives the location of the light source.
Editing 473
Measure ( )
A distance can be measured in the view. Click on a point in the view
and keep the left mouse button pressed while drawing the measure
line to the second point. Release the left mouse button and the 3D
distance between the two points is given.
When the cursor comes close to the arrows of the measure line, the
line is highlighted and the cursor is changes in a hand. Grab the
arrow to move the end of the measure line.
When the cursor is away from the arrows of the measure line, the line
is dimmed and cannot be moved. Click on a new position and keep the
left mouse button pressed to draw a new measure line.
Click on the right mouse button to stop the measure option or use the
Esc-key.
Save Snapshot
The display of the view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Grid Axis Layer ( )
Toggles the cross on/off.
Show Color Table ( )
Toggles the display of the color table on/off.
Multibeam Layer ( )
The multibeam data can be switched on/off in the view. If the button is
active, extra buttons will be added to the toolbar.
Beam Color Mode (
)
The multibeam data can be show in different color modes to help to
analyze the data. See page 476 for more information about the beam
color mode.
474 Editing
Editing 475
Statistics
This mode will show the data in colors which represent a level of a
statistic value. The statistic values are valid for an area, not separate
sways or soundings. Therefore, both low and high-resolution areas are
colored as a whole. Possible values are:
Standard deviation.
Minimum value.
Maximum value.
The percentage of the beams that is affected by the selected
multibeam filter.
The percentage of the beams that is affected by all the
multibeam filters.
The different type of statistic modes can be selected in the properties
of the Multibeam Layer.
When the color mode is set to Depth or Statistics, the context menu of
the view is extended with two options; Generate Color Table for Color
Mode and Show Color Table for Color Mode (see page 475).
Multiping Sequence
This mode will show the single ping or the multipings in different
colors.
Sonar Head
This mode will show the multibeam data for each sonar head in a
different color.
Detection
This mode will show the multibeam data in the detection colors;
amplitude, phase or both.
Multidetection
Multi-detect is an optional feature for RESON sonars which provides
multiple detections within each beam. It allows the surveyor to capture
enhance detail over complex features, or ensure that full detail is
captured of any object in the water column. The below picture is an
example of multi-detect data with the Multidetection beam color mode
enabled. Up to five detections may occur anywhere within each beam.
476 Editing
Figure 16-36
Multidetection
Editing 477
Figure 16-37
Figure 16-38
478 Editing
Figure 16-39
, with key a on
Background Color
The background color of the view.
Color Table Name
Select a color table and all the relevant layers in the view will use it.
Follow Vessel
If the follow vessel mode is Enabled the view will follow the others
editors in the Editing.
Scale Factor
The scale factor of the Z-axis. Scale factor > 1 will enlarge the data in
the Z direction.
All other options in the Properties are similar with the options in the
toolbar and in the context menu (see page 473).
After the properties, the selected layers in the Layer Control are available
in the Properties window. It is not necessary to open the Layer Control to
modify something in one of the layers.
Editing 479
Figure 16-40
Multibeam Layer
This layer has to be added to the Layers window before the multibeam
data can be shown in the view. Before any data can be displayed, the
Multibeam Data and Position Source has to be selected.
In the Layers window only the used layers will be shown, any new layer
has to be added to the list in the window. The layers that can be added to
the layer control are:
Figure 16-41
480 Editing
This editor cannot be created through the standard editor selection in the
Editing (see page 448). This editor can only be opened with the option
Tools > Data Source Switching from the menu bar of the Editing. After it
is created, it will be available in the Displays of the Editing. See the
chapter Data Source Switch on page 455 how to setup the Data Source
Switching editor.
Editing 481
Figure 16-42
482 Editing
Figure 16-43
Select the data group that has to become the primary data source and
use
to move the selected data group to the top. Click on
and
the data source switch will be inserted on the selected location. If the data
of the different data groups is different than in the lowest channel the data
will be changed from the selected location onwards.
On the location where a data source switch is inserted a cross will be
visible in the data. The size of the cross can be modified in the channel
properties of the data source switching channels by changing the value
for the dot size.
Editing 483
Zoom Window ( )
With dragging a window in the active channel a part of the channel can
be zoomed in.
Zoom Extents ( )
Show all the data for all the channels.
Selector ( )
Toggles the Selector on/off.
Channel Partition ( )
If more than one line with data is displayed it is possible to display all
the data in one view (Overlayed) or each data line in a separate view
(Stacked).
Set Y Scale
For the view in the editor, the y-axis can be defined. Set in the Set Y
Scale dialog the high and low values for the y-axis.
Channel Y Scaling Mode
For the y-axis of the view three different scaling modes are possible.
Free; all the channel data have their own y-axis.
Same Scale; all the channel data have the same scale for the y-axis.
Same Range; the range of the y-axis is the same for all the channel
data.
Enable Channel Control ( )
Toggles the Channel Control on the right side of the editor on/off.
Channel Manager ( )
Opens the Channel Manager window to add, remove or edit one of the
channels.
Add Channel ( )
Opens the Select Data window to select a new channel with default
settings.
Show Values ( )
Shows a list of the data of the active channel which can be edited if the
data is editable.
Channel Properties
The properties of the active channel.
The size of the crosses can be modified by changing the dot size.
Properties
The properties of the editor.
484 Editing
16.7 Dekdienst
This view displays the dredge production information from one or two
suction tubes on a hopper. It is special made for one of our clients and is
therefore only with special dongles available in the Editing.
Figure 16-44
Dekdienst view
The data shown in this view is limited to the items that are defined in the
Dekdienst Channel Manager ( ). With
the user can decide to
show the selected data item only in the graph (grafiek), only in the text
(tekst) at the bottom or in both.
Figure 16-45
Dekdienst Channel Manager with the items for the Dekdienst view
Editing 485
486 Editing
Figure 16-46
The Line-Based Editing Standard view can also show data from a
second file set with the restriction that the data was surveyed over the
same runline. This data is only for comparison and cannot be edited.
Select the Properties in the context menu and give a name for the
second file set.
To show this data select the Channel Properties in the context menu and
enabled the option Enable under the name BkgndLineDL. This has to be
done for the each view (= channel) in the editor.
Figure 16-47 Properties (left) and Channel Properties (right) to select and
enable a second file set
Editing 487
Figure 16-48
type
Figure 16-49 Line-Based Editing Standard; with second file set and a profile
of a grid model
488 Editing
Figure 16-50
runline
Editing 489
is possible to display all the related data lines in one view (Overlayed)
or each data line in a separate view (Stacked).
Set Y Scale
For both views in the editor, the y-axis can be defined. Set in the Set Y
Scale dialog the high and low values for the y-axis.
Channel Y Scaling Mode
For the y-axis of the view three different scaling modes are possible.
Free; all the data lines have their own y-axis.
Same Scale; all the data lines have the same scale for the y-axis.
Same Range; the range of the y-axis is the same for all the data lines.
Distance in Line Origin
The x-axis in both views is related to the runline that is used in the
editor. The origin of the x-axis can be defined on three places on the
runline.
Centerline; the origin is in the middle of the runline.
Start of Line; the origin is at the start of the runline.
End of Line; the origin is at the end of the runline, which will result in
negative values for the x-axis.
Enable Channel Control ( )
Toggles the Channel Control on the right side in the editor on/off.
Channel Manager ( )
Opens Channel Manager to add, remove or edit one of the channels;
only in the Line-Based Editor Standard.
Add Channel ( )
Opens Select Data to select a new channel with default settings; only
in the Line-Based Editing Standard view.
Select Data ( )
Opens Select Data to select the channel for the Line-Based Editing
Multiline view.
Show Values ( )
Shows a list of the data of the active channel. The data can be edited
by selecting one of the values in the list.
Channel Properties
The properties of the data that is selected in the view. Each view in the
editor has its own channel properties.
Properties
The properties of the selected view. Each view in the editor has its
own properties.
490 Editing
16.9 Messages
There is only one Messages view in the Editing, a Messages System
Messages view. This view is similar to the one in the Acquisition and the
Presentation (see page 347).
Figure 16-51
Editing
The Multiple Area Editing Standard view will by default always display
multibeam(1) when it is opened for the first time. This is the first
multibeam system in the Equipment list. When multiple multibeam
systems are selected in the equipment list and the first multibeam is
unchecked then no multibeam data will be displayed in the view. For the
CUBE and Grid Model control open with
the Layers window, add a
Multibeam Layer and select in the properties of the layer for the
Multibeam Data and Position Source the Multibeam xyz computation of
the active multibeam system. For the Multibeam Filter and Multibeam
Calibration a different multibeam system can be selected.
In the Multibeam Area Editing Standard view are the following modes
available:
CUBE Model mode (see below)
Grid Model mode (see page 499)
Multibeam Filter mode (see page 509)
Multibeam Calibration mode (see page 512)
Pipe Detection mode (see page 513)
Editing 491
The CUBE model name is always the name of the selected file set. When
a new Multibeam Area Editing Standard view is opened by default no
CUBE model will be opened. When the file set is identical with a CUBE
model that is generated before no new CUBE model has to be generated.
Just click on
in the toolbar of the view and the existing CUBE model
will be displayed.
Figure 16-52 Multibeam Area Editing Standard view with a CUBE model and
multibeam data both in depth color mode
16.10.2.1 CUBE
In the traditional multibeam echo sounders processing method all
measured data points are treated with the same accuracy. However, in
reality each data point has a different accuracy. The question is then how
can the different accuracies of the data points be determined, how can
the possible errors be measured, what is the impact of the errors on the
492 Editing
measured depths and what is then the true depth of the measured data
points.
CUBE ( 2003 University
of New Hampshire) stands
for Combined Uncertainty
and Bathymetry Estimator.
Editing 493
Figure 16-53 Create page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing
Standard view
In the Create page for the CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing
Standard view the cell size for the CUBE model can be defined and areas
likes wrecks or along a route can be excluded from the creation of the
model.
Cell size
Default an automatic setting of 10% of the depth of the multibeam data
is used as the cell size. It is also possible to enter a cell size, where
the user has to realize that the smaller the cell size the longer it will
take to generate the CUBE model.
If the density of the multibeam data is high, a small cell size can be
entered. However if the cell size is too small, gaps in the CUBE model
will appear.
If the cell size is too big, it is possible that the CUBE model is not
presenting the right model. This is due to the relation between the IHO
order and the cell size to determine what the best surface is for the
CUBE model.
IHO Order
The IHO order will be used to filter the data that is used for the
creation of the CUBE model. If the vertical and horizontal total
propagation error of a beam is bigger than the IHO error then the
beam will not be used for the CUBE model. See for an explanation of
the IHO order on page 372, for the vertical TPE on page 356 and for
the horizontal TPE on page 357.
494 Editing
Excluded areas
Areas can be excluded from the CUBE model. A file with the excluded
areas has to be selected before the CUBE model is created.
Select a file or create a new file with
.
Click on
to add an existing clipping polygon to the list of
excluded areas. If the polygon does not exist yet, click on
to
draw a new clipping polygon. This new created polygon will be added
to the list automatically.
Click on
to add an existing route to the list. To make the route
an excluded area, enter a route width and click on
to add the
route width to the route.
If an area has to be removed from the list, select the polygon or route
from the list and click on
to remove it from the excluded area
file.
Click on
page.
Figure 16-54 Info page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing
Standard view
In the Info page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing
Standard view the information of the CUBE model and one selected cell
of the model are presented.
Model
The cell size and the number of hypotheses of the CUBE model is
given.
Current surface
The current surface as presented in the view will be displayed, in the
Editing 495
Figure 16-55 Edit page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing
Standard view with one of the edit modes selected
It is always possible to
rotate and shift the view
using the mouse wheel as
a button.
In the Edit page cells can be removed from the main surface or data from
other hypotheses can be select for the main surface.
The cells can be selected by drawing a polygon around the cells or by
selecting one cell with the Ctrl key and a mouse click.
When one of the edit modes is selected, the Edit tab will have a red box
to indicate that one of the edit options is active (as shown in the example
above). Even when the user switches to a different page in the editor it is
still clear that one of the edit modes is active.
496 Editing
None
No edit mode is active.
Remove
The cursor will change to
. Draw a polygon around cells or select
one cell that has to be deleted. Directly the selected data is removed
from the view.
Override
The cursor will change to
. Select the hypothesis from which the
cells have to be selected by using
or
. The cells become green,
red or grey (see Figure 16-79 on page 520), so it is easy to see which
cells per hypothesis are not in the main surface. Draw a polygon
around the cells or select one cell that has to be moved to the main
surface. Directly the selected data will be moved to the main surface.
Golden sounding
The cursor will change to
and the multibeam data will become
visible if it is not switch on. Select a beam or the line that connects the
beam and the depth value will be moved the value in the main surface.
The edit mode can be switched off by selecting the edit mode None or
click with the right mouse button in the view.
Figure 16-56 Filter page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing
Standard view
Editing 497
In the Filter page the settings can be set to filter the multibeam data with
the CUBE model. The filters only work on the CUBE model that is
displayed in the view. The main criterion is the vertical distance between
the multibeam data and the CUBE model.
Filter
Select one or more of the following options to reject points.
Distance from CUBE surface exceeds the standard deviation
A beam will be rejected when the vertical distance between the Z of
the beam and the CUBE surface is larger than the standard
deviation of the CUBE model cell multiplied with 1.0, 2.0 or 3.0.
Distance from CUBE surface exceeds uncertainty
A beam will be rejected when the vertical distance between the Z of
the beam and the CUBE surface is larger than the uncertainty of
the CUBE model cell multiplied with the factor as is entered here.
Distance from CUBE surface exceeds
A beam will be rejected when the vertical distance between the Z of
the beam and the CUBE surface is larger than the value as is
entered here.
Dont filter problem areas
The beams which are related to a CUBE model cell with a strength
> 0 will not be filtered.
Click on
Unfilter
Click on
to add all the beams, which were rejected by the
CUBE/grid model filter, back to the multibeam data.
Instead of unfiltering all the beams, it is possible to select manually
the beams that have to be unfiltered. Check the option Enable
selection mode and select with the mouse the beams that have to
be unfiltered.
Figure 16-57 Export page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing
Standard view
498 Editing
Figure 16-58 Sync page for a CUBE model in the Multibeam Area Editing
Standard view
The CUBE synchronization will update the CUBE model after deleting or
undeleting multibeam data in the view.
When the option Auto sync CUBE model is checked, the CUBE model is
automatically updated only after each delete or undelete operation in the
Multibeam Area Editing Standard view.
When multibeam data is deleted with the delete mode ( ) or undeleted
with the undelete mode ( ) and the option is unchecked then the button
becomes active. Also in the tab of the Sync page, a red box
will appear to show that the multibeam data is modified (see above). Now
the CUBE model can be synchronized with the multibeam data by clicking
on
. The red box stays in the Sync tab until the CUBE model is
synchronized, even when the user switch over to a different page.
If the option Auto sync CUBE model is unchecked and the Multibeam
Area Editing Standard view or the Editing is closed or a different file set
is opened, then a prompt will be shown to ask the user if he wants to
update (synchronize) the CUBE model with the modified multibeam data.
Editing 499
Figure 16-59 Multibeam Area Editing Standard view with a grid model in
depth color mode
Figure 16-60 Create page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing
Standard view
500 Editing
In the Create page, a grid model can be created from the multibeam data
that is loaded with the file set.
Create
Cell size
The cell size of the grid model. When the option 10% of depth is
checked the cell size will be calculated and will be around 10% of
the average depth of the multibeam data.
Cell data
Select which data/information from the multibeam data has to be
stored in the grid model. The Hit Count is always stored in the grid
model.
When the cell size is set and the cell data is selected click on
to create the grid model from the multibeam data as loaded
in the view.
When the grid model is created, the name of the grid model will be
displayed above the tabs in the left pane.
Editing 501
Figure 16-61 Info page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing
Standard view
In the info page the information of the grid model and of the selected cell
is displayed. Also a report of the grid model can be generated.
Grid model
The cell size and the available statistical information of the grid model
will be displayed.
Cell size
The size of the cells in the grid model.
Used cells
The total number of cells used in the grid model.
Used area
The total used area, i.e. the number of used cells multiplied by the
cell size.
502 Editing
Empty area
The area of cells without data, i.e. the number empty cells
multiplied by the cell size. This are the empty cells in a grid model
rectangular that is drawn around the grid model data.
Z min (deepest)
The deepest found value of the data type Z Average.
Z max (highest)
The highest value found of the data type Z Average.
Z average
The sum of all the values of the data types Z Average divided by
the number of filled cells. The empty cells are not part of the
computation.
Z standard dev
The standard deviation of all the data points used to create the grid
model. With the information in each cell (Hit count, Z Average and
Standard Deviation) all the data points can be retrieved.
The standard deviation can only be computed when Z Average
exists as data type in the grid model.
Cells z std dev
The standard deviation of the standard deviations of each cell.
The formula: Cells z std dev = ((all cells std) /number of cells).
Total hit count
Sum of all the values of the data type Hit count. This is the number
of multibeam data points used for the grid model.
Latest time
The last observed time of the data type Time. This is only when
the data type Time exists in the grid model.
Cell info
Select a clipping polygon and click on
to get in a separate
window the cell information for the selected area. If no clipping polygon
is selected the cell information is of the complete grid model.
Figure 16-62
Edit cell
The cell information of a selected grid model cell. The cell can be
selected by double clicking on the cell. When the cell is selected it is
possible to edit the values.
Click on
to clear all the values in the selected cell.
Select a data type and the value can be modified, click on
to
set the new value.
Editing 503
Figure 16-63 Edit page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing
Standard view
In the Edit page the data of the grid model can be edited. Cells can be
deleted and interpolated if necessary.
None
The Edit mode is switched off.
Delete
The selected cells of the grid model will be deleted.
There are three methods to delete one or more cells:
1. Delete one point by clicking on the cell with the cursor in
combination with the Ctrl key.
2. Delete more cells by placing the cursor on the right location. Keep
the left mouse button pressed in combination with the Ctrl key and
move the cursor over the grid model data. It looks like erasing the
data.
3. A different method to delete more cells is by drawing a polygon
around the points that have to be deleted. All the data that is
present inside the polygon will be deleted. The polygon can be a
polygon with line segments or it can be a free drawn polygon
(lasso).
Interpolate circular
Interpolate the gaps in the grid model with the circular interpolation. In
this interpolation all the Z data types (the Z Average, the Z Maximum
and Z Minimum, if available in the grid model) will be interpolated.
504 Editing
Draw with the mouse a lasso / clipping polygon and the gaps in the
lasso / polygon will be interpolated immediately.
Max gap
The maximum gap in the grid model for which the interpolation is
valid. If the gap is bigger than the max. gap then no interpolation
will be done.
Click on this button when the complete grid model has to be
interpolated with the circular interpolation.
Delete and Interpolation
Delete one or more cells and immediately the deleted cells will be
interpolated.
Draw a lasso / polygon and all the cells inside the lasso / polygon will
be deleted and immediately all the deleted cells will be interpolated.
Figure 16-64 Filter page to remove spikes in the grid model in the mUltibeam
Area Editing Standard view
In the Filter page the settings can be set to find and remove spikes in the
grid model and the removed cells will be interpolated with a circular
interpolation.
Ignore Area Options
Select clipping polygons which cover areas of the gird model that
ignored when PDS2000 is searching for spikes. This can be used to
ignore wrecks from the spike detection.
Editing 505
Preview Options
Check the option Show Preview when the found spikes will be shown
in the grid model. If unchecked the found spikes will immediately be
removed so no visual check can be done.
There are two options to show the detected spikes in the grid model;
Red on Green and User color.
Red on Green shows the spikes in red and the rest of the grid model in
green.
User color shows the spikes in the color as defined in the Properties
(Show Preview Color in the Grid Model Edit Layer) and the rest of the
grid model in the colors of the active color table.
Figure 16-65
Filter Options
Evaluation area size
Select an evaluation area size; for each type of area a different size
for the despiking is needed. For each area a mean is calculated
and with the threshold a spike can be detected in the area.
Threshold
The threshold is a kind of standard deviation for each area.
For an irregular area a small threshold (f.i.0.5) will give more spikes
than a threshold of 5. How bigger the threshold the more
irregularity is accepted as no spike.
Selection area
The despiking can be done for the complete grid model with the
options Entire Model. The spikes are found after on
is clicked.
With Select area select an area of the grid model by drawing a
lasso around the area with spikes. The spikes are found when the
lasso is drawn.
or
The Find Spikes button is only active when as selection area the
entire model is selected.
Click on the button to find the spikes in the grid model.
The Find & Remove Spikes button is only available when the option
Show Preview is unchecked; the detected spikes will be removed
immediately after they are detected.
When Show Preview is checked the spikes become visible. It is
506 Editing
possible that an area in the grid model shows spikes that are not really
spikes, f.i. a wreck.
Click on the button and draw a lasso around that area and it will be
ignored in the spike detection and it gets it original grid model colors
back or becomes green.
When Show Preview is checked the spikes become visible in the view.
Click on the button to remove the spikes. The spikes will be replaced
by interpolated data from the cells around the spike(s).
Figure 16-66 Beam Filter page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing
Standard view
In the Beam Filter page the settings can be set to filter the multibeam data
with a grid model. The main criterion is the vertical distance between the
multibeam data and the grid model.
Filter
Distance from grid model exceeds standard deviation
A beam will be rejected when the vertical distance between the Z of
the beam and the grid model is larger than the standard deviation
of the grid model cell multiplied with the factor as is entered here.
Separate values can be entered for above and below the grid
model.
Distance from grid surface exceeds
A beam will be rejected when the vertical distance between the Z of
the beam and the grid model surface is larger than the value as is
entered here.
Separate values can be entered for above and below the grid
model.
Editing 507
The filtered data will be visible in the view with the color of the
CUBE/grid model filter, if the Beam Color Mode is set on Filter.
Unfilter
Click on
to add all the beams, which are rejected by the
CUBE/grid model filter, back to the multibeam data.
Instead of unfiltering all the beams, it is possible to select manually
the beams that have to be unfiltered. Check the option Enable
selection mode and select with the mouse the beams that have to
be unfiltered.
Figure 16-67 Export page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing
Standard view
The mean beam Z deviation of all the beams relative to the grid model
can be exported to a CSV file. For each beam the mean beam Z deviation
for the four multipings (if available), the single ping and the beam angle
will be exported. Click on
to start the export.
Figure 16-68 Sync page for a grid model in the Multibeam Area Editing
Standard view
The grid model synchronization will update the grid model after deleting or
undeleting multibeam data in the view.
508 Editing
When the option Auto sync grid model is checked, the grid model is
automatically updated only after each delete or undelete operation in the
Multibeam Area Editing Standard view.
When multibeam data is deleted with the delete mode ( ) or undeleted
with the undelete mode ( ) and the option Auto sync grid model is
unchecked then the button
becomes active. Also in the tab of
the Sync page, a red box will appear to show that the multibeam data is
modified (see above). Now the grid model can be synchronized with the
multibeam data by clicking on
. The red box stays in the Sync
tab until the grid model is synchronized, even when the user switch over
to a different page.
If the option Auto sync grid model is unchecked and the Multibeam Area
Editing Standard view or the Editing is closed or a different file set is
opened, then a prompt will be shown to ask the user if he wants to update
(synchronize) the grid model with the modified multibeam data.
Editing 509
Figure 16-69 Filter page for the multibeam filters in the Multibeam Area Editing
Standard view
Multibeam
Before the multibeam filters can be added or modified, select the right
multibeam at the top of the page. If more than one multibeam is
available in the Equipment list then one of these multibeam systems
can be selected. By default always the first system in the Equipment
list is selected.
510 Editing
It is possible to select
multiple filter positions
before modifying the filters.
Use the Ctrl key or Shift
key to select multiple filter
positions. Then it is
possible to add/remove
filters for all the selected
filter positions at the same
time.
Filter Positions
This are location of the filter(s) as set in the file(s) of the selected file
set. The location is also visible as small triangles in the data bar of the
Editing.
A filter position can be added in any location in the data file. Ensure
the data locator is on the location the user wants a new multibeam
filter and click on
to insert a new filter position. Set the
different filter values to the requirements and click on
to
activate the new filter position. If the filter position is activated, a
recache takes place to update the data from the current (new) filter
position to the next filter position or to the end of the data file.
To modify a filter select the right filter position from the list of filter
positions and changes the required filter settings. Click on
to update the location in the other views to the filter position location.
Click on
to activate the modifications.
In case a filter position should be removed from the file, select it in the
list of filter positions and click on
in the editor.
Filters
For the selected filter location in the Filter positions the active filters
will be displayed.
With
a different filter can be added to the list. The new added
filter will be placed in the order as defined in the selection list, this
means that most of the time the new filters is not added at the end of
the display list. Modify the setting for the new filter and click on
to add the new filter to the selected filter position.
When a filter is not necessary anymore, it can be removed from the
display list. Uncheck the filter and click on
to update the list.
The removed filter can be added again and the last filter settings for
that filter will be used.
Attributes
A complete swath will be rejected when the percentage of rejected
beams is more than the given percentage.
There are three methods to use sound velocity information in the
multibeam computation.
- no sound velocity profile will be used.
- a sound velocity profile can be selected; select the sound
velocity profile that has to be used in the multibeam computation.
- data from the sound velocity profile sensor that is selected
in the Equipment will be used in the multibeam computation.
When a sound velocity profile is used, it is possible to use the surface
sound velocity, detected by the multibeam system, as extra entry in
the sound velocity profile. Check the option Use surface SV as first
entry in table to do so.
Filter changes
When a filter position is added or deleted, or when a filter is added or
unchecked or when the attributes settings are modified then both
buttons becomes active. Click on
to apply the modification(s)
or click on
to set the settings back to the settings before the
modification(s).
Editing 511
Figure 16-70 Calibration mode with a Multibeam Area Editing Standard view
and the three Profile views
512 Editing
Figure 16-71 Pipe Detection mode in the Multibeam Area Editing Standard
view with a detected pipe and a Profile view
See for a detailed explanation of the pipe detection the manual Pipe
Detection (the file Pipe Detection.pdf in the folder manuals) .
Editing 513
Figure 16-72
Refer to the chapter 3D View - Online Water Column on page 300 for a
description of the properties menus, as they are the same.
514 Editing
Figure 16-73 Svp Edit Profile view with a sound velocity profile view on the left
and a profile view on the right with above the Multibeam Area Editing Standard
view
When the view is opened, in the data of the Multibeam Area Editing
Standard view a profile is drawn on the current record location. In the
Multibeam Area Editing Standard view the profile can be modified if
needed. A new profile can be drawn with
from the toolbar of the Svp
Edit Profile view.
Next to the current sound velocity profile, a second sound velocity profile
can be selected with the option that it can be edited. Both sound velocity
profiles will be displayed on the left side in the view. In the sound velocity
profile view on the left side, the small boxes can be selected and dragged
around in the view to modify the sound velocity profile.
In the left pane in the view some actions/options can be selected.
Edit file name
Select a sound velocity profile that has to be edited. This can be the
same sound velocity profile as the current sound velocity profile or it
can be a different sound velocity profile.
The selected sound velocity profile is displayed in red with small boxes
which can be moved.
The selected sound velocity profile will be directly assigned to the data
shown in the profile. The user can see immediately what the influence
is of the sound velocity profile on the multibeam data.
Use Surface Sv
Select this option when the surface sound velocity has to be used in
the editable sound velocity profile.
The location of the surface sound velocity is displayed as a white dot
in the sound velocity profile.
Preview Mode
Each modification of the sound velocity profile will update the
Editing 515
Hide Pane ( )
Toggles the left pane of the Multibeam Area Editing Standard view
on/off.
Zoom Functions ( ,
,
)
Zoom In, Zoom Out and Zoom Extents.
Vertical Zoom Functions ( , )
Increase and Decrease the scale factor of the Z-axis of the data.
Follow Vessel ( )
Toggles the follow vessel mode on/off.
Show Spotlight ( )
Toggles the spotlight window on/off. It is also possible to toggle with
the key o.
With the spotlight window, the light intension and light source location
in the viewer can be modified.
Click on the yellow ball and move it around in the circle. How further
away from the center how less intense the light will be. The location of
the yellow ball in the circle gives the location of the light source.
Pan ( )
Keep the left mouse button pressed to pan through the data in the
view.
Measure ( )
A distance can be measured in the view. Click on a point in the view
516 Editing
and keep the left mouse button pressed while drawing the measure
line to the second point. Release the left mouse button and the 3D
distance between the two points is given.
When the cursor comes close to the arrows of the measure line, the
line is highlighted and the cursor is changes in a hand. Grab the
arrow to move the end of the measure line.
When the cursor is away from the arrows of the measure line, the line
is dimmed and cannot be moved. Click on a new position and keep the
left mouse button pressed to draw a new measure line.
Click on the right mouse button to stop the measure option or use the
Esc-key.
Save Snapshot
The display of the view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Draw Polygon
Draw a clipping polygon in the view.
Create Detail View (
)
Click on the arrow to select the type of view that has to be created;
Box view, Profile view or Ping view.
Editing 517
in, the CUBE layer is on and the CUBE model will be displayed in the
view.
CUBE Color Mode (
)
In the view different CUBE color modes can be displayed.
Number of Hypotheses
The CUBE model is displayed with colors, which will present the
number of hypotheses, with green for 1 hypothesis to red for the
maximum number of hypotheses available in the CUBE model.
Figure 16-74
mode
Figure 16-75
518 Editing
Depth
The main surface of the CUBE model will be displayed in the colors
of the active color table.
Figure 16-76
Hit Count
The CUBE model is displayed with the colors that will present the
number of hit counts per cell, with green for a hit count of 1 to red
for the maximum number of hit counts in the CUBE model.
Figure 16-77
Editing 519
Uncertainty
The CUBE model is displayed with the colors which will present the
uncertainty (= a kind of standard deviation) per cell, with green for
the smallest uncertainty to red for the biggest uncertainty in the
CUBE model.
Figure 16-78
Figure 16-79 Hypothesis 1 surface of the CUBE model with the selected
data in main surface as color mode
CUBE Surface (
)
Different surfaces can be selected:
Main
The best surface as calculated in the CUBE model.
520 Editing
Hypothesis
The surface with one of the hypotheses of the CUBE model. Use
and
to go through all the available hypotheses.
Lowest
The surface with the lowest values from all the hypotheses in the
CUBE model.
Highest
The surface with the highest values from all the hypotheses in the
CUBE model.
Most Hits
The surface with the for each cell the hypothesis with the most hits
in the CUBE model.
Closest to Average
The surface with the for each cell the hypothesis that is closest to
the average of all the hypotheses in the CUBE model.
Previous/Next CUBE Surface (
)
The previous/next available hypothesis will be displayed. These
options are only available when as CUBE surface (
) the option
Hypothesis is selected.
Show Combined with Main Surface ( )
The main surface can be displayed in combination with one of the
hypotheses. This option is only available when as CUBE surface (
the option Hypothesis is selected.
Multibeam Layer ( )
The multibeam data can be switched on/off in the view. If the button is
active, extra buttons will be added to the toolbar.
Beam Color Mode (
)
The multibeam data can be show in different color modes: File Set,
Depth, Filter, Statistics, Multiping sequence, Sonar head and
Detection. The different color modes help to analyze the multibeam
data. See page 476 for more information about the beam color mode.
Editing 521
Figure 16-80
Laser Intensity
In the laser scan data the intensity of the laser scan data is logged.
This intensity can be used as color mode to display the laser scan
data in a grey scale.
With the items Start Brightness Ramp (SBR) and Brightness Ramp
Range (BRR) in the Properties of the view the brightness of the
intensity can be defined.
From 0 SBR:
The data is displayed with the intensity as received from the
laser scan.
From SBR (BRR+SBR):
The data is displayed with the intensity as received from the
laser scan plus an extra intensity value started at SBR with 0
and ends at BRR+SBR with 1. Between SBR and BRR+SBR it
will be linear interpolated. This means that the data further away
gets an extra intensity to make that data more clear in the view.
522 Editing
Figure 16-81 Laser scan data with the color mode Laser Intensity with
BSR=50 and BRR=50
Editing 523
Figure 16-82 Laser scan data with the color mode Laser Intensity with
BSR=20 and BRR=80
Figure 16-83
Intensity
524 Editing
Figure 16-84
Editing 525
Ignore Filters ( )
Multibeam data that is filtered out by one of the filters can be validated
again without unfiltering the data.
This option will make all selected data valid again, except the manual
rejected data. Draw a polygon around the data that have to be valid
again and all the data becomes valid. The data can be recognized by
its own filter color (Ignore Filters).
Clear Ignore Filters ( )
The ignore filters setting will be undone. Select the data by drawing a
polygon, which have to be bigger then the ignore filters area, and all
the selected data gets their own filter setting back.
526 Editing
Figure 16-85
The ping as displayed in the Ping view is only motion compensated and
not geo-referenced.
Editing 527
Figure 16-86
The ping that is displayed in the Ping view will be highlighted in the
Multibeam Area Editing Standard view.
Figure 16-87
With the option 2D Side Front ( ) the standard 2D Ping view (Front
view) as shown above can be changed to a 2D Side view.
528 Editing
Figure 16-88
When more pings are selected in the Ping view, then also more pings will
be highlighted in the Multibeam Area Editing Standard view (see below).
Figure 16-89 Multibeam Area Editing Standard view with 250 highlighted
pings which are displayed in the Ping view
The editing in the Ping view is similar as the editing in the other 3D views
(see page 467).
Editing 529
When the Ping view is closed in the Editing it will not be available
anymore as a view in the Displays window (see page 448).
530 Editing
Editing 531
Figure 16-90
Zoom Functions ( ,
,
,
)
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents.
Pan ( )
Toggles the pan option on/off. When pan is active, keep the left mouse
button in and move the mouse to pan through the data.
The pan option can also be switched off by clicking on the right mouse
button.
Select All
Select all the data points of the active data layer.
Draw Route
A track guidance route can be drawn in the position editor.
532 Editing
Redraw
Redraw the data in the editor.
Measure ( )
Measure the distance between two selected points in the editor.
Save Snapshot
Save the data of the Position Editing Standard view as a JPG or
BMP file.
When there are sonar
targets available they will
be displayed in the editor.
To add or delete sonar
targets a grid model can be
added to the Layer Control
to make the area visible.
Editing 533
Figure 16-91 Position Editing Standard with the tracks colored with
their GPS status
File Color
The tracks are colored with the color as is given in the databar.
Show Color Table ( )
Toggles the display of the color table on the right side in the view
on/on/off.
Grid Model Color Mode (
)
In the view different Grid model color modes can be displayed:
if available the Z Average, Hit Count, Z Standard Deviation, Z
Minimum (Deepest), Z Maximum (Highest) and Time.
Coverage Settings ( )
The settings of the grid model in the editor (see page 403).
Layer Control ( )
Overview of all used background and foreground layers. Also new
layers can be added to the list.
Properties ( )
The properties of the editor.
534 Editing
A better method to fill the gaps in the position is by using the edit option
Fill Gap from the context menu in the Position Editor as is explained on
page 468.
It possible to have several Profile views opened at the same time. The
drawn box from the active Profile view will be the only drawn box that is
visible in the Multibeam Area Editing Standard view (see page 517).
Editing 535
Figure 16-92
The editing in the Profile view is similar as the editing in the other 3D
views (see page 467).
The data in the Profile view will not be updated when in the Multibeam
Area Editing Standard view a new grid model or CUBE model is added.
When the Profile view is closed in the Editing it will not be available
anymore as a view in the Displays window (see page 448).
536 Editing
Use the Ctrl-key in combination with the mouse wheel to zoom in/out
only in the vertical direction.
Pan ( ).
Keep the left mouse button pressed to pan through the data in the
view.
Show Spotlight ( )
Toggles the spotlight window on/off. It is also possible to toggle with
the key o. Only available in the 3D mode.
With the spotlight window, the light intension and light source location
in the viewer can be modified.
Click on the yellow ball and move it around in the circle. How further
away from the center how less intense the light will be. The location of
the yellow ball in the circle gives the location of the light source.
Measure ( )
A distance can be measured in the view. Click on a point in the view
and keep the left mouse button pressed while drawing the measure
line to the second point. Release the left mouse button and the
distance between the two points is given.
When the cursor comes close to the arrows of the measure line, the
line is highlighted and the cursor is changes in a hand. Grab the
arrow to move the end of the measure line.
When the cursor is away from the arrows of the measure line, the line
is dimmed and cannot be moved. Click on a new position and keep the
left mouse button pressed to draw a new measure line.
Click on the right mouse button to stop the measure option or use the
Esc-key.
Save Snapshot ( )
The display of the view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Grid Axis Layer ( )
Toggles the cross on/off. Only available in the 3D mode.
Profile Box Layer ( )
Toggles the box around the data on/off. Only available in the 3D mode.
Show Color Table ( )
Toggles the display of the color table on the right side in the view
on/on/off. It will toggle between both color tables present in the view
and no color table. The two color tables are CUBE color mode / Grid
model color mode (depends on the active mode) and Multibeam color
mode.
Grid Model Layer ( )
The selected grid model in the grid model layer can be switched on/off.
Grid Model Color Mode (
)
In the view different Grid model color modes can be displayed:
if available the Z Average, Hit Count, Z Standard Deviation, Z
Minimum (Deepest), Z Maximum (Highest) and Time.
CUBE Layer ( )
The CUBE layer can be switched on/off. That means if the button is
in, the CUBE layer is on and the CUBE model will be displayed in the
view.
CUBE Color Mode (
)
In the view different CUBE color modes can be displayed. See page
518 for more information about the different CUBE color modes.
Editing 537
CUBE Surface (
)
Different CUBE surfaces can be selected to display in the view. See
page 520 for more information about the different CUBE surfaces.
Previous/Next CUBE Surface (
)
The previous/next available hypothesis will be displayed. These
options are only available when as CUBE surface (
) the option
Hypothesis is selected.
Show Combined with Main Surface ( )
The main surface can be displayed in combination with one of the
hypotheses. This option is only available when as CUBE surface (
the option Hypothesis is selected.
Multibeam Layer ( )
The multibeam data can be switched on/off in the view. If the button is
active, extra buttons will be added to the toolbar.
Beam Color Mode (
)
The multibeam data can be show in different color modes to help to
analyze the data. See page 476 for more information about the beam
color mode.
Laserscan Color Mode (
)
The laser scan data can be shown in different color modes. See the
chapter Multibeam Area Editing Toolbar and Context Menu on page
522 for pictures of the different color modes.
Connect Beams With Lines ( )
Toggles between only beams and beams connected with lines.
Increase/Decrease Point Size
The size of the beam points can be increased and decreased.
Only Show Valid Beams ( )
Toggles between showing only the valid data and showing all the data.
538 Editing
Layer Control ( )
Opens the Layers window where layers can be added, edited or
removed. Only the used layers will be shown in the Layers window.
Properties ( )
Opens the Properties window of the view where next to for instance
the color table and the scale factor several option from the toolbar
and/or context menu are accessible.
Next to the view properties, all the attributes of the selected layers of
the Layer Control are available.
16.15 Sonar
At the moment the Sonar is not an editor it is only a viewer for side scan
sonar data or for snippets data. For both types of data, a separate viewer
is available; the Sonar Sidescan view and the Sonar Snippets view.
Figure 16-93
Editing 539
Figure 16-94
In both viewers, the data can be moved to the left or right with the left or
right arrow key on the keyboard. Next to the zoom buttons (
and
)
the keys + and - on the numerics keyboard can be used to zoom in and
out in the view.
Auto-Recache ( )
Toggles the Automatic Recache on/off.
Automatic recaching of the snippets or side scan sonar data will be
done on attribute changes and on editing dependent data (like
positioning data). There will be no re-caching when the multibeam data
is edited.
Pending Updates ( )
This button becomes active when the Auto-Recache is off and an
attribute change or editing of the data took place. Now the user can
decide when the recache of the side scan sonar or snippets data is
started. Click on
to start the recache.
540 Editing
TVG ( ,
)
Increase and Decrease the TVG (see page 432).
Auto Scaling ( )
Toggles between Auto Scaling Off (Out) and On (In) (see page 432).
Click on
to activate the
changes caused by the
Lamberts Law correction
on/off.
Click on
to activate the
changes caused by the
slant range correction
on/off.
Editing 541
Figure 16-95 Three Sonar Targets views with sonar targets created in three
different views
542 Editing
All collected sonar targets will be saved in the selected sonar targets file,
which is available in the Sonar Targets Database of the Explorer (see
page 273). The corresponding GeoTIFF files are also stored in the Sonar
Targets Database of the Explorer.
At the moment a set of sonar targets consist of one or more sonar targets
files and all the corresponding GeoTIFF files. Dont forget to copy the
GeoTIFF files when a copy is made of the sonar targets. When no
GeoTIFF files are available no picture is available anymore.
Zoom Functions ( , , , )
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window and Zoom Extents.
Pan ( )
Toggles the pan option on/off. When pan is active, keep the left mouse
button in and move the mouse to pan through the data.
The pan option can also be switched off by clicking on the right mouse
button.
Measure ( )
To measure a distance and a bearing in the plan view. On the first use
the measure starts at the vessels tracking point. With a mouse click
the start of the measurement can be at any location in the view. The
measure window shows start and end coordinates as well as distance
and bearing between the two locations.
Figure 16-96
Click on
to change the presentation from grid to latitude and
longitude coordinates in a selectable format. Select in the project
configuration for local or satellite coordinates (see page 76).
Click on
to change the distance unit.
A right mouse click stops the measure option.
Measure Object LWH (
)
This option is to measure the Length, Width and Height of the object in
the sonar target GeoTIFF as displayed in the view.
By default the option is set on Disabled, so no measurement can be
done. Select one of the options Length, Width or Height and the cursor
will change to a cross. With a mouse click the measurement can be
started, click again to stop the measurement. The measured distance
Editing 543
is entered in the table below the view. With a right mouse click the
options can be stopped (or use the option Disabled).
Layer Control ( )
The raster layer and grid layer are available in the Layer Control.
Properties ( )
In the Properties the background color can be modified.
Figure 16-97
The Tide Station Viewer shows only the tide data that is used for the
data in the selected file set. If there is no tide data applied to the data in
the Editing this viewer will be empty.
544 Editing
It is possible to modify the tide data in the viewer, but the tide data will not
be treated as PDS2000 log data like all the other data in the Editing. Any
modification made in the viewer will modify the tide values files in the
Explorer (see page 241), but not the data in the other editors. If tide data
is modified in the viewer or in the editor, use the option Tools > Apply Tide
to update the other data in the Editing.
Editing 545
Figure 16-98
Various sensor values are relevant against a time scale. For example,
data from a VRU shown in time shows where the VRU went wrong. When
at the same time a Position Editing Standard view is viewed, it can be
shown where the wrong VRU data is located. This may help analyzing
data from the viewed sensors.
All data is logged in a time sequence. However, it is not always useful to
show logged data in time; for example, a shallow depth recording when
viewed in time indicates there was a shallow depth at some time during
the survey but not where the shoal is located.
546 Editing
In this view, the echo sounder channel data with its graphical trace
information can be displayed.
When no color table is available for the graphical trace a default color
table will be generated when the channel data is loaded in the view. In the
Channel Properties in the context menu of the view a different color table
can be selected if necessary.
With the Add Echogram ( ) option only the echo sounder channels can
be selected and added to the Time-Based Editing.
The echo sounder data can be edited with a special option in the toolbar,
called digitizing ( ). See page 549 for an explanation of the digitizing.
Editing 547
548 Editing
Digitizing ( )
The cursor is changed to a cross to edit the echo sounder data. Next
to the standard edit mode (see page 450), two new methods are
available to move the data in the view when this option is active.
A line can be drawn by keeping the left mouse button in. When the left
mouse button is released, the echo sounder data will be moved to the
drawn line.
A different method is drawing a line by clicking with the left mouse
button on locations where the new data points should be. With the
right mouse button, the drawing will be stopped and the echo sounder
data will be moved.
This is only available in the Time-Based Editing Echogram view.
Save Snapshot ( )
The view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file. This is only available in
the Time-Based Editing Echogram view.
Generate Report ( )
A report with file information and the graph is generated. This is only in
the Time-Based Editing Activity Graph view. When the option View
report is checked, the report is opened in the PDS2000 Reporter. If not
checked the report is saved as PDF file in the Reports folder of the
project.
Editing 549
17 Create Model
17.1 Introduction
Create Model can be used to make a grid model or a TIN model from
different types of data files.
Figure 17-1
The Create Model can be started with Processing > Create Model from
the menu bar or with
from the toolbar of the Control Center.
After reading the data files with an optional preview function the data can
be shown in a view. All the data or data inside a clipping polygon can be
converted into a grid model or a TIN model.
Figure 17-2
Figure 17-3
Figure 17-4
Figure 17-5
Additional parameters
If necessary a scale factor for the Z-value can be entered.
Coordinate type
Select the coordinate type used in the ASCII file.
Coordinate transformation
If the coordinate type is Geographic a coordinate datum
transformation has to be selected. Only the datum transformation
which are compatible with the project coordinate system will be
displayed. This means that the local ellipsoid should be the same as in
the project coordinate system.
Figure 17-6
Select one of the available data types in the selected Grid Model for the
import of the grid model data.
Figure 17-7
Only from the first valid
logfile in the file set the
computations will be
extracted and displayed as
option!!
17.2.3 Preview
When all the data files are selected and the additional information for
each data file is entered the wizard can be closed by clicking on
All the selected data will be loaded into the computer memory.
When Show preview is checked the loaded data will be shown in the
view. A coarse grid model is used as default to show the data.
When a grid model is selected, PDS2000 asks for a filename and the data
types and the cell size for the grid model have to be set. When the
conversion is finished the user has the option to view the grid model in the
grid model editor. For more detail about the grid model editor see chapter
Grid Model on page 559.
Figure 17-8
18 Grid Model
18.1 Introduction
A grid model is a digital representation of the earths surface. These kinds
of models are also called DTMs or Digital Terrain Models. These models
are usually created with survey data; however other 3D data can also be
used. A model consists of a number of cells where each cell can contain
one or more data types. The cells of a grid model are always a square
with the sides parallel to the projection grid.
PDS2000 uses grid models on various locations. In the Acquisition a
covered area is shown through a grid model. Off-line a number of
operations with a grid model are possible. Some of these possibilities are
listed below.
In the Acquisition and Presentation, coverage charts for various
sensors.
Quality control for sensor values.
Interpolation of measured values over non reachable areas.
Volume computations.
Expand or update existing models with new survey data.
Import and export of ASCII files.
Correcting measurements.
Visualization of measurements, in colors.
Comparing grid models and creating differential models.
Extracting profiles.
In the grid model editor next to the standard grid model a geoid model
grid model can be generated. This geoid model can be used in the
coordinate system to correct the satellite ellipsoid heights to the correct
local heights (see page 93). Two different geoid model grid models can
be generated, one with the satellite ellipsoid coordinates and one with the
grid projection coordinates. See the Import page on page 578 to create a
geoid model grid model.
From PDS2000 version 3.6.0.7 onwards the grid model contains also an
X and Y offset for the Z Minimum and Z Maximum. This offset is from the
center of the cell. From now on it is possible to plot the Z Minimum and Z
Maximum on the right location and not in the center of the cell. When
contours are generated with the Z Minimum or Z Maximum also the right
location is used and not the center of the cell. These locations are not
visible for the user and are only used internally in the grid model.
Grid models from PDS2000 version 3.6.0.6 or earlier can still be used but
the Z Minimum and Z Maximum will have no offset.
The new grid models can be used in earlier versions but the offset for the
Z Minimum and Z maximum will not work.
Figure 18-1
The grid model editor can be started with Processing > Grid Model Editor
from the menu bar or with
from the toolbar of the Control Center.
With the grid model editor grid models can be created and edited. A
number of actions are available for model computations and editing.
Multiple models can be open in the editor simultaneously, but only one
model is active and editable. The models are managed in a Displays
window which can be opened with View > Displays. Close a model by
closing the window or with File > Close. It will only remove it from the
display, but the model is still available in the Displays window with its own
It is advisable to make the list of grid models in the Displays window not
too big. Each time when with
from the toolbar in the Control Center
the grid model editor is opened all the grid models in the Displays window
will be opened. This can result in the fact that the grid model editor cannot
open or opens very slow. So remove the not used grid models from the
list in the Displays window. Better is to use the combo box in the top left
of the grid model editor to open one of the other available grid models.
With
(2D) and
(3D) in the toolbar of the grid model editor the view
of the active model can be set in 2D or 3D. In the 3D View the standard
3D view navigation can be used (see page 64).
There are different ways to create a grid model; during on-line logging,
with the option Create Model (see chapter Create Model on page 551
for more information) or with the create or import option in the grid model
editor.
Show Spotlight ( )
Toggles the spotlight window on/off in the 3D view. It is also possible
to toggle with the keys Shift O.
With the spotlight window, the light intension and light source location
in the viewer can be modified.
Figure 18-2
Spotlight window
Click on the yellow ball and move it around in the circle. How further
away from the center how less intense the light will be. The location of
the yellow ball in the circle gives the location of the light source.
Pan ( )
Toggles the pan option on/off. When pan is active, keep the left mouse
button in and move the mouse to pan through the data.
Measure ( )
Measure a distance between a selected point and the cursor.
Save Snapshot ( )
An image of the view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Save as GeoTIFF
An image of the view can be saved as a geo-referenced TIFF file, only
in the 2D view. The file is compressed with the LZW compression. The
sun illumination setting will be used to generate the GeoTIFF.
Interactive Selection ( )
If checked, it is possible to select items in the 2D view with the mouse.
Edit Mode ( )
In the 2D view a route or clipping polygon can be edited. See for an
explanation of the edit mode the chapter about the user maps on page
398.
Draw Profile
Draw a track guidance route in the 2D view. From this route a profile
will be extracted and shown in a separate view.
Draw Route
A track guidance route can be drawn in the 2D view.
Draw Polygon
A clipping polygon can be drawn in the 2D or 3D view.
It is possible to draw more clipping polygons. If an existing name is
used the existing polygon will be removed by the new one.
Save as Defaults
Save the settings of the 2D view. The next time the grid model editor is
opened the same settings will be used.
Create Detail View (
)
Select in the 3D view the type of view that has to be created; a Box
view or a Profile view.
difference model.
It is the same window as explained in the Plan View (see page 403),
except there is no Color Z Values options. For a grid model the Z value
can only be relative to Chart Datum.
Layer Control ( )
The Layers window with all the background and foreground layers that
are selected for the grid model editor. New layers can be added,
existing layers can be removed or modified.
Properties ( )
The properties of the view.
Next to the view properties, all the attributes of the selected layers of
the Layer Control are available.
18.3 Actions
The different actions on the grid model data are grouped and located
under one of the tabs in the left pane.
Create (see below)
Info (see page 566)
Edit (see page 567)
Filter (see page 571)
Update (see page 573)
Export (see page 574)
Import (see page 577)
Operations (see page 578)
Interpolate (see page 587)
By selecting an existing grid model in the combo box above the Create
tab the other tabs become available again.
Figure 18-3
Computation selection
In a tree the computation(s) of the selected data type is/are
displayed.
When only one computation is available in the file set then
PDS2000 will automatically select this computation and the tree
will be grayed out.
When more than one computation is available then the tree is
accessible and the user has to select which computation has to
be used for the grid model. With the Ctrl-key more than one
computation can be selected.
Other data formats
Click on
and an identical dialog appears as
described in the chapter Create Model on page 554. Run through
this dialog and the data will be selected for the grid model.
No Data
Select to create an empty model.
Clipping polygon
If only a part of the selected data has to be used for the grid model
select a clipping polygon or draw a new polygon with the option in the
context menu. Only the selected data inside the clipping polygon will
be used to create a grid model. When no clipping polygon is selected
all the selected data in the files or from the data selection will be used.
Model definition
Before the grid model can be created the grid model has to be defined.
Grid model type
In the combo box the available grid model types will be available. If
it is only one type then the box is grayed out.
The types that are available depend on the selected data; f.i.
Multibeam data gives as grid model type <Generic> and
Backscatter Grid Model while Sidescan data gives only Backscatter
Grid Model.
Cell size
Specify the cell size used for the new grid model.
Check the option 10% of depth for PDS2000 to calculate the cell
size. This cell size will depend on the average water depth in the
data.
Cell data
Check which cell data types have to be created in the grid model.
The cell data types that are grayed out are the minimum
requirement for creating a grid model.
Click on
to create the grid model, give a new name for the grid
model and the data will be imported.
Figure 18-4
Grid model
It shows the cell size and the statistical information of the grid model.
Cell size
The cell size of the grid model.
Used cells
Total number of cells in use.
Used area
Number of used cells multiplies by the surface of a cell gives the
total used area.
Empty area
Area of cells without data. This are the empty cells in the grid
model rectangular around the data.
Z min (deepest)
Deepest found value of the data type Z Average.
Z max (highest)
Highest found value of the data type Z Average.
Z average
It is (Hit count x Z average) / Total hit count.
Hit count and Z average are per cell. This means that for each data
point in a cell the Z average of that cell is added to the total.
Z standard dev
The standard deviation of all the data points used to create the grid
model. With the information in each cell (Hit count, Z Average and
Standard Deviation) all the data points can be retrieved.
The standard deviation can only be computed when Z Average
exists as data type in the grid model.
Cells z std dev
The standard deviation of the standard deviations of each cell.
The formula: Cells z std dev = ((all cells std) / Number of used
cells).
Total hit count
Sum of all values of the data type Hit count. This is the number of
data points used in the grid model.
Latest time
The last observed time of the data type Time. Only when the data
type Time exist in the grid model.
Cell info
Select a clipping polygon and click
the data inside the clipping polygon.
In the Edit page, options are available to delete and interpolate one or
more cells in the grid model.
In Edit mode in the 3D mode for editing the left mouse button has to be
used and for moving around in the view the mouse wheel can be used.
See also the navigation in 3D views on page 64.
Figure 18-5
None
The Edit mode is switched off.
Delete
The selected cells of the grid model will be deleted.
There are three methods to delete one or more cells:
4. Delete one point by clicking on the cell with the cursor in
combination with the Ctrl key.
5. Delete more cells by placing the cursor on the right location. Keep
the left mouse button pressed in combination with the Ctrl key and
move the cursor over the grid model data. It looks like erasing the
data.
6. A different method to delete more cells is by drawing a polygon
around the points that have to be deleted. All the data that is
present inside the polygon will be deleted. The polygon can be a
polygon with line segments or it can be a free drawn polygon
(lasso).
Interpolate circular
Interpolate the gaps in the grid model with the circular interpolation. In
this interpolation all the Z data types (the Z Average, the Z Maximum
and Z Minimum, if available in the grid model) will be interpolated.
Draw with the mouse a lasso / clipping polygon and the gaps in the
lasso / polygon will be interpolated immediately.
Max gap
The maximum gap in the grid model for which the interpolation is
valid. If the gap is bigger than the max. gap then no interpolation
will be done.
Click on this button when the complete grid model has to be
interpolated with the circular interpolation.
Delete and Interpolation
Delete one or more cells and immediately the deleted cells will be
interpolated with a circular interpolation.
Draw a lasso / polygon and all the cells inside the lasso / polygon will
be deleted and immediately all the deleted cells will be interpolated.
Cell
Click on a cell in the view to display a pop-up dialog with the
information of the cell. Only the data types that are present in the grid
model will be displayed.
Figure 18-6
Figure 18-7
Clipping polygon
Select a clipping polygon, and set the condition to either Inside or
Outside.
The criterion that a grid cell is inside or outside the clipping
polygon is when the center point of the grid cell is inside or
outside.
Data type
Select the data type, a condition operand and a comparing
value. The operand can be > (bigger) or <= (smaller or equal).
After the filter is defined check the option Display to see which cells
meets the criteria of the filter. In the 2D view a red diagonal line is
drawn in each cell that meets the criteria and in the 3D view the
cells that meets the criteria are red and all the other cells are green.
Show Preview.
Tick the checkbox to see which grid model cells will be made
empty with the selected grid model filter.
Click on
to make the cells empty which match with the criteria in
the filter. When the user confirm the process, it is not reversible!!
When one of the edit options is selected the Edit tab gets a red box as
identification (
) that the editor is in edit mode. When switch
over to a different tab the edit mode is not active anymore, but the edit
status is stored. Switch back to the edit tab the red box is displayed again
and the edit status is recovered.
Switch the edit mode off by clicking with the right mouse button in the
view, the cursor will change back to an arrow. Off course the edit mode
can also be switched off in the 3D Edit page by selecting None.
Figure 18-8
Figure 18-9
Filter Options
Evaluation area size
Select an evaluation area size; for each type of area a different size
for the despiking is needed. For each area a mean is calculated
and with the threshold a spike can be detected in the area.
Threshold
The threshold is a kind of standard deviation for each area.
For an irregular area a small threshold (f.i.0.5) will give more spikes
than a threshold of 5. How bigger the threshold the more
irregularity is accepted as no spike.
Selection area
The despiking can be done for the complete grid model with the
options Entire Model. The spikes are found after on
is clicked.
With Select area select an area of the grid model by drawing a
lasso around the area with spikes. The spikes are found when the
lasso is drawn.
or
The Find Spikes button is only active when as selection area the
entire model is selected, or when in a selected area the threshold is
changed.
Click on the button to find the spikes in the grid model.
The Find & Remove Spikes button is only available when the option
Show Preview is unchecked; the detected spikes will be removed
immediately after they are detected.
When Show Preview is checked the spikes become visible. It is
possible that an area in the grid model shows spikes that are not really
spikes, f.i. a wreck.
Click on the button and draw a lasso around that area and it will be
ignored in the spike detection and it gets it original grid model colors
back or becomes green.
When Show Preview is checked the spikes become visible in the view.
Click on the button to remove the spikes. The spikes will be replaced
by interpolated data from the cells around the spike(s).
Figure 18-10
Clipping polygon
A clipping polygon is not required. If a clipping polygon is not available
it should be made first, this can be done with the option Draw Polygon
in the context menu.
Figure 18-11
The grid model will be updated with new data from a different grid model.
If a clipping polygon is selected the update will take place inside the
polygon. The result of the update depends on the method:
Replace
The old data will be replaced with new data. This is only in the cells
where new data is available.
Combine
The values of the data types are combined. A new Z Average is
computed with the updated Hit Count, which is the sum of the old and
new hit count. The data type Time will be the latest time.
Minimum Z average
The existing Z Average is replaced with the deepest Z Average of
the two grid models.
Maximum Z average
The existing Z Average is replaced with the highest Z Average of the
two grid models.
Add Z
The Z Average is added to the existing Z Average.
Subtract Z
The Z Average is subtracted from the existing Z Average.
Click on
Figure 18-12
The data in the grid model will be replaced with the data from the 3D
model. This update is only in the cells where data from the 3D model is
available. If a clipping polygon is selected the update will take place only
inside the polygon.
Click on
Figure 18-13
Data type
Select one of the available data types for the export.
Clipping polygon
A clipping polygon is not required. If a clipping polygon is not available
it should be made first, this can be done with the option Draw Polygon
in the context menu.
Figure 18-14
This function exports the grid model data to an ESRI text file. The ESRI
format needs a rectangle parallel to the X and Y grid. If no clipping
polygon is selected PDS2000 will generate a rectangle around the data. If
a clipping polygon is selected PDS2000 will generate a rectangle around
the polygon.
Each cell in the rectangle will give a Z-value, where for the filled cells the
selected data type will be used and for the empty cells a No data value
can be specified. The cells outside a selected clipping polygon will be
treated as empty cells. The number of decimals for every Z-value can be
specified.
Click on
Figure 18-15
Export to OpenGIS
This function exports the grid model data to a KML or a KMZ file. Both
these files can be opened in an OpenGIS system, i.e Google Earth (see
also page 239 in the Project DataBase in the Explorer).
The KML file contains the X and Y which are converted to WGS84
coordinates. The conversion is from grid coordinates to the WGS84
coordinates and is done according the project coordinate system. The Z
value is the value of the selected data type. The KML file gives a point
cloud with Z values.
The KMZ file contains a compressed GeoTIFF file of the grid model.
If a clipping polygon is selected the export is only from the data inside the
polygon.
Click on
Figure 18-16
Export to GeoTIFF
The data from a standard grid model, a side scan model or a snippets
model can be exported to a compressed GeoTIFF file. The GeoTIFF file
is compressed with the LZW compression. The sun illumination setting
will be used to generate the GeoTIFF.
This file can be draped over a grid model in the 3D views of PDS2000 by
adding a 3D Draping Layer to that view.
Check the option View in 3D, select a grid model that will be used for the
draping and after the grid model is exported the 3D grid model editor will
open with the selected grid model and the GeoTIFF file draped over it.
Select one of the available data types from the grid model. This data type
will be displayed in the GeoTIFF file.
Click on
Figure 18-17
Update package
An ASCII file will be generated containing the cells of the grid model
which are different from the cells of the selected original grid model. If
only a part of the grid model has to be generated a clipping polygon can
be used.
The ASCII file will contain XYZ data of the following cells.
Cells with data that is not present in the original grid model.
Cells with a different value than the value in the original grid model.
Empty cells which have a value in the original grid model. Instead of a
Z value a code is generated.
This update package can be imported in the Acquisition to update the
active grid model. This can be done with Tools > Import Grid Model
Update (see 283).
Click on
Figure 18-18
be used for the grid model. With the Ctrl-key more than one
computation can be selected.
Other data formats
Click on
and an identical dialog appears as
described in the chapter Create Model on page 554. Run through
this dialog and the data will be selected for import.
If the grid model in the editor is a geoid model grid model, geoidal
data can be imported through an ASCII file. The import data in the
geoid model grid model should be an ASCII file with longitude,
latitude and geoidal separation (satellite coordinates) or with
easting, northing and geoidal separation (grid coordinates).
Geoid model grid model (satellite coordinates):
If the geoid model grid
model (satellite coordinates)
is created, the cell size
should be defined in
degrees (for example 0.01
or 0.001).
For the geoid model grid model (satellite coordinates) the ASCII file
should contain for the X and Y the longitude and latitude in WGS84
coordinates and for the Z the geoidal separation. The format for the
ASCII file should be:
003.751823 052.451954 41.59
where the longitude and latitude are in degrees and decimal
degrees. So the X and Y in the grid model are in degrees and not in
meters.
Geoid model grid model (grid coordinates):
For the geoid model grid model (grid coordinates) the ASCII file
should contain for the X and Y the easting and northing in
projection coordinates and for the Z the geoidal separation. The
format for the ASCII file should be:
128945.32 445876.45 41.59
where the easting and northing are in meters.
The geoid model grid model should be completely filled between all
the imported points. So between the points the empty cells has to
be interpolated.
Clipping polygon
If only a part of the selected data has to be used for the grid model
select a clipping polygon or draw a new polygon with the option in the
context menu. Only the selected data inside the clipping polygon will
be used to create a grid model. When no clipping polygon is selected
all the selected data in the files or from the data selection will be used.
Click on
Figure 18-19
This method regenerates an existing color table where the maximum and
minimum values are taken from the grid model.
Generate color table
Select an existing color table that has to be regenerated.
With
the selected color table can be edited in the standard
color table generator. See page 244 for more information on the
color table generator.
Data Type
Select one of the existing data types in the grid model. The maximum
and minimum values of the selected data type will be used as
maximum and minimum in the color table.
Clipping polygon
Select a clipping polygon if the color table has to be regenerated from
the maximum and minimum value inside the clipping polygon.
Colors
Enter the number of colors that have to be used in the color table.
Selecting a larger number of colors makes the color transition
smoother.
Range
The table can be made in colors with Hues or in shades of grey with
Greys.
Reversed order
The color for the maximum value is always red and for the minimum
blue. Check Reversed order to interchange the colors of the maximum
and minimum values.
Click on
Figure 18-20
Apply a correction to a grid model means that the existing data types (Z
Average, Z Minimum and Z Maximum) are corrected following the
equation:
New value data type = (Old value data type) x (Factor) + (Offset)
Change the depths to heights or vice versa by setting the factor to -1 and
the offset to 0.
Click on
Figure 18-21
For all the cells inside the clipping polygon the values of the selected
data type will be set to the value as entered.
For all the cells inside the clipping polygon the values of the selected
data type will be deleted.
Figure 18-22
This option is to create a grid model with a difference cell size from the
active grid model by resampling the data in the grid model.
The resampling will be done for all the data types available in the active
grid model. Select a clipping polygon if only from a part of the grid model
a new grid model with a different cell size has to be created.
Click on
, select an existing grid model or give a new name for
the resampled grid model and the model will be created.
Figure 18-23
This option is to create a difference model from the active model and a
reference model by the following equation:
Difference model= (Active model) (Fixed level)
or
Difference model= (Active model) [(Reference model) + (Offset)]
Select the data type for which a difference model has to be calculated and
select a clipping polygon if only from a part of the grid model a difference
model has to be created.
Reference
As the reference level two options are possible.
Fixed level
This option generates a temporary grid model with a depth/height
as is entered. The grid model will be generated around the active
model.
Model
With this option two different model types can be selected, a grid
model and a 3D model. If necessary an offset to the reference
model can be entered.
For a good comparison the
reference model needs to
be a reliable grid model of
the seabed and not a fixed
level or 3D design model.
Report type
Select the option IHO PDF Report when a report has to be generated
in which both the grid models are compared according the IHO orders.
In this report for each IHO order the numbers of points above and
below the IHO error limits are calculated and displayed.
The report will be opened in the PDS2000 Reporter. Select in the
PDS2000 Reporter the File > Save as to save the report as a PDF
file in the Reports folder.
Select the option None if no report has to be generated.
Click on
, select an existing grid model or give a new name for
the difference model and the difference model will be created.
Model
With this option two different model types can be selected, a grid
model and a 3D model. If necessary an offset can be entered to the
reference model.
Second reference
Next to the first reference level a second one can be selected. Select
one of the options how to combine both reference levels or not.
None
No second reference level is used.
Highest
For each grid model cell the highest of the two reference levels is
used for the volume computation.
Lowest
For each grid model cell the lowest of the two reference levels is
used for the volume computation.
When Highest or Lowest is selected, select the model type and the
filename for the grid model or 3D model.
Report type
After the volume computation a report can be generated.
None
No report will be generated, only a volume computation results window
will be opened (see below).
PDF report
One report will be generated with for each selected clipping polygon a
separate result. The report will be opened in the PDS2000 Reporter.
Select in the PDS2000 Reporter the File > Save as to save the
report as a PDF file.
CSV report
A CSV file will be generated with for each selected clipping polygon
the computed volumes.
Click on
to start the computation. If a PDF or CSV report is
selected first the Create Report dialog will be opened.
Figure 18-24
report)
Create Report dialog (left for the PDF report and right for the CSV
Report
Enter a name that will be used in the header of the report.
View report
If checked, the PDF report opens in the PDS2000 Reporter after
the volume computation is finished. With File > Save as in the
PDS2000 Reporter the report can be saved.
If checked, the CSV report will be opened in for instance Microsoft
Excel.
If Unchecked, the report will be saved with a default filename.
Images
For the PDF report images of the result and the model can be added
to the report.
Create images
Check the option if in the PDF report images of the result and the
model has to be displayed.
The width and height of the images can be defined in number of
pixels.
Difference color table
Select a color table to display an image of the difference model with
the selected color table.
Click on
to start the computation. After the computation is
finished the volume computation results window will be opened. It will only
be opened when no report is created. If a report is created and the option
View report is checked the report will be opened.
Figure 18-25
Area below
The area below the reference level(s).
Area without data
The area where reference data is available but in the grid model no
data of the selected data type is present.
Area without ref
The area where no reference data is available.
Average layer thickness
The thickness of the volume difference over the area above and area
below together.
Figure 18-26
Extract profiles
Profiles will be extracted from the grid model over the selected runlines.
Data type
Select the data type of the grid model that will be used for the for the
profiles.
Keep Ctrl pressed to select
multiple lines or use Shift
to select a block of lines.
Runlines
Select the runline file for the profile calculations. Select the lines of the
runline over which the profiles have to be extracted.
Use section
Check this option when a profile have to be extracted over a part of
the runline. Enter the start and end point on the runline between
where the profile has to be extracted.
Average profile
If the option Adjacent lines is checked then for each point in the profile
an average is calculated using the points with the same distance on
the adjacent line(s). The user has to specify how much adjacent lines
on both sides are used to calculate the average value for a point in the
profile. This only works if the runline has adjacent lines.
Step size
If the option User defined is not checked then the profiles are
calculated from the centers of the grid cells that crosses the runline. If
the option is checked then the user has to specify a step size and for
each point on the line a weighted mean is calculated using the four
nearby grid cells.
Click on
to be specified.
Figure 18-27
Multiple displays
Each selected runline gets its own profile view with in the title bar the
name of the runline.
Single display
All the profiles of the selected runlines appear in one profile view, each
one with a different color.
PDS2000 Log Data file
For each runline a PDS2000 log data file will be create in the log data
directory.
ASCII file
All the profiles of the selected runlines are saved in one text file. For
each profile the first line has the name of the runline followed by XYZ
data and the distance along the runline.
At the bottom some extra information can be added to the file; the
Mean, the Minimum, the Maximum and/or Standard deviation of the Zvalue.
Another way to extract a profile from a grid model is with the option Draw
Profile in the context menu of the 2D view or the toolbar option Create
Detail View > Create Profile View (
) in the 3D view.
Figure 18-28
Data type
Select one of the available data types for the interpolation.
Clipping polygon
A clipping polygon is not required. If a clipping polygon is not available
it should be made first, this can be done with the option Draw Polygon
in the context menu.
Figure 18-29
Interpolate circular
The circular interpolation is usually used for small gaps in the data. These
small gaps can be caused for example by the outer beams of a multibeam
survey.
Max. gap
This is the maximum distance over where an interpolation is valid.
The interpolation routine search for every empty cell in the clipping
polygon area or in the complete grid model. It will check if original data is
available within a Max gap distance, and if so, it fills the empty cell with a
weighted mean of the original data.
Depending on the size of the interpolation area and the power of the
computer, this method can take considerable time. The best way to use
this option is when the gaps are small and there are lots of filled cells, like
multibeam data.
Click on
Figure 18-30
Interpolate triangular
The triangular interpolation is usually used for medium gaps in the data.
Max.gap
This is the maximum distance over where an interpolation is valid.
The interpolation routine takes three steps:
1. Find the extents of the data.
2. Create a TIN model.
3. Interpolate in the triangles of the TIN model.
Click on
Figure 18-31
Interpolate directional
The directional interpolation is usually used for big gaps in the data.
These big gaps can be caused for example by sailing along runlines with
a single beam echo sounder.
Max.gap
This is the maximum distance over where an interpolation is valid.
Route
A route has to be selected or made. A quick way to make a route is
with the option Draw Route in the context menu of the 2D view.
Interpolation takes place in the direction of the route. Bends in the
route are allowed.
Perpendicular
Check this option to set the interpolation direction to across the
route.
Click on
Figure 18-32
Interpolate singlebeam
Figure 18-33
Port Export
As can be seen in the above figure there are six options tabs defined. By
default these tabs are named as:
PES Options
Exp1 Options
Exp 2 Options
Gis Options
Brabo Options
Dredge Options
All these tabs have the same functionality. The default names are as
shown above since the port export function was developed for the
PDS2000 Port Entrance Simulation application as currently used by the
port of Antwerp. However the names of these six Options tabs could be
defined/changed by the user.
As there are six tabs it also means six different export definitions could be
made. See section options tabs on page 593. for a description of the
Options tabs.
Besides the Options tabs there is also a Main Grid Model tab. A main
grid model which could be different as the current grid model could be
selected in this tab. See section Main Grid Model tab below for a
description.
Every options tab have an indication led which will be green if a data
selection type is made in the associated tab. The led will be red if no
selection is made to export files or the export is not enabled.
Figure 18-34
Figure 18-35
The table below summarizes the options to setup the Main Grid Model.
Function
Description
Click at
and browse to the source folder of
the Main grid model and select the required
main DTM file.
When the checkbox is ticked the above
selected Main Grid Model will be
updated/merged first with a selected survey
grid model before export. This grid model is
selectable in the grid model editor.
Click at
and browse to the source folder
where an E-mail batch file is saved and open
this file. This batch file (.bat) is a file PDS2000
needed to send a mail to the mail address as
defined in the above E-mail results to field.
As this depends by the mail server the
customer needs to define this bat file in order
to send the mail. As an example the blat file
could be used. Blat is a small efficient SMTP
command line mailer for windows. Download
the file from the internet and install it.
With this blat file installed in a specified folder
the e-mail batch file looks like for example
C:\Program Files\blat311\full\blat.exe
server exchange server f mail@mail.com
t0 %1 subject %2 body %3 attacht %4
Contact your IT department for details.
Click start Export to export the Grid Model
Figure 18-36
Options tab
Figure 18-37
ASCII Export
This function exports the grid model data to an ASCII text file. Each cell
with the selected data type will give an X,Y and Z, where X and Y are the
center of the cell and Z the selected data type. A comma will be used as
separator. If a clipping polygon is selected the export is only from data
inside the polygon. Tick the checkbox(es) of the required exported data
type(s). Click or to change the sequence order of the data types in
the generated ASCII file. The Data type in top of the data type list will be
the first after the position in the ASCII file.
Figure 18-38
Check the option Add precise MIN/MAX Position to add the precise
position for the Z minimum and Z maximum.
Check the option Export as depth when the Z value(s) have to be treated
as depth instead of heights. For the Z Average, Z Minimum and Z
Maximum the values will be multiplied with -1.
Click
18.3.12 Contour
Figure 18-39
Contour
With this function a contour could be created from the grid model data.
Data type
Select data type.
Clipping Polygon
Select a clipping polygon. The contour will be created within this selected
polygon. A clipping polygon is not required. A polygon could be made by
selection of the option Draw Polygon in the context menu of the view.
Contour Definition
Select a Contour Definition.
Click
to create a new Contour definition. Click
to edit
an existing Contour definition. Refer to the section Contour definitions on
page 227 for contour definition details.
Suppress contours shorter than
Suppress contours shorter as specified value.
Smoothing window
Smooth generated contour from no smoothing to maximum smoothing
with 7 steps in between
Label parameters
This are label associated parameters.
Be aware to tick the show labels checkbox in the contour properties to
display the contour values.
Figure 18-40
Decimal:
Subscript
Superscript
Figure 18-41
Checkboxes
The Font, style and size of the label could be changed with
associated drop-down menus.
Figure 18-42
Click
to create a contour DXF file and to display
the contours at the grid model data.
Figure 18-43
Contours
19.1 General
With the TIN model viewer TIN models can be created and visualized.
The viewer allows data to be presented in a 3D view. This 3D view is
intended to be only for visualization of the data. There are no functions to
modify the data in the TIN model viewer.
The TIN model viewer can be started with Processing > TIN Model Viewer
from the menu bar of the Control Center.
Figure 191
19.2.1 File
The menu File has the functions to create, open, save, export and print
views and show the properties of the view. Most of these functions are
standard functions, except the export and the properties.
File > New
Under this option a number of sources are available to create a new
TIN model or to create a new color table.
Blank Model
A blank model will be generated, which can be used in combination
with the drag & drop function to add data.
From ASCII File
All the existing ASCII files in the project folder are available. From
this ASCII file a TIN model can be created.
From XYZ Point File
All the existing XYZ files in the project folder are available. These
XYZ files are the Cleaned XYZ Log Data files, which is one of the
available logging formats. See page 139 for more information about
cleaned XYZ log data.
Color Table
Create a new color table with the standard PDS2000 color table
generator (see page 244).
File > Export to ASCII File
The current file will be saved in ASCII format, with the extension ASC.
The format is X, Y, Z.
File > Properties
The properties of the current TIN model will be shown.
Figure 192
General
The number of triangles and the number of XYZ points in the
model.
Bounding Box
The coordinates (in projection grid) of the lower left hand corner
and the upper right hand corner of the box that surrounds the
model.
19.2.2 Edit
The menu Edit has only the function Empty Cache. In case the operation
seems to become slow or the computer is running low in memory, the
data cache can be deleted. No data will be lost, all the data can be
reloaded from the database.
Figure 193
Empty cache
19.2.3 Tools
The Tools menu has the following functions:
Figure 194
Decimation parameters
Feature Angle
Figure 195
Feature angle
When the feature angle is greater than the maximum feature angle,
the shared edge (the thick red line) is called a feature edge. This
feature edge is used to classify the vertex.
Maximum error
A simple vertex is a data point that is completely surrounded by
triangles.
Simple Vertex
Figure 196
Simple vertex
3D Distance
Figure 197
The 3D distance is the distance from the interior edge vertex to the 3D
line formed by the endpoints of the two feature edges. The interior
edge vertex is removed if the 3D distance is smaller than the
maximum error.
If the option Remove boundary points is checked then also the
boundary vertex go through the decimation. A boundary vertex is a
vertex that is not completely surrounded by triangles.
3D Distance
Boundary Vertex
Figure 198
Boundary vertex
This filter is reversible because no data points are removed from the
model. Give a high value for the maximum edge length and the model
shown in the viewer is reverted to the situation before the filtering.
Figure 199
The start and end depth and a contour interval have to be set to start the
generation of the contours.
F5 or
Ctrl + Left mouse button
Zoom Out
Move Left
Move Right
Move Up
Move Down
Rotate Left
Rotate Right
Rotate Up
Rotate Down
When the TIN model is rotated the TIN model viewer automatically
switches to Grid model and return to the TIN model when the rotation
stops.
Model Display Mode
There are three display modes available:
Solid; the normal view mode.
Wireframe; shows the outline of the triangles of the TIN or Grid model.
Vertex; shows only the vertex points, the points that build the TIN
model.
Show Contours
Toggle between showing and hiding the contours (when available) in
the view.
Show Clip
Toggle between showing and hiding a clip in the view. A clip is a small
overall top view placed in the lower left corner of the view.
Show Coordinate Axis
Toggle between showing and hiding the coordinate axis in the view.
The origin can be set with the next function.
Coordinate Axis Origin
Select one of the places for the origin of the coordinate axis: Center,
Front Center, Front Left, Front Right, After Center, After Left and After
Right.
Rotate Light Source
Keep the left mouse button pressed and move the mouse around. The
new location of the light source becomes the location when the button
is released.
Save Snapshot
The current view can be saved as a JPG or BMP file.
Edit Color Table
This function opens the standard PDS2000 color table generator (see
page 244).
Properties
Shows the properties and attributes of the current view.
The only item that is not discussed before is the Vertical
exaggeration. This is a multiplication factor for the vertical or Z-axis of
the model.
20 Plot
Plot 607
Figure 20-1
On the next page in the wizard the main project has to be selected. If
other PDS2000 projects are available with the same geodetic settings, the
data can be selected from those projects as well. Data from projects with
different geodetic settings cannot be combined.
Click on
wizard.
Figure 20-2
and PDS2000 will create the plot project and close the
The project tree contains everything that is part of the project. Next to the
project tree is the overview window, which consists of two sections. The
left section shows the overview tree, while the overview plot is shown in
the right section. The overview plot also has a toolbar.
608 Plot
Figure 20-3
Any data that is added will show up in the tree and in the plot of the
overview window.
Figure 20-4
After adding one or more data files to the overview window it is possible
to create a plan view. A plan view defines a rectangular area in the world,
and is used to position plan panels in a plot. It is not necessary to define a
plan view when only profiles have to be plotted.
Plot 609
Select Place Plan View from the context menu and the shape of the
cursor changes to a cross. Draw a rectangle in the overview plot to create
a plan view. Click and hold the left mouse button to start drawing the
rectangle, and release the mouse button to finalize the rectangle. The
plan view properties will appear and the exact properties can be modified.
Figure 20-5
The new plan view is added to the project tree and displayed in the
overview plot. It is usually a good idea to give the plan view a more
descriptive name than the default one. The name can be changed in the
properties of the context menu of the plan view.
Figure 20-6
Cancel any visual
operation by pressing the
Esc key on the keyboard.
Move a plan view by selecting it with the mouse, and then dragging it
around the plot. Change the size of the plan view by selecting one of the
handles and dragging it with the mouse.
Click on
from the toolbar or select View > Rotate from the menu bar to
rotate a plan view. The handles of the selected plan view will change. By
dragging one of the handles with the mouse the plan view can be rotated
around its center point. Click on
or select View > Rotate again to
finish the rotation of the plan view.
610 Plot
Edit the plan view properties by double-clicking the plan view in either the
project tree or in the overview plot. The properties can also be displayed
through the context menu of a plan view.
Plan views can also be added directly to the project from the project tree,
without using the overview window. With a right mouse click on Plan
Views in the project tree a plan view can be added. In that case the
position, size and rotation must be entered manually.
Figure 20-7
Figure 20-8
Plot 611
Snap to grid; the panels will snap to the grid lines when positioning or
resizing them.
Printer Output
How the plot will be printed.
Print to fill page; will scale the plot so that it fits on the printer paper.
Print exact; will print the plot to the exact scale.
DXF Export
Select the type of DXF export, with 256 colors or with true colors.
The true colors are only supported from AutoCAD 2004 onwards.
Options
Display Z coordinates as depths; change the sign of the height values
in the survey data to depth values.
Optimum text angle; the preferred viewing angle for text. It prevents
text annotations from being upside down when looking at the plot in
the preferred direction.
Keywords
A keyword is a piece of text between % characters that gets replaced
by user-defined text. Add or remove any keyword label and its user
text here. Keywords that are common to all plots in a project can be
entered in the project options. See also Keywords on page 617.
When finished with the properties click on
and add it to the project.
Figure 20-9
612 Plot
Figure 20-10
From the context menu select Place Panel and then select the type of
panel to add. For example select Plan to place a plan panel. See on page
617 for an explanation of the available panels.
The cursor will change to a cross and a rectangle can be drawn in the plot
where the panel should come. After releasing the mouse button the new
panel will be added to the plot. A window will appear with the panels
properties.
Figure 20-11
The panels are displayed in the plot and in the plot tree. The properties of
a panel can be opened with a double click on the panel in the plot, in the
plot tree or through the context menu of the panel.
Hold the Shift key down to
disable snap to grid.
Select the panel with the mouse and by dragging the mouse the panel
can be moved around in the plot. Resize a panel by first selecting it, and
then grabbing one of the handles.
Plot 613
Figure 20-12
Layers that are not visible are indicated in the plot tree by a dark light
bulb. Panels that are locked against accidental movement are indicated
with a small pad lock.
614 Plot
Figure 20-13
Regenerating a plot
Click on
to cancel the regeneration process. It may take a while
before regeneration actually stops. When cancelled, the plot may be in a
partly generated state. For example, only half of a grid model may have
been rendered.
Any errors that occurred during regeneration will be displayed afterwards.
Figure 20-14
Regeneration errors
Plot 615
The window displays the errors of all plots in the current project. Errors
will automatically disappear when the problems are solved. If the user
does not want to see the errors, clear one or all the errors. If the errors
are not solved and the window is closed the text Plot needs to be
generated! will stay above the plot.
Figure 20-15 Overwrite suppression in action; behind the easting text are no
depth values plotted
When overwrite suppression is enabled for just one layer then no text of
that layer will overwrite other text of the layer. When enabled for several
layers, the text of those layers will not overwrite each other as well.
616 Plot
20.2.4 Templates
Plot templates are the same as regular plots. They are only separated
from normal plots by their file name extension, which is .[tpl].plt instead
of just .plt. The project tree displays the templates separate.
Templates can be used when creating a new plot. Check the option Copy
existing plot, and then choose the desired plot template from the file
dialog. To show only template files in the file dialog, set the Files of type
field to Template Files.
20.2.5 Keywords
Keywords are special tokens that get replaced by user-defined text. A
keyword is a piece of text between % characters that can be present in
text boxes or in the text of DXF files.
Select Edit > Project Options from the menu bar to add or modify the 'user
text for the keywords. The keywords set in the Project Options are
project wide keywords. Several keywords are already added to the
keywords list and cannot be modified. These keywords are: project
number, project name, coordinate system, current time, current date and
plot project.
Plot specific keywords can be added or modified in the Plot Properties of
the plot. By default the plot name is added and cannot be modified.
Plot 617
Figure 20-16
Figure 20-17
The Mapping page of the plan panel properties requires a plan view.
When the option Auto fit to log data is checked a plan view will be
generated that fits the log data that is added as layer.
If plan views are generated in the overview (see page 609) then instead
off the auto fit option an existing plan view can be selected. The center
point and rotation of the plan view will be used directly, and are displayed
on the page.
618 Plot
Labels can be plotted from data in grid models, TIN models or logdata
files. The labels are plotted on their own location as specified in the data
files. For instance in the grid model the Z Average is plotted in the center
of the cell, while the Z Minimum and Z Maximum are plotted at the actual
location per cell. Also for the contouring the actual position of the data is
used. The labels can be defined in the Label Mode page and Label Font
page of the plan panel properties.
In the Color Table page the color table can be selected that will be used
to plot depth data in color.
Figure 20-18
Figure 20-19
With the North Arrow page of the properties it is possible to select the
type of north arrow. The direction of the arrow is taken from the selected
plan panel. When a north arrow is attached to the panel, its position will
be relative to the bottom left hand corner of the plan panel.
It is possible to design your own north arrow with a CAD application.
Export the arrow to a DXF file, and place it in the NorthArrows folder of
the General folder of the PDS2000 installation (see page 16).
Plot 619
Figure 20-20
Figure 20-21
The profile panel properties have separate mapping pages for the
horizontal and vertical axis. The horizontal and vertical options that are
available depend on the selection made in the Mode option.
Scale to Fit
Everything is calculated automatically to fit the extents of the profile.
Fixed Start and End Value
Enter a start and end value. The scale is calculated automatically.
Fixed Scale
Enter a scale and a start value. The end value is calculated
automatically.
Projected
This option is only available for horizontal mapping. The horizontal axis
will be mapped to a specified plan panel.
620 Plot
On the Horizontal page the option Coordinate origin defines where zero
on the X-axis starts. Note that Route intersection only works with
runlines of the type Route Crosslines.
Figure 20-22
The profile volume panel displays multiple profile boxes in a single panel.
A selection of runlines is used for the profiles. Each line is placed into a
separate profile box.
Figure 20-23
Plot 621
Figure 20-24 Distance Scale and Depth Scale pages of the profile volume
panel properties
The mapping of the profile boxes is controlled by the Distance Scale and
Depth Scale pages of the profile volume panel properties. The pages
work slightly different than the Horizontal and Vertical pages in the profile
panel (see above).
In all the profile boxes the
same vertical axis
definition will be used.
There are four parameters to set for the Distance Scale: start value, end
value, box width and scale and four for the Depth Scale: minimum,
maximum, box height and scale. Select in the option Mode which of the
four parameters is automatically calculated, the other three can be
changed by the user.
In the profile volume properties are 3 different pages available to define
the design model and the design line with its colors and select the survey
data.
Figure 20-25
622 Plot
In the design model page the first and second reference level for the
volume computation can be selected. As type of reference a profile
design model, grid model and 3D model can be selected. Also a underand overdredge limit (tolerances in the End Area Volumes) can be
entered.
Figure 20-26
In this page the design line with its under- and overdredge line can be
defined. For the 4 areas the colors can be selected, by default the colors
are identical with the colors in the End Area Volumes.
Figure 20-27
In this page as data a grid model or a file set with log data files can be
selected.
Plot 623
Figure 20-28
The profile series panel displays multiple profile boxes in a single panel.
A selection of runlines is used for the profiles. Each line is placed into a
separate profile box.
Figure 20-29
properties
Distance Scale and Depth Scale pages of the profile series panel
The mapping of the profile boxes is controlled by the Distance Scale and
Depth Scale pages of the profile series panel properties. The pages work
slightly different than the Horizontal and Vertical pages in the profile panel
(see above).
In all the profile boxes the
same vertical axis
definition will be used.
624 Plot
There are four parameters to set for the Distance Scale: start value, end
value, box width and scale and four for the Depth Scale: minimum,
maximum, box height and scale. Select in the option Mode which of the
four parameters is automatically calculated, the other three can be
changed by the user.
Figure 20-30
The profile cross series panel displays multiple cross profile boxes in a
single panel.
A selection of runlines is used for the profiles. Each line is put into a
separate cross profile box.
Figure 20-31 Distance Scale and Depth Scale pages of the profile cross series
panel properties
The mapping of the profile boxes is controlled by the Distance Scale and
Depth Scale pages of the profile cross series panel properties. The pages
work the same as the Distance Scale and Depth Scale pages in the
profile series panel (see above).
Only here are three parameters to set for the Distance Scale: start value,
end value and scale. The box width in the Distance Scale page is defined
by the height of the panel as defined in the Position page. Four
parameters are to set for the Depth scale: minimum, maximum, box
height and scale. Select in the option Mode which of the three or four
parameters is automatically calculated, the other two or three can be
changed by the user.
Plot 625
Figure 20-32
The profile info panel displays the information of a profile panel, profile
series panel or a profile cross series panel.
The information consists of the X and Y scaling mode used, and a legend
of all profile layers used in the panel. Each layer is listed with its line color
and data file name.
Figure 20-33
Select in the Profile Info page for which profile panel the profile info panel
has to be generated.
Figure 20-34
A Text Block is the parent panel for one or more Text Boxes. It is used to
group several Text Boxes together so that they can be moved
simultaneously.
To add some text to the plot, first place a Text Block. Inside this panel,
place one or more Text Boxes that will contain the actual text.
In the Text Block panel with the context menu item Place Text Box a Text
Box is placed in the Text Block. The Text Box can only be placed
somewhere inside the parent Text Block.
626 Plot
Figure 20-35
In the Text page of the text box properties replace the default text Enter
label with the desired text.
The position of a text box is always relative to the lower left hand corner
of its parent text block.
Figure 20-36
Select in the DXF page the DXF file that has to be plotted. Use the
offsets, rotation and/or scale to place the data on the right location in the
panel.
Plot 627
Figure 20-37
The color mapping panel displays the color table of a plan panel. When
attached, the panel will automatically be placed next to the plan panel and
receive the same height. The order of the table can be reversed.
Figure 20-38
Figure 20-39
Select in the Image page the image file. The plot support several image
file formats, like BMP, JPG, TIFF, etc.
628 Plot
Figure 20-40
The key map is a panel that can display an overview of the defined plan
view rectangles of the current plot project. A plan panel of the current plot
is highlighted in the key map.
A key map panel uses the same mapping method as a plan panel. Define
an extra plan view to cover all other plan views just for the mapping of the
key map.
After creating the panel, the first thing to do is to add the Plan Views
layer. This layer will display the available plan views. Add other layers if
needed.
Figure 20-41
The scale bar is a panel that displays the scale of a plan panel in the form
of a bar.
Figure 20-42
Select in the Scale Bar page the type of the scale bar and which plan
panel will be used as reference.
Plot 629
Key Map
Profile Cross
Series
Profile Series
Profile Volume
Profile
Plan
x
x
x
x
x
x
630 Plot
Figure 20-43
The clipping polygon can be plotted in the plan panel and in the key map
panel.
Figure 20-44
When S-57 charts are converted to C-Map charts it is possible that the
scale in the plot dont match the scale of the S-57 charts. When this
happened no charts are plotted. Check the option Show chart boundary
when no data for selected scale level to see the boundaries of the charts
to be sure that the charts covers the plan panel.
Plot 631
Figure 20-45
When the option Use only dredge status is checked, then select in the
combo box which dredge status has to be plotted.
When all the dredge statuses are plotted a dredge state color table can
be selected to show each dredge status in a different color. Check the
option Use color table to make this option active.
The dredge status information can only be plotted in the plan panel.
Figure 20-46
The text size of the text from the DXF file will varies with the scale as
selected in Plot. To disable this feature select in the Text Size page the
option Use fixed text size and enter a scale. The text is then plotted with
the entered scale.
632 Plot
Figure 20-47
In the Line Style page the line width can be defined. The color to plot the
data can be selected; use the colors as in the DXF file or select a user
defined color.
The DXF file can be plotted in the plan panel and in the key map panel.
Figure 20-48
Plot 633
Annotation
Format
Select as format Degrees Minutes or Degrees Minutes Seconds.
Decimals
Number of decimals used for the minutes when as format Degrees
Minutes is selected and for the seconds when Degrees Minutes
Seconds is selected. The format Degrees Minutes plots as
minimum 3 decimals even when less decimals is selected.
Hemisphere indicator
The location of the hemisphere indicator (N, S, W or E) in the label.
Leading means that the indicator is placed for the coordinate and
Trailing behind the coordinate.
Add degrees () minutes () and seconds () symbols
Check this option to plot the symbols behind the degrees, minutes
and seconds.
Interval D MM SS.S or D MM.MMM
Select for the latitude and longitude the interval between two grid lines.
Color and Style
Color and style for the grid lines. The color of the labels can be defined
in the Labels page.
The geographic grid information can be plotted in the plan panel and in
the key map panel.
Figure 20-49
The GLW grid can be plotted in the profile panel, in the profile series
panel and in the profile cross series panel.
634 Plot
Figure 20-50
In the Cells page is defined how the grid model data is presented in the
plot.
Use limits
If checked, only the grid model cells with a depth between the
minimum and maximum depth will be plotted.
If not checked, all the cells will be plotted.
Show cells
If checked, then the cells will be plotted with the colors of the selected
color table of the plan panel (see page 618), the key map panel has no
color table. The option Points will plot a colored point in the center of
each cell and the option Solid will fill the cell with one color.
Use sun illumination
If checked, the sun illumination settings will be used to change the look
of the grid model. This is only working when for Show Cells the option
Solid is selected.
Show labels
If checked, the depth values will be plotted on top of the grid model
with the label spacing as specified. The label spacing is related to the
selected scale in the Mapping page of the plan panel or key map
panel.
In the Depth Biasing page the biasing can be set. With No biasing the
label will be plotted according the label spacing as specified in the Cells
page.
With Shoal biasing a virtual grid with the label spacing as grid size is
generated. For each virtual grid cell the shallowest value will be plotted,
starting with the shallowest value of all virtual grid cells.
With Valley biasing a virtual grid with the label spacing as grid size is
generated. For each virtual grid cell the deepest value will be plotted,
starting with the deepest value of all virtual grid cells.
The grid model data can be plotted in the plan panel and in the key map
panel.
Plot 635
Figure 20-51
In the Contour page defines the contours and the location and orientation
of the contour labels.
Suppress contours shorter
Defines that plot contour lines shorter than the specified value will not
be plotted.
Contour label spacing
Defines the spacing between two labels on the same contour line. The
label spacing is related to the selected scale in the Mapping page of
the plan panel or key map panel.
Label orientation
Defines how the labels in the contours will be plotted. The option Use
Optimum Text Angle uses as much as possible the orientation of the
plan panel or key map panel to plot the labels. The options Slope
Upwards and Slope Downwards will plot the labels in direction of the
slope, upwards up or downwards up.
Smoothing window
This option can be used to smooth the generated contours, from no
smoothing to a maximum smoothing with 7 steps in between.
The labels of the contours are plotted only when in the contour
definition file for the each contour the option Show labels is
checked.
Figure 20-52 Contour properties of a contour in the contour definition file with
the option Show labels checked
636 Plot
In the Contour Levels page, when the contour definition file is selected,
click on
to open the Contour window in which for each contour
the contour properties can be edited.
The grid model contour data can be plotted in the plan panel and in the
key map panel.
Figure 20-53
In the Design Model page 2 different model types can be selected; Grid
Models and 3D Models.
The Grid Model and Data Type page, the Cells page and the Depth
Biasing page are identical with the pages for the grid model layer (see
page 635).
The Contouring page and Contour Levels page are identical with the
pages for the grid model contour layer (see above).
The grid model difference data can be plotted in the plan panel and in the
key map panel.
Plot 637
Figure 20-54
In the Options page the settings for the profile can be defined.
Smoothing
This option can be used to smooth the generated profile, from no
smoothing to a maximum smoothing with 7 steps in between.
Average profile
The profile is generated over the active runline. Check the option Use
adjacent lines to take also profiles over the adjacent runlines on each
side. From these profiles an average is calculated and that average
profile is plotted. Enter how much adjacent lines have to be used to
calculate an average profile.
Step size
When the option User defined is not checked the points of the profile
are calculated from the centers of the grid cells that crosses the
runline.
When the option is checked the points of the profile are generated for
each step on the line. Each point is a weighted mean of the four
nearby grid cells. Enter the distance (step size) between two points of
the profile.
The grid model profile can be plotted in the profile panel, in the profile
series panel and in the profile cross series panel.
638 Plot
Figure 20-55
In the Options page the settings for the profile can be defined.
Smoothing
This option can be used to smooth the generated profile, from no
smoothing to a maximum smoothing with 7 steps in between.
Average profile
The profile is generated over the active runline. Check the option Use
adjacent lines to take also profiles over the adjacent runlines on each
side. From these profiles an average is calculated and that average
profile is plotted. Enter how much adjacent lines have to be used to
calculate an average profile.
Step size
When the option User defined is not checked the points of the profile
are calculated from the centers of the grid cells that crosses the
runline.
When the option is checked the points of the profile are generated for
each step on the line. Each point is a weighted mean of the four
nearby grid cells. Enter the distance (step size) between two points of
the profile.
Statistics
Define with how much decimals the mean, minimum, maximum and
standard deviation is plotted in the text box. Check the option Draw
Profile when the profile has to be plotted in the panel.
The four keywords have to
be added before as
keywords (see page 611)
Next to this layer a text layer (see page 646) has to be added to the
profile panel. After the text layer is added a text box can be added. In the
Text page of the text box the keywords mean, min, max and std can
be added. The values of the keywords will be plotted in the text box.
The grid model profile statistics can be plotted in the profile panel, in the
profile series panel and in the profile cross series panel.
Plot 639
Figure 20-56
Set for the X and Y grid the interval and the style. The X grid will present
the KP along the selected route. The value of the KP will be plotted and
with the prefix and/or postfix extra text can be added to the label.
The KP grid data can be plotted in the profile panel and in the profile
series panel.
Figure 20-57
In the Options page the method how the data is presented can be
defined.
Show lines
The data is presented as a line, where a line a drawn between the
data points.
Show line labels
When the option Show lines is checked this option becomes available.
The name of the line will be plotted next to the line.
Show soundings
The data is presented as dots. It is not necessary that the data is a
sounding; all types of data from the log data can be plotted.
Show soundings labels
Next to each data point a label is plotted. With Label spacing the
640 Plot
Figure 20-58
In the Options page the smoothing of the profile can be defined. This
smoothing can be used to smooth the generated profile, from no
smoothing to a maximum smoothing with 7 steps in between.
The log data profile can be plotted in the profile panel, in the profile series
panel and in the profile cross series panel.
Plot 641
Figure 20-59
In the Options page the smoothing of the profile can be defined. This
smoothing can be used to smooth the generated profile, from no
smoothing to a maximum smoothing with 7 steps in between.
The pipe profile can be plotted in the profile panel, in the profile series
panel and in the profile cross series panel.
Figure 20-60
642 Plot
Figure 20-61
In the Labels page can be set if the KP labels and route label can be
plotted.
Show KP labels
Check the option when KP labels (KP flags) has to be plotted along
the route. Set the Interval between the KP labels and the Offset for the
length of the KP flag.
Show route label
Check the option when the name of the route has to be plotted next to
the line.
The route data can be plotted in the plan panel and in the key map panel.
Figure 20-62
Plot 643
Select in the Runlines page which runlines from the runlines file have to
be plotted.
The runlines data can be plotted in the plan panel and in the key map
panel.
Figure 20-63
Annotation
Format
Select as format Degrees Minutes or Degrees Minutes Seconds.
Decimals
Number of decimals used for the minutes when as format Degrees
Minutes is selected and for the seconds when Degrees Minutes
Seconds is selected. The format Degrees Minutes plots as
minimum 3 decimals even when less decimals is selected.
Hemisphere indicator
The location of the hemisphere indicator (N, S, W or E) in the label.
Leading means that the indicator is placed for the coordinate and
Trailing behind the coordinate.
Add degrees () minutes () and seconds () symbols
Check this option to plot the symbols behind the degrees, minutes
and seconds.
Interval D MM SS.S or D MM.MMM
Select for the latitude and longitude the interval between two grid lines.
Color and Style
Color and style for the grid lines. The color of the labels can be defined
in the Labels page.
The satellite geographic grid information can be plotted in the plan panel
and in the key map panel.
644 Plot
Figure 20-64
In the Options page the presentation of the sonar targets can be defined.
Select as symbol for the sonar targets a Circle or a Cross. With the Size
the size of the symbol can be defined. The line style and color for the
circles can be defined in the Line Style page, the color of the cross is
always black.
The sonar targets can only be plotted in the plan panel.
Figure 20-65
In the Markers options page is defined how the markers of the streak lines
and fairway lines are plotted.
Marker top offset
The offset from the top of the profile panel where the markers will start.
Marker bottom offset
The offset from the bottom of the profile panel where the markers will
stop.
Plot 645
Figure 20-66
In the Options page the smoothing of the profile can be defined. This
smoothing can be used to smooth the generated profile, from no
smoothing to a maximum smoothing with 7 steps in between.
The theoretical model profile can be plotted in the profile panel, in the
profile series panel and in the profile cross series panel.
646 Plot
Figure 20-67
In the Cells page is defined how the TIN model data is presented in the
plot. The options Use limits and Use sun illumination are not valid for a
TIN model.
Show cells
If checked, then the cells will be plotted with the colors of the selected
color table of the plan panel (see page 618). The option Points will plot
a colored point in the center of each cell and the option Solid will fill the
cell with one color.
Show labels
If checked, the depth values will be plotted on top of the TIN model
with the label spacing as specified. The label spacing is related to the
selected scale in the Mapping page of the plan panel.
The TIN model data can only be plotted in the plan panel.
Figure 20-68
Plot 647
In the Contour page defines the contours and the location and orientation
of the contour labels.
Suppress contours shorter
Defines that plot contour lines shorter than the specified value will not
be plotted.
Contour label spacing
Defines the spacing between two labels on the same contour line. The
label spacing is related to the selected scale in the Mapping page of
the plan panel.
Label orientation
Defines how the labels in the contours will be plotted. The option Use
Optimum Text Angle uses as much as possible the orientation of the
plan panel to plot the labels. The options Slope Upwards and Slope
Downwards will plot the labels in direction of the slope, upwards up or
downwards up.
Smoothing window
This option can be used to smooth the generated contours, from no
smoothing to a maximum smoothing with 7 steps in between.
The labels of the contours are plotted only when in the contour definition
file for the each contour the option Show labels is checked.
Figure 20-69 Contour properties of a contour in the contour definition file with
the option Show labels checked
In the Contour Levels page, when the contour definition file is selected,
click on
to open the Contour window in which for each contour
the contour properties can be edited.
The TIN model contour data can only be plotted in the plan panel.
Figure 20-70
648 Plot
The text size of the text from the user map file (is a DXF file) will varies
with the scale as selected in Plot. To disable this feature select in the Text
Size page the option Use fixed text size and enter a scale. The text is
then plotted with the entered scale.
Figure 20-71
In the Line Style page the line width can be defined. The color to plot the
data can be selected; use the colors as in the user map file or select a
user defined color.
The user map file can only be plotted in the plan panel.
Figure 20-72
Plot 649
Figure 20-73
In the Options page the work areas from the selected work areas file in
the Work Areas page can be selected.
Select the option Show all areas when all the work areas in the work
areas file have to be plotted in the panel. With the option Show selected
areas only the work areas selected in the list will be plotted. Check Show
work area labels when the name of the work area has to be plotted with
the work area.
The work areas data can be plotted in the plan panel and in the key map
panel.
Figure 20-74
map panel
650 Plot
Grid page of the XY grid properties for the plan panel and key
For the plan panel and the key map panel select an interval and a grid
style to plot the grid in the panel. When the grid style is Ticks the option
Use long north tick becomes available. This option makes the north
oriented part of the plus sign longer than the other three parts. Behind the
label a mark can be plotted to distinguish the Eastings from the Northings.
Figure 20-75
Grid page of the XY grid properties for the different profile panels
For the different profile panels the interval for the X and Y can be
different, both has their own interval and style.
The XY grid can be plotted in the plan panel, in the profile panel, in the
profile series panel, in the profile cross series panel and in the key map
panel.
Plot 651
Figure 20-76
In the overview a drawn plan view will define which area will be used in
the DXF Export Wizard to create the DXF file. Select Place Plan View
from the overview context menu and draw the plan view over the data that
has to be exported. In the Plan View Properties the exact size for the plan
view can be set with Size X and Size Y. Give also a well-defined name for
the plan view, because the settings for the DXF export will be saved
under this name in the DXF Export Files in the Explorer (see page 239).
Figure 20-77
Plan View Properties with an exact size for the plan view
The area covered by the plan view will be the area that is used in the DXF
Export Wizard to generate the DXF file.
Select the option Export to DXF in the context menu of the plan view to
start the DXF Export Wizard.
Click in the welcome page of the wizard on
Export Wizard.
652 Plot
Figure 20-78
Click on
Plot 653
Figure 20-79
It is not possible to select
two the same data types. If
the user wants this, then
he can use the standard
plot features to generate a
DXF from a plan panel.
At the moment only these five data types are available for the DXF export.
In the future more data types will follow.
Log Data; select a data item and a position track of that data item with
or without labels will be plotted.
Grid Model; a grid model will be plotted with or without colors and
depth labels.
Contours; contours based on the data from a selected grid model will
be generated and plotted.
Runlines; the selected runlines file with or without labels will be plotted.
Waypoints: the selected waypoints with or without labels and tolerance
circles will be plotted.
The wizard will open only the pages that are related to the selected data
types.
Click on
654 Plot
Figure 20-80
In this Plan Panel page several tabs are available to define the settings
for the plot.
Mapping
The scale will be used to generate the right labels sizes and line
widths so that these items are plotted with the right scale when the
DXF export is generated.
Color Table
Select the color table that will be used for coloring the depths in the
plot.
Label Mode
The definition for plotting the labels in the plot.
The coloring can be set on Use Text Color or on Use Color Table.
When Use Color Table is selected all the labels will be colored
according the color table. When Use Text Color is selected then for
each data type the coloring has to be defined.
The rotation can be fixed by selecting Constant and define an angle for
the rotation.
Label Font
Select for the label the font type, the font style, the font size and the
color. The color is only valid when for Label Mode Use Text Color is
selected.
Plot 655
Figure 20-81
In this Log Data Settings page three tabs are available to define the
settings for the data item.
Options
The user can select if the line of the track and the line labels are
plotted or not. If the data item is a sounding the user can select if the
soundings and labels are plotted or not.
The label spacing is the space between two plotted labels along the
track. This is specified in mm and is related to the selected scale in the
Plan Panel page (see page 655).
Line Style
Select the line style, the width and the color for the track.
Depth Biasing
With No biasing the label will be plotted according the label spacing as
specified in the tab Options.
With Shoal biasing a virtual grid with the label spacing as grid size is
generated. For each grid cell the shallowest value will be plotted,
starting with the shallowest value of all grid cells.
With Valley biasing a virtual grid with the label spacing as grid size is
generated. For each grid cell the deepest value will be plotted, starting
with the deepest value of all grid cells.
656 Plot
Figure 20-82
In this Grid Model Settings page three tabs are available to define the
settings for plotting the grid model.
Cells
If the option Use limits is checked, then only the grid model cells with a
depth between the minimum and maximum depth will be plotted.
If the option Show cells is checked, then the cells will be plotted with
the colors of the selected color table in the Plan Panel page (see page
655). The option Points will plot a point in the center of each cell and
the option Solid will fill the cell with one color.
If the option Use Sun Illumination is checked, then the sun illumination
settings will be used to change the look of the grid model. This is only
working when for Show Cells the option Solid is selected.
If the option Show labels is checked, then depth values will be plotted
on top of the grid model with the label spacing as specified. The label
spacing is related to the selected scale in the Plan Panel page.
Depth Biasing
With No biasing the label will be plotted according the label spacing as
specified in the tab Options.
With Shoal biasing a virtual grid with the label spacing as grid size is
generated. For each virtual grid cell the shallowest value will be
plotted, starting with the shallowest value of all virtual grid cells.
With Valley biasing a virtual grid with the label spacing as grid size is
generated. For each virtual grid cell the deepest value will be plotted,
starting with the deepest value of all virtual grid cells.
Plot 657
Figure 20-83
In this Contours Settings page three tabs are available to define the
settings for plotting the contours of the grid model.
Contouring
Define the criteria for plotting the contours lines and the labels.
The option Suppress contours shorter defines that plot contour lines
shorter than the specified value will not be plotted.
The option Contour label spacing defines the spacing between two
labels on the same contour line. The label spacing is related to the
selected scale in the Plan Panel page (see page 655).
The option Label orientation defines how the labels in the contours will
be plotted. Use Optimum Text Angle uses as much as possible the
orientation of the plan view to plot the labels. Slope Upwards and
Slope Downwards will plot the labels in direction of the slope, upwards
up or downwards up.
The option Smoothing window can be used to smooth the generated
contours, from no smoothing to a maximum smoothing with 7 steps in
between.
Contour Levels
A contour definition file has to be selected. This file has to be
generated before the DXF Export Wizard is started. See page 249 for
information about the contour definition file.
658 Plot
Figure 20-84
In this Runlines Settings page three tabs are available to define the
settings for plotting the runlines file.
Line Style
Select the line style, the width and the color for the runlines.
Labels
If the option Show runline labels is checked then the names of the
runlines will be displayed with the offset as specified.
Label Font
Select the font type, the font style, the font size and the color for the
labels. These settings will overrule the settings made for the Label
Font in the Plan Panel page (see page 655).
Plot 659
Figure 20-85
In this Waypoints Settings page three tabs are available to define the
settings for plotting the waypoints.
Options
Select a symbol for the waypoints, Circle or Cross. Specify the size for
the symbol in mm.
If the option Show tolerance circles is checked, the tolerance circles
will be plotted around the waypoint.
Line Style
Select the line style, the width and the color for the tolerance circles.
Label Font
Select the font type, the font style, the font size and the color for the
labels. These settings will overrule the settings made for the Label
Font in the Plan Panel page (see page 655).
660 Plot
Figure 20-86
Plot 661
21.1 Introduction
In PDS2000 two methods for volume computation are available.
1. In the grid model editor with the operations Compute Volumes. See
for more details the chapter Grid Model on page 583.
2. In End Area Volumes. This option will be described below.
line n
b
line n-1
Runline
Vessel Track
Half line distance
Data point
Projected data point
Horizontal area =
Figure 21-1
a+b
c
2 *
Horizontal area
f
Delta Z =
e+f
2
Reference profile
Figure 21-2
Delta Z
Figure 21-3
On the first page of the wizard the runlines, which have to be used for the
volume computation, can be selected. If only a part of the area, that is
covered by the runlines, has to be used for the volume computation select
an existing clipping polygon.
In the next page a reference level has to be selected.
Figure 21-4
Choose reference
Choose the reference level from the following file types and select the
file name. Some of the file types have extra options that have to be
set.
Profile Design Model
No extra options to set.
3D Model
No extra options to set.
Grid Model
Select which data type of the grid model has to be used as the
reference level; the Average, Minimum or Maximum of the Z-value.
Log Data File Set
Select a data item from the log data file set as reference level. For
this item the maximum gap and maximum offtrack can be set.
The maximum gap is the maximum distance between two adjacent
data points on the same runline. In case the distance exceeds the
maximum gap, no volume computation will be done on that
location.
The maximum offtrack is the maximum distance between a data
point and the runline. In case the distance exceeds the maximum
offtrack, no volume computation will be done. A practical value is a
half line spacing.
Tolerances
The tolerances are two extra reference levels, one above and one
below the main reference level. If the tolerances are set, four different
volumes will be calculated; above the above tolerance, between the
above tolerance and the main reference level, between the main
reference level and the below tolerance and below the below
tolerance.
The tolerances are a vertical shift from the main reference level.
The next page of the wizard gives a possibility to combine two reference
types.
Figure 21-5
21.2.2 Setup
On the page Setup the volume computation wizard can be started and the
colors for the four areas in the volume computation can be defined.
Figure 21-6
21.2.3 Volumes
On the Volumes page the volumes as displayed in the plan view of the
End Area Volumes are presented in a table.
Figure 21-7
AwT
The calculated volume between the above tolerance level and the
main reference level.
BwT
The calculated volume between the main reference level and the
below tolerance level.
BT
The calculated volume below the below tolerance level.
%
The percentage of data points that covers the main reference level on
the runline. The percentage should be 100% for a valid computation
over the selected area.
Figure 21-8
21.2.5 Report
On the Report page a report with the results of the volume computation
can be generated.
Figure 21-9
22 Export
22.1 Introduction
The export utility in PDS2000 is made to export the PDS2000 log data
files to file formats which can be used with external programs.
The export can be started with Tools > Export from the menu bar or with
from the toolbar in the Control Center.
Figure 22-1
Dialog in the Export window to select or create an export
configuration file
Export 673
Figure 22-2
Excel
One Excel file is created with for each log data file, that is selected in
the file set, a separate workbook page. See on page 675 for more
details about this export type.
Simrad EM Datagram
Simrad EM3000 format with a fixed filename and the extension .ALL.
This format is an industry accepted standard format for multibeam
data. Raw data files in this format can be processed with Caris HDCS
cleaning software. See on page 677 for more details about this export
type.
Comma Separated
One ASCII file with the extension .CSV is created with all the selected
data items. If this file is opened in Excel there is only one workbook
page. See on page 675 for more details about this export type.
Multibeam points (ASCII)
A space separated XYZ ASCII file with a fixed filename and the
extension .XYZ. Optional the time of the sway, the beam number and
the quality flag can be exported. The data is filtered according the
criteria of the sensor computation. A further data reduction is possible.
Next to the normal file format, a Sonar Swath file (with .IDA extension)
and a latitude, longitude and Z in WGS84 are possible. See on page
678 for more details about this export type.
XTF
A XTF file with a fixed filename and the extension .XTF. This export
format can only be used with multibeam logging data. This data can
contain multibeam, side scan sonar, and/or snippets data. See on
page 680 for more details about this export type.
S7K
A S7K file with a fixed filename and the extension .S7K. This export
format can only be used with multibeam logging data where a RESON
SeaBat 7K system is logged. The data can contain multibeam, side
scan sonar and/or snippets data. The same records as for the S7K
logging format (see page 142) will be exported. See on page 682 for
more details about this export type.
SDS
Helical SDS (Self Defining Structure) file with a fixed filename and the
extension .SDS. This is a format to handle large amount of multibeam
data. Next to the SDS file, a CTL (Control) file will be exported. The
format of this CTL file will depend on the selected SDS settings. The
SDS file in combination with the CTL file can be read with the Helical
software. See on page 682 for more details about this export type.
SZ
An ASCII file with the extension SZ. This is a format for the
presentation and archiving of design information and echo sounder
674 Export
Figure 22-3
It will depend on the export type which tabs (pages) are available in the
export setup. The File Sets page is identical for all the export types. On
the File Sets page the file set can be selected, modified or created. With
in the export window, with
from the toolbar or with Actions >
Select Data from the menu bar the File Set Editor is opened.
The other pages will be discussed below with the different export types.
For the Excel export it is necessary that Microsoft Excel is installed on the
computer. If not it is not possible to export to an Excel file.
Export 675
The Options page for both export types are almost identical. In this page
the export format can be specified.
Figure 22-4
Correlated
In case two or more sensors are selected in the Data Selection page,
one of the sensors can be selected as reference and all the other
sensor data is recalculated for the time of the selected sensor.
Time
If checked, every sensor gets its own time column. When Correlated
is checked there will be only one time column, the time of the
correlated sensor. The column Time can be exported in Excel format
st
st
(days since 1 of January 1900) or in ANSI format (seconds since 1
of January 1970).
Header
A header line is written above the data with the file info.
Title row
Each column gets a title above the data with the name of the data.
For the Excel export is the
option Post export action
not necessary, because
the file can be opened
automatically with the
option Open output after
export.
676 Export
The Data Selection page is for both export types identical. With the data
selection a data item or a data block can be selected and placed in the
export list.
Figure 22-5
Figure 22-6
Export 677
Figure 22-7
Format type
Normal
A standard XYZ format is exported.
When the options Insert timestamp at start of swath and Insert
beam number and intensity are checked the time, the beam
number and the intensity will be inserted. At the start of each sway
the timestamp is added to the file, before the XYZ the beam
number is added and at the end the intensity of the beam.
The file contains per ping, if all the options are checked:
Date
Time
Beam number
Easting Northing
Depth Intensity
Beam number
Easting Northing
Depth Intensity
...
Sonar swath (.IDA)
This a special format for the Sonar Swath utility.
Timed XYZ data with ping no. quality flag
This is a special format with for each XYZ the ping number, the
beam angle and a quality flag.
The beam angle is the launch angle.
The quality flag can be a number from 0 (zero) to 15. The number
is build up of 4 bits of 0s (zero) and/or 1s (one), with:
Bit 0 Brightness
1 = pass and 0 = fail.
678 Export
Bit 1 Colinearity
1 = pass and 0 = fail.
Bit 2 Bottom Detect Process (Magnitude)
1 = used and 0 = not used.
Bit 3 Bottom Detect Process (Phase)
1 = used and 0 = not used.
A quality flag of 7 (= 1110) means brightness passed, colinearity
passed, magnitude used and phase not used.
The file contains per record:
Date
Time Ping number
Easting Depth Quality flag
Beam angle
Northing
Export 679
22.2.4 XTF
In the Options page for the export type XTF the XTF settings for the
export can be defined.
Figure 22-8
Click on
to open the XTF settings wizard. The wizard contains
three pages where the data can be selected for the export.
Figure 22-9
On the first page the data types have to be selected. For the export at
least one of the three data sources, multibeam, side scan or snippets,
have to be selected. If at least one of them is selected the user can also
choose to export the attitude and/or position data.
If the option Automatic selection of devices is checked, the export utility
takes always the primary data sources or the data sources that is set as
primary through the automatic switch in the data sources page of the
vessel configuration (see page 120). If the option is not checked the user
can select which data source is used for the export. The automatic switch
will be ignored.
Click on
680 Export
Figure 22-10
If the Automatic selection of devices on the first page is not checked, the
user can select which device is used for the export.
Click on to select for the VRU, the compass or the position another
data source. For the multibeam, the side scan or the snippets the
selected device can be deleted or another one can be added to the list.
If the Automatic selection of devices on the first page is checked, there is
nothing to select on this page, this page is then pure for information to the
user.
Click on
Figure 22-11
Export 681
The third and the last page of the wizard is for the altitude estimation. If a
side scan sonar is selected on the first page of the wizard, the user can
select how the altitude estimation is calculated for the side scan sonar.
For ROV operations the XTF format needs the depth of the ROV relative
to sea level. If in the ROV configuration no depth sensor is used, the
option Vessel configuration is for ROV has to be checked.
Click on
22.2.5 S7K
Next to the File Sets page nothing has to be specified for the S7K export.
The S7K export file contains the same records, if available, as specified
for the S7K logging (see page 142).
22.2.6 SDS
In the Options page for the export type SDS the SDS settings for the
export can be defined.
Figure 22-12
Click on
Figure 22-13
SDS settings
It depends on the selected settings which CTL file will be exported next to
the SDS file. The four CTL files are:
Grid coordinates with all the data (GridCoordsFull.ctl).
Geographical coordinates with all the data (GeoCoordsFull.ctl).
Grid coordinates with position, time and depth (GridCoordsBasic.ctl).
Geographical coordinates with position, time and depth
(GeoCoordsBasic.ctl).
682 Export
In all four CTL files the data will be as the selection for the depth
reference.
22.2.7 SZ
In the Options page for the export type SZ the export file name can be
defined, the channels and the data reduction can be set.
The user has to fill in a list with SZ records, which are not available in the
PDS2000 log data file.
Figure 22-14
Channel
The user can select which channel or both channels has to be
exported from the PDS2000 log data file(s).
Data reduction settings
If the option Use data reduction is checked the data will be reduced
with the value as defined with Interval in m. This means that each
interval value data will be exported.
Aufnameart
Select the measure method that was used during logging the echo
sounder data.
3D model GLW
The echo sounder data will be corrected for the GLW value(s)
belonging to be exported runline(s). This will be done with the GLW
value(s) as specified in the selected 3D model.
Export 683
Figure 22-15
The user can choose between an export in Bartel ASCII DAT format or in
Standard UXO format. If the user choose for the standard UXO format
some extra settings can be defined.
File header include file
It is possible the add a header file to the UXO export file. Click on
and select an UXO file as header file. The path and file
name will be displayed in the text field.
Decimal symbol
There can be chosen between a Dot or a Comma as decimal sign in
the numbers in the UXO file.
Relative coordinate origin
In the UXO file the local grid coordinates X and Y are written. If these
numbers are to big to use in other programs an origin can be defined
so the grid coordinates in the UXO file getting smaller. The Northing
and Easting as entered will be subtracted from the local grid
coordinates.
Sensor height
The sensor height will be written in the UXO file as the Z value.
684 Export
22.2.9 FAU
In the Options page for the FAU export one of the two FAU formats can
be selected.
Figure 22-16
The default and standard format is FAU 1 with the beam angle. There is
no difference in the file name between both formats.
The FAU file will be identical with a logged FAU file and is explained in
the logging (see page 143).
22.2.10 GSF
In the Options page for the export type GSF can be selected if the
multibeam data in the GSF file is uncorrected or fully corrected. The
corrected multibeam data is computed according the multibeam xyz
computation in the multibeam device data.
Figure 22-17
The GSF file will be identical with a logged GSF file and is explained in
the logging (see page 144).
Export 685
Figure 22-18
For each selected source a separate XYZ file will be exported, containing
backscatter points and magnitude values.
Figure 22-19
686 Export
22.3 Exporting
If everything is set for the export, the selected data can be exported. Click
on
from the toolbar or select Actions > Export from the menu bar to
start the export.
For the export types Excel, Comma Separated and SZ the standard
Save As dialog is opened and a default filename is given.
Figure 22-20
Save As dialog for the Excel and the Comma Separated export
Select the location and give a proper filename for the export file and click
on
to start the export. For the other export types the files are
directly saved with a default filename in the LogData folder. A Progress
window will appear to show the progress of the export.
Export 687
Index
B
3
3D Box View - 477, 526, 570
3D Design Model - 171, 216, 416, 481, 490, 497
3D Design Model Editor - 162, 163, 164
3D Model - 159, 162, 163, 164, 171, 207, 244,
245, 246, 248, 394, 582, 590, 592, 673, 692
3D Object Manager - 244, 286
3D Objects - 244
3D Studio Model - 238
3D View - 67, 286, 584
3D View Online - 304, 305, 320
3D View Online Dredge - 304, 306, 320
3D View Online Water Column - 308, 434
3D View Standard - 481, 482, 485
7
7K Center - 326
A
Absorption - 325, 330
Access Level - 226
Acquisition - 25, 69, 84, 86, 109, 118, 126, 128,
129, 133, 142, 159, 162, 166, 167, 168,
175, 176, 177, 180, 224, 226, 227, 242,
243, 248, 266, 267, 273, 281, 282, 284,
290, 291, 292, 294, 295, 300, 303, 304,
323, 338, 339, 350, 355, 389, 392, 394,
413, 415, 419, 422, 441, 444, 445, 502,
518, 557, 567, 584
Active Editor - 457, 459
Active Vessel - 285, 286, 287, 336
Administrator - 224
Advanced Computation - 122, 460
AIS Layer - 409
Alarm - 69, 85, 86, 150, 153, 162, 168, 172, 244,
284, 289, 321, 322, 425, 442
Alert Sounds - 78
Alerts - 289
Alerts View - 285, 286, 321, 322
ALL File - 208
Amplitude Detection Filter - 384
Anchor Definition - 127
C
Cassini-Soldner - 103
Chart Layer properties. - 53
Circular Interpolation - 207, 514, 577, 596
Clipping Polygon - 150, 163, 166, 244, 248, 249,
258, 406, 504, 559, 560, 565, 570, 573,
581, 582, 583, 584, 586, 587, 588, 591,
596, 640, 673
Clipping Polygon Editor - 238, 249
Clock Synchronization - 183, 185, 186, 187
C-Map - 11, 14, 26, 27, 28, 29, 31, 34, 36, 38,
39, 274, 275, 277, 397, 403, 640
C-Map Chart Manager - 31, 33, 34, 36
Color Mapping Panel - 625, 636
Color Maps - 243
Color Table - 245, 250, 251, 253, 257, 319, 321,
357, 358, 359, 371, 405, 479, 481, 483,
489, 490, 526, 528, 539, 543, 546, 560,
561, 570, 587, 593, 608, 613, 636, 641, 664
Color Table Generator - 251, 253
Compass - 367
Compass View - 323
Index 689
D
DAT File - 683
Data Source - 124, 125, 180, 285, 444, 449,
464, 465, 688, 689
Data Source Switching - 490, 491
Data Source Switching Editor - 491
Database - 31, 32, 36, 233, 235, 238, 242, 243,
271, 609
Datum Transformation - 94, 95, 96, 108, 218
Dekdienst - 494
Delimiter - 201, 202, 203
Depth Filter - 373, 376
Design Model - 125, 159, 162, 216, 415, 417
Design Profile Template - 245, 257, 258, 259,
260
Design Profile Template Editor - 257, 260, 261
Device Configuration BlueView - 330
Device Configuration Interferometry GeoSwath
- 331
Device Configuration RESON HydroBat View 328
Device Configuration RESON-7K View - 324
Device Configuration View - 323
Device Driver - 16, 118, 144, 152
DGN - 274
Directional Interpolation - 597
Disk Space - 77
Display Mode - 183, 185, 356
Dock Area - 64, 65
Docking - 64, 282, 283
690 Index
Dongle - 14, 17, 19, 20, 21, 81, 127, 243, 282,
284, 454
Drag & Drop - 385, 426, 446, 608
Draping - 584
Dredge Bars Horizontal View - 334, 335
Dredge Bars Vertical View - 334, 335
Dredge Flow/Concentration Meter View - 334,
336
Dredge Load and Draught View - 334, 337
Dredge SCADA View - 243, 334, 338
Dredge Differential Color Table - 255
Dredge Instruction - 125, 159, 170, 245, 287,
394
Dredge Instruction Editor - 170
Dredge Status - 641
Dredge Status Configuration - 243
Dredge Status View - 338
Dredge Track - 144
DXF Export - 245, 661, 670
DXF File - 16, 117, 144, 163, 164, 172, 214,
218, 242, 244, 245, 246, 247, 250, 271,
274, 397, 615, 622, 623, 625, 628, 636,
641, 661, 670
DXF Panel - 625, 636
Dynamic Gridding - 565, 566
E
Echosounder Graphical Trace - 341
Echosounder Graphical Trace View - 339
Edgetech - 189, 194
Edit Alarm - 405
Electronic Chart - 169, 249, 274
Ellipsoid - 91, 93, 96, 97, 108, 218, 219, 221,
222, 289
End Area Volumes - 452, 631, 671, 672
Equipment - 117, 118, 121, 180, 243, 285, 409,
443, 449
ESRI - 274, 583
eToken Dongle - 26, 27, 30, 31, 33, 278
ETRS89 - 218, 219, 221, 222, 223, 224
Event Definition - 175, 177, 180
Event Definition Editor - 177
Eventing - 175, 176, 287
Events - 69, 85, 175, 242, 284, 291
Excluded Area - 245, 249, 258, 504
Explorer - 109, 126, 177, 180, 183, 230, 233,
234, 235, 237, 238, 242, 243, 249, 250,
255, 257, 258, 262, 270, 271, 272, 273,
275, 279, 280
Export - 164, 451, 452, 567, 583, 622, 681, 683,
696
Export Configuration File - 242, 681, 682
F
FAU File - 148, 683, 694
Feature Angle - 610
Feature Edge - 610, 611
H
HDCS - 143, 562, 563, 682
Helmsman View - 347
Helpdesk View - 289
Hotine Oblique Mercator - 103
HTML File - 16
Hypothesis - 502, 505, 527, 530
I
Icon Image - 80, 280, 349, 402
Icon Image View - 349
IHO Error Filter - 364, 370, 374, 380
IHO Order - 370, 380, 503, 590
Image Panel - 625, 637
Import - 183, 194, 196, 197, 199, 202, 211, 212,
245, 270, 567
Import Configuration File - 238, 242
Incidence Angle - 378
Interfacing - 118, 183, 188, 189
Interferometry - 374, 380
Intersection Angle - 374
Intersection Filter - 374, 377
Interval Logging - 132, 148
Interval Logging View - 133, 350
L
Lambert One Parallel - 103
Lambert Two Parallel - 103
Lamberts Law Correction - 439, 441, 550
Language - 183
Laser Scan - 480, 484, 531, 540, 547
Laser Scan MDL View - 351
Laser Scan Riegl Z Series View - 351
Layer Control - 38, 46, 164, 165, 266, 319, 321,
335, 369, 395, 403, 405, 408, 410, 423,
425, 430, 435, 438, 445, 481, 484, 489,
535, 540, 543, 548, 550, 553, 560, 571
Layer Order - 408, 624, 625
Layout - 69, 84, 281, 282, 283, 284, 303, 448,
449, 452, 454, 457
Lead-in Line - 115, 161
Leap Seconds - 79, 186
Level Contact - 419
Line-Based Editing Multiline View - 495, 498,
499
Line-Based Editing Standard View - 495, 496,
499
Lite View - 183
Logdata File - 460, 572, 585
Logging - 76, 141, 142, 150, 151, 161, 281, 287,
291, 300, 443, 449, 569
M
Main System - 117
Man Over Board - 286, 301
Manual Input Dredge Status View - 243, 352,
353, 557
Max. Ping Rate - 324
Measure - 164, 401, 430, 542, 552, 560, 570
Memory - 12
Mercator - 103
Messages HydroBat View - 353
Messages I/O Port View - 354
Messages SeaBat 7K View - 353
Index 691
N
Nadir Filter - 146, 373, 374, 378
Navisoft - 196
NCC - 189, 194
New Project Wizard - 71, 72
North Arrow - 16, 627
North Arrow Panel - 625, 627
Numerics Sonar Targets View - 388, 536
Numerics Standard View - 385, 386, 426
Numerics View - 337, 388
O
Object Distance - 125, 159, 172
Offtrack - 218, 219
OPC - 189, 193
Open GL - 19
OpenGIS - 245, 246, 583
Output Control View - 389, 390
Output Messages - 121
Overwrite Suppression - 624
P
P190 - 683
PCI Card - 18
PCMCIA Card - 18
PDF File - 13, 17, 220, 222, 233, 270, 273, 467,
513, 558, 575, 590, 592, 593, 679
692 Index
Q
Quick Profile Plot - 183, 214, 215
R
R7K - 189, 193
R7KI - 189, 192
Range - 324, 329, 434, 437
Range Filter - 373, 376
Raster Editor - 274, 276, 277
Raw Data View - 133, 295, 385, 425, 426, 446
Realtime - 281
Recache - 458, 460, 473, 520
Reference Level - 590, 591, 593, 594, 673, 674,
677
Remote Presentation - 23, 24, 25, 301
Remote Vessel - 83
Replay - 142, 447, 448
RESON HydroBat - 118, 323, 353, 354
RESON Remote IO - 192
RESON SeaBat 7K - 118, 146, 148, 186, 192,
193, 323, 353, 354, 362, 370, 436, 682
RESON SeaBat 8K - 148
Restricted Area - 125, 159, 167, 168, 246, 249
RGL - 189, 191
RijksDriehoek Meting - 103
Route - 125, 159, 160, 165, 167, 176, 218, 219,
258, 261, 290, 323, 347, 348, 368, 403,
S
S-57 - 274, 275, 277, 279, 640
S-57 chart layer - 51
S-63 - 278
S7K File - 146, 205, 326, 682, 690
S7K Import - 205, 212
Satellite Geographic Grid - 653
SBET File - 468
Scale Bar Panel - 626, 638
Scale Factor - 221
Scatterplot View - 427, 428
SDS File - 147, 682, 691
Sea Level - 68, 115, 355, 373, 412, 463, 490,
685
Selector - 267, 493, 498, 557
Serial - 189
Side Scan - 145, 204, 205, 441, 548, 682, 688,
689, 690
Simrad EM3000 - 143, 682, 685
Simrad EM3000 Import - 208, 212
Simulator - 183
Singlebeam Filter Settings - 416
Singlebeam Interpolation - 598
Slant Range Correction - 440, 441, 550
Slant Range Distortion - 441
Slope Angle - 374
Slope Filter - 374, 377
Smart Filter - 374, 380
Snippets - 145, 204, 205, 548, 682, 688, 689
Socket - 189
Sonar Sidescan View - 439, 548, 551
Sonar Snippets View - 439, 548, 551
Sonar Wedge view - 431
Sonar Target - 79, 279, 319, 402, 405, 428, 429,
440, 441, 535, 536, 542, 550, 551, 654
Sonar Targets View - 428, 430, 551, 552
Sonar View Sidescan - 429
Sonar View Snippets - 429
SonarSwath - 686
Sound Velocity - 325, 330, 523
Sound Velocity Editor - 523
Sound Velocity Profile - 208, 247, 261, 262, 265,
375, 523, 524, 525
Sound Velocity Profile Editor - 238
Speed Correction - 440, 441, 550
Index 693
694 Index
U
UDP/IP - 190, 193
Uncertainty of the Hypothesis - 502, 505, 529
Units - 74, 100, 103, 115, 118, 152, 243, 262
Universal Transverse Mercator - 103
USBL Calibration - 451
USBL Transceiver - 451, 462
USBL Transponder - 451, 462
Use surface speed of sound as firtst entry in the
table - 375
User Account - 183, 224, 227
user defined GPS ASCII data format - 469
User Maps - 405, 406
USGS Dem - 562, 565
UXO Format - 693
W
Water Column Samples Mode - 522
WAV File - 78, 243
Wayline - 162, 176, 287, 323, 347, 348, 402,
404
Waypoint - 125, 159, 162, 248, 286, 287, 301,
323, 402, 404, 427, 490, 659, 663, 669
Waypoints - 279
Waypoints Editor - 238
WGS84 - 148, 218, 219, 221, 222, 223, 224,
246, 583
Winfrog - 143
Wireframe - 242, 490, 613
Work Area - 125, 159, 166, 248, 287
X
XSE - 189, 190
XTF File - 145, 204, 682, 688, 689, 690
XTF Import - 204, 212
XYZ - 143, 196, 198, 199, 201, 202, 203, 204,
212, 562, 565, 584, 595, 609, 671, 683
XYZ File - 143, 213, 608, 682
Z
ZIP File - 235, 237, 238
Index 695